The Project Gutenberg eBook, Camping on the St. Lawrence, by Everett T.
Tomlinson, Illustrated by A. B. Shute
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
Title: Camping on the St. Lawrence
Or, On the Trail of the Early Discoverers
Author: Everett T. Tomlinson
Release Date: April 30, 2013 [eBook #42623]
Language: English
***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE***
E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Matthew Wheaton, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net)
Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
file which includes the original illustrations.
See 42623-h.htm or 42623-h.zip:
(http://www.gutenberg.org/files/42623/42623-h/42623-h.htm)
or
(http://www.gutenberg.org/files/42623/42623-h.zip)
Transcriber's note:
Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_).
The oe-ligature is represented by [oe].
[Illustration: "He stood up in the boat, and gave all his
attention to the fish." _Page 73._]
CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE
Or
On the Trail of the Early Discoverers
by
EVERETT T. TOMLINSON
Author of "The Boys with Old Hickory," "Tecumseh's Young
Braves," "Guarding the Border," "The Boys of Old Monmouth,"
"Washington's Young Aids," "Ward Hill at Weston," etc., etc.
Illustrated by A. B. Shute
Boston
Lee and Shepard Publishers
1905
Copyright, 1899, by Lee and Shepard.
All Rights Reserved.
CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE.
Norwood Press
J. S. Cushing & Co.--Berwick & Smith
Norwood Mass. U.S.A.
PREFACE.
In this story I have endeavored to take my young readers to one of our
noblest rivers, and not only to make them share in the stirring
experiences which are to be had on its waters, but also to make them
feel something of the power of the wonderful history of those who
first looked upon its scenes of beauty.
The events recorded have largely been taken from actual occurrences,
the characters, I trust, will not be found untrue to life, and the
historical references not inaccurate or uninteresting. Young people
are able to feel the inspiration of nature's power when they are not
able to define or express it, and perhaps the best form of teaching is
that which enables them to look out with the inner vision rather than
to observe these things from the outside.
Inspiring as is the majestic river, no less inspiring is the story of
the men who first sailed over its waters. Their heroism, persistence,
and consecration are qualities which are needed by all men, and in all
places and times. We never outgrow these things, though the best parts
of our lives may grow out of them.
A better understanding of our own land--its natural beauty, its
history and heroes--is certainly not one of the least of the demands
of the present time; and the author of this story has had the modest
hope that its readers may gain a desire in its perusal to see and know
more of those possessions which with pardonable pride they are able to
claim as their own.
EVERETT T. TOMLINSON.
ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER PAGE
I. PREPARATIONS 1
II. THE JOURNEY 14
III. THE SAIL DOWN THE RIVER 27
IV. IN CAMP 41
V. BEN TRIES THE CANOE 53
VI. THE FIRST DAY'S SPORT 66
VII. IN GOOSE BAY 79
VIII. JOCK HAS HIS TURN 93
IX. ANCIENT HISTORY 105
X. TOM SURPRISES THE CAMP 118
XI. A NIGHT OF ANXIETY 131
XII. THE MISSING CAMPER 143
XIII. A MISHAP 155
XIV. ETHAN TELLS OF THE "JUMPERS" 169
XV. IN A FOREIGN LAND 183
XVI. AN ALARM IN THE CAMP 196
XVII. ON GUARD 209
XVIII. AN UNEXPECTED RACE 221
XIX. A MOONLIGHT SAIL 234
XX. THE START FOR THE RAPIDS 247
XXI. SHOOTING THE LONGUE SEAUT 260
XXII. THE RIVALS 274
XXIII. A PRIZE 286
XXIV. WHAT BECAME OF THE PRIZE 299
XXV. EARLY DISCOVERERS 312
XXVI. THE SQUALL 324
XXVII. THE SEARCH 336
XXVIII. HAMLICK 349
XXIX. AFTER THE TRAGEDY 362
XXX. BEN'S DISCOVERY 375
XXXI. THE RACES 388
XXXII. CONCLUSION 401
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
"He stood up in the boat and gave all his attention
to the fish" _Frontispiece_
PAGE
"Suddenly the canoe went over" 62
"The fire roared and the flames leaped higher" 107
"'She looked at me a minute as if she didn't know what
to make of it'" 151
"Bob took a long stick and poked the motionless form" 213
"On and on moved the swift-flying skiff" 269
"'Did you ever catch a bigger one?'" 303
"Without a protest the young mother rose" 356
CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE.
CHAPTER I.
PREPARATIONS.
"Have you heard from Bob? Will he come?"
"Can't tell yet. I had a letter this morning, and he writes that it's
doubtful. He hasn't given up all hope, though, and says he may get on
the rear platform just as the train pulls out."
"That would be just like him. He never started for chapel till all the
fellows were there, or went into class-room until the recitation was
just ready to begin. He never wasted a minute of his time hanging
round."
"He never was late, though, in his life."
"That's all right. I know that as well as you do. I sometimes used to
wish he would be late, for it made me half provoked to see him.
Nothing ever seemed to put him out, and yet he'd always come in just
at the last minute, as if he hadn't hurried or he somehow knew they
wouldn't begin until he got there. It was just the same with his
studies. There I'd be burning my midnight oil and putting in my best
work, and he'd sit down for a few minutes at the table and do in half
an hour what it had taken me three straight hours to work out. I never
saw such a fellow."
"Yes, Bob was a great fellow."
"You don't have to remind me of that. Haven't we roomed together all
through senior year? I used to think before he took up his bed and
came over to room with me, that if I could only have him with me,
somehow I'd catch the way he did his work, but it wasn't contagious."
"He's got, without asking for it, what my father says is the one thing
he sent me to the academy for, and what he's going to send me to
college to get, though I'm afraid he'll be disappointed."
"What's that?"
"Oh, it's what my father calls the power of concentrating your mind."
"Well, Bob had it for a fact. It didn't seem to make much difference
to him whether there was a room full of fellows about him, or not.
When he got ready to work, he just sat down to it, and you might yell
in his ears or pull his chair out from under him, and it wouldn't make
a bit of difference. He'd sit there on thin air and dig away until his
work was all done and then look up as if he was as surprised as you
please to see any one in the room. Do you know, I just envied Bob. I
did for a fact. I'd give all my father's money to stand in his shoes."
"Perhaps your father would have something to say about that. But Bob
was a great fellow; no mistake about that. Do you think he'll have to
give up going to college with us?"
"I don't know; I hope not. His mother's a widow, you know, and since
his father died, I think they've had a hard time of it. If it was any
other fellow I'd say right off he couldn't go. But Bob's different,
you see. He didn't have any money and couldn't do lots of the things
the others did, but he was the most popular fellow in all the school,
for all that. So I somehow don't give up hope that he'll go with us in
the fall, after all. Everything seems to turn his way."
"Don't you believe it. It's the other way around, I'm telling you. He
just turns everything his way."
"Well, I don't care how you put it if he'll only join us in the camp.
I say, Jock, how did you happen to hit on this plan? It's great,
that's what it is."
"Oh, I didn't hit on it at all, it was my father. You see, he spent
the first vacation he's had in ten years last summer down at the
Thousand Islands. We all had such a good time that we wanted to go
again this summer; but he couldn't get away, and my mother wouldn't go
without him, so they finally compromised on me. At first they thought
they'd send me down to Alexandria Bay and Round Island to one of the
hotels, and for fear that I'd get lonesome they were going to select
some fine man who was well up in Latin and Greek to go along with me,
just for company, you see."
"Yes, I see," laughed his companion. "They were going to get a tutor
for you, were they?"
"Yes, that's what some people call it, I believe. But when I
astonished the family by passing my entrance exams., they didn't know
what to do, so at my own suggestion my father hired a camp on Pine
Tree Island, and the result is that you and the other fellows are to
benefit by my brilliant labors. You ought to be grateful; but this is
a cold, cold world, and I'm not building my hopes too high. The
trouble is, I _know_ you."
"Oh, we'll do the dutiful act and put in all the flourishes," said his
friend, with a laugh. "But say, Jock, is it really true about the
fishing and canoeing and all that sort of thing that they tell about
there?"
"True? well, I should say it was! You won't need but one look at the
river to make you think you've found the best spot on earth. Fishing,
fishing? why, let me tell you."
"No, no! please don't. I can't bear too much, you must remember."
"Fishing?" resumed Jock, unmindful of his friend's banter, "why, one
morning last summer I got up before breakfast--"
"Impossible!" interrupted his friend. "I can stand your fish stories;
but that--that is too much for me."
"One morning I got up early, as I was telling you," resumed Jock.
"I believe you did make some remarks upon that subject."
"Keep still! Well, I got up before light--"
"What, what?"
"And went out with my boatman. We caught thirty of the biggest bass
you ever saw--"
"Ever saw or ever expect to see," broke in his friend.
"And we were just going ashore to cook our dinner--"
"But when and where did you have breakfast? You've got ahead of your
story. Tell me about the breakfast. I haven't recovered from the shock
of thinking of you as being up before that was ready."
"And just before we landed, I was beginning to reel in my line. I had
out about a hundred and fifty feet, when all at once--"
"What, what? Oh, don't keep me in this suspense, I can't bear it,"
again interrupted his irreverent friend, striking an attitude of eager
attention as he spoke.
"I had a strike that almost yanked my rod out of my hand."
"Ah, yes, I see, your hook had caught on the bottom."
Jock flung a book at the head of his friend and then laughingly said:
"Well, you just wait till we get into camp, that's all I can say. If
you don't tell bigger stories then than I can now, it will be because
language has failed you."
"I usually fail in language; my marks are apt to be below par. But I
must be going now, Jock. You say the train leaves the Grand Central at
nine to-night?"
"Yes. You'd better get your ticket and check your trunk early. There's
likely to be a crowd at this time of the year."
"I'll be there. Got your ticket, Jock?"
"Me? Yes. I've got a pass for Bob and myself, or rather my father got
one for us."
"That's the way in this world," said his friend, with mock solemnity.
"Here you are the son of a railroad magnate and just rolling in lucre,
and you don't have to buy a ticket like common mortals. No, you have a
pass and all the conductors and porters stand off and look at you as
if you were the King of Cr[oe]sus or some other thing, and we poor
little sons of lawyers have to march up to the ticket-office and plank
down good, hard-earned straight cash for our little pieces of
pasteboards."
"You are to be pitied," replied Jock. "I heard my father say the other
day the reason the railroads couldn't make any money was because the
lawyers got in first, and the roads had to take what little they
left."
"Did he say that?"
"Yes, for a fact."
"This moment I return to my ancestral domicile and demand of my stern
parent the portion which falleth to me. He has kept his possession of
such vast wealth concealed from his family. I go to make him
disgorge."
"Don't forget the train leaves at nine," warned Jock. "I've got the
sleeping-car tickets, or at least I've got a section and a berth.
That'll be enough if Bob shouldn't come, and if he does, why, two of
us will have to double up, that's all."
Jock watched his friend as he ran down the stairway, and then turned
back into his own room and continued his preparations for the proposed
journey. Fishing tackle was rearranged, a gun was placed carefully in
its case, and many details looked after which only a light-hearted
lad, eager for a new experience, knew how to provide.
And certainly Josiah Cope apparently had everything to add to his
happiness. His home was one of wealth, and all that father or mother
could do had been done for him. He was an eager-hearted lad, as full
of good impulses as one could well be, and as he moved busily about in
his room it was not difficult to understand why he was such a
universal favorite among his mates. His face had that expression of
frankness and good-will which somehow draws to itself all who behold
it, whether they will or no; and the devotion with which his mother
watched over him was, in a measure, shared by his schoolboy friends,
for there was something about him which appealed to their desire to
protect and shield him from ruder blasts which others might endure
more readily.
Not that Jock (for so his friends had shortened the somewhat homely
name which the lad was the fifth in direct descent to bear) was in the
least effeminate, but his slight figure, his dark eyes and somewhat
delicate features, left one with the impression that he was not
over-rugged. Whatever others might think, his mother was most
decidedly of that opinion, and perhaps not without reason; for she
had seen his brothers and sisters enter the home only to remain for a
few brief years and then go out forever, and Jock, she frequently
declared, was her all. If she meant all she had left, she was correct,
and certainly the love he received in his home might easily have been
shared with many, and then no one would have complained of receiving
too small a portion.
But Jock had somehow survived the perilous treatment and apparently
was as popular among his mates as he was in his home. And unknown to
him it was the loving fears of his mother that had led to the
experiment of a summer camp among the Thousand Islands in the hope
that the breath of the great river and the outdoor life would bring a
little more color into the cheeks that were too pale for a well-grown
lad of seventeen to have.
The decision once made, the next move was to select his companions.
This was not a difficult problem, and soon the choicest three of his
friends in the academy from which Jock had just graduated, and with
whom he hoped to go up to college in the coming autumn, were invited
to join him,--an invitation quickly and eagerly accepted by all save
Robert Darnell, the "Bob" of the preceding conversation, and the
reasons which led him to hesitate have already been referred to.
Still all hoped that the sturdy Bob, the quiet self-contained lad, the
leader of his class in scholarship, and easily the best bat in school,
could come from his home in the country and join them.
Albert, or "Bert," Bliss, who had been having the conversation we have
already reported, was a short sturdy lad, always ready for a good
time, his curly hair and laughing blue eyes causing one to laugh
whenever he saw him, so irresistible was the contagion of his
overflowing spirits.
The fourth member of the proposed party, Benjamin, or "Ben," Dallett,
was in many ways the opposite of Albert, and in school parlance they
had sometimes been known as the "Siamese twins," or "The Long and the
Short of it." Certainly they were much together, and just as certainly
was Ben as much too tall as his friend was too short.
All of the boys save Bob had their abode in New York and had come from
homes of wealth, but in their presence Bob almost never thought of
his own deprivations, or only when it was impossible for him to engage
in some of the enterprises of his friends, and certain it is that the
envy to which Ben had given expression, if there was such a feeling
manifest among the four friends, was much more of the sterling worth
and quiet powers of Bob than of the possessions of the others. At all
events, they had become fast friends, and, bound together by such ties
as can only be found in school and college, would be certain to have a
good time if once they should be together in the camp on the selected
island in the St. Lawrence River.
The evening had come, and the three boys had eagerly been watching in
the great station for the arrival of their friend. As yet he had not
appeared, and when the gong sounded its warning, reluctantly they
grasped their various belongings and, holding their tickets in their
teeth, passed through the gate and boarded their train.
"It isn't time yet," said Bert. "He won't come till the train begins
to move."
"I'm afraid he isn't coming at all," replied Jock, as he arranged his
various parcels in the section, all the time keeping a careful lookout
for the appearance of the missing Bob in the doorway of the car.
CHAPTER II.
THE JOURNEY.
The train was now increasing its speed and swept swiftly past the city
blocks, and then with a groan darted into the long tunnel. The rumble
became a roar, and as the boys were convinced that the missing Bob had
been left behind, they glanced about the car at their travelling
companions.
Apparently every berth had been taken, and it was evident from the
fishing rods that could be seen that many besides themselves had
started for the great river. There were young people and old, and
little children who already were rubbing their sleepy eyes, unable to
remain awake longer, in spite of the noise of the fast-flying cars and
the roar of the train in the tunnel.
Soon the sounds changed, and all knew that they had passed through the
underground way, and the scattered lights of the streets could be seen
again. As the boys turned once more to glance behind them, Jock
emitted a shout; for there, standing quietly in the aisle, was the
missing member of the band, Bob Darnell himself.
"Where did you come from, Bob?" shouted Jock, delightedly, as he
grasped his friend's hand. "We thought we'd lost you."
"It's mighty easy to get lost in this town of yours. Who would want to
live in such a place?" replied Bob, quietly.
"But where were you? How did you get aboard? We waited and waited for
you, but you didn't come. Tell us about it," exclaimed the eager boys,
as they made room for their friend to take the vacant seat.
"You might have known I'd be here. You needn't have wasted your
precious thoughts on me."
"I know it, Bob, but I don't see how you got here," said Jock.
"You city chaps don't understand, and you never will," replied Bob.
"You always rush around as if you hadn't a minute to spare. What's the
good of it, I'd like to know?"
"Not much good, if we could only be as sure of being on time as you
are, Bob," said Bert. "Why don't you tell us how you did it?"
"There isn't anything to tell. My train got in about an hour ago, and
I went up on Madison Avenue to Jock's house. They told me he'd gone to
the station with you fellows, and they all seemed to be very much
excited about it, too. All they could say to me was: 'Hurry up. Make
haste, or you'll be left.' Queer folks, these New Yorkers."
"Well, you did almost get left, didn't you?"
"Left? Not a bit of it. It's true they had closed the door, and the
gateman didn't want to let me pass, especially when I didn't have any
ticket. But after a little argument he relented, and I went down to
the platform. There I had a tussle with the porter, for he was just
getting aboard the train, and had taken in his steps. He, too, wanted
to see my ticket, but I didn't have time to stop and talk much with
him, so I just climbed in after him. I found I was on the last car, so
I had to travel all through the train to find you. You ought not to
have made me do that, fellows; it's too much of an exertion," he added
regretfully.
The boys all laughed, and their evident unconsciousness of the
presence of the others in the car, and their light-hearted and merry
voices, soon drew the attention of their travelling companions. Old
men glanced at them with a softened expression on their countenances,
as if the sight of young life and care-free lads reminded them of days
in their own lives now far away and dim in the years that were gone.
Old ladies watched them and smiled, without understanding what it was
that made their eyes light up as they listened to the contagious
laughter of the happy-hearted boys. Little children came tottering and
staggering down the swaying aisle, and stopped before them, peering
wonderingly at the band as if they knew they must be having a good
time, and would like to join in it themselves. Jock passed pieces of
candy to the little ones, and the enjoyment of the boys became keener
as they watched the children thrust the sweetmeats into their mouths,
and then go staggering back to their mothers, and, climbing into their
laps, point gleefully to the group which had treated them so well.
Indeed, the very presence of the boys seemed to create a different
atmosphere in the car, and in whatever direction they looked, they
were sure to be met with smiling glances. Certainly, thoughts of
possible evil days to come did not disturb them; the burdens of life
were all for others, and as far as our four friends were concerned,
life itself was colored with a halo of the brightness which not only
was theirs by right, but was increased by the anticipation of days
that were soon to come in the camp on Pine Tree Island.
"I haven't bothered my head much about the details of this thing,"
said Bob, "but I'd like to know how much work we've got to do
to-morrow."
"No work at all, Bob," said Jock, laughing. "I wouldn't dare lay such
a contract as that on your delicate shoulders."
"That's kind of you," replied Bob, shrugging those same shoulders,
which certainly to the ordinary observer gave no symptoms of delicacy.
"But I was thinking about the camp, you know. Some tent or some thing
or other has to be set up, I suppose. Who's to do that, I'd like to
know?"
"That's all been done," said Jock, laughingly. "My father wrote Ethan
Barnes last week--he's to be our guide, you know, or rather one of
them, for his son is to be there too. Everything has been sent on
ahead and probably by this time Ethan's got everything all ready for
us. You see, my father used to live in that part of the world when he
was a boy, and he and Ethan were old school friends. They used to sit
together on the same bench, I believe. Father says the old red
schoolhouse is still standing, and he'd like to have me go over there
some day. He says I'd find his initials cut in the seat with the first
jack-knife he ever owned. There's one thing you'll have to do though,
Bob."
"What's that?"
"You'll have to reel in your own fish when you get a strike."
"Strike? What's a strike? Do I have to do the striking?"
"No, no. When a bass swallows your hook they call it a 'strike.'"
"Who calls it a strike, the bass?"
"No, everybody calls it that."
"Well, all I can say, I don't blame a bass for striking then. I'd
strike, too, if I was in his place."
"You? not much, you'd never strike. You'd just wait till somebody came
along and took the hook out of your mouth," was Ben's merry comment.
"How do you do the fishing?" inquired Bob, apparently unmoved.
"Why, we go out in boats, you know. Skiffs. Those St. Lawrence skiffs
are beauties too, let me tell you," said Jock.
"But how do the skiffs go?" persisted Bob. "By steam?"
"No, no. We'll have boatmen. Ethan will pull one and his son the
other, and two of us will go in each. It's great sport."
"It must be. You don't know what a load you've lifted from me. I
almost gave up when I thought I'd have to work. It doesn't agree with
me. Never did. My mother has noticed it ever since I was born. But
she's the only one who understands me. Hello, here's the mogul!"
The boys looked up as he spoke, and saw the conductor and the porter
near them. As their tickets were taken and the berths assigned, Bob
said:--
"Jock, you say you'll take the berth in the next section. There won't
be any room left for you, I'm thinking. That's all spoken for now."
For the first time Jock noticed who was seated in the adjoining
section. A woman was there, but never in all his life had he seen one
so stout. It almost seemed as if she completely filled the seat, and
it was evident from her manner that she was far from feeling at her
ease. She glanced nervously about the car, and not for a moment
relaxed her grasp on the seat. Her eyes, too, betrayed her alarm, and
it was plain that the experience she was then undergoing was a new and
not altogether pleasurable one.
As the boys glanced at her, her fear seemed to increase. She rose from
the seat, but a sudden lurch of the car sent her back again with an
exclamation of anger which could be heard by all.
"Here, you!" she called. "I say, mister, come here!"
It was the colored porter to whom she was speaking, and as he turned
back respectfully to listen to what she had to say, his face beamed
with good nature and amusement.
"What is it, madam?" he said kindly.
"I thought they told me this was a sleepin' car."
"So it is."
"It is, is it? Well, where do folks sleep, I'd like to know?"
"Why, in the beds."
"I don't see no beds," she replied angrily, as she looked about the
car.
"Why, madam, these seats are the beds."
"The seats are the beds? Humph, pretty beds they are! Do you expect
_me_ to lie down on 'em?"
"They are changed and made up. I'm the porter and I'll make up your
berth whenever you want it."
"You're the porter, be ye? Well, I thought you was one o' the
Vanderbilts, with all yer gold buttons and fine clothes. Well, ye jest
make up mine now."
"I'll be back in a minute and fix you up all right, madam. You're
going to Philadelphia, aren't you?"
"Yes, I am. I'm goin' to Philadelphy, an' the sooner I get there the
better."
As the porter turned away to complete his collection of tickets, Jock
turned to his companions and said: "That woman has made a mistake. She
says she's going to Philadelphia, and she's got on the wrong train, as
sure's you live. I'm going to tell her."
Leaving his seat, Jock approached the troubled passenger and said,
"Did I understand you to say you were going to Philadelphia?"
"Hey? Yes, I'm goin' to Philadelphy, but I don't see how that concerns
you, Bub," and as she spoke she hurriedly felt in her pocket as if she
expected the stranger who had dared to address her was one of the
light-fingered gentry who she had been informed infested the city and
were wont to take advantage of innocent and unsuspecting strangers.
Jock's face flushed as he heard himself addressed as "Bub," and his
confusion was increased as he saw an expression of amusement creep
over the faces of his companions; but he was too polite to heed now,
and was determined to assist the old lady in what was her evident
confusion and mistake.
"All I wanted to say, madam," he continued, again speaking to the
troubled woman, "was that I fear you have made a mistake. If you
wanted to go to Philadelphia you ought to have gone on the
Pennsylvania road, not on the New York Central; this train doesn't go
to Philadelphia."
"Hey? What's that ye say?" exclaimed the startled woman. "Got the
wrong keers, have I? Here you, Mr. Porter," she shouted, standing with
difficulty and shaking a huge cotton umbrella at that officer. "Come
here, come here!" she called in increasing excitement.
As the porter hastened toward her, the eyes of all in the car were
turned upon her. Some of the passengers were evidently amused, and
some were sympathizing with her in her trouble.
"What is it, madam, what is it?" inquired the colored man, politely.
"This boy says this isn't the train for Philadelphy," she exclaimed
wrathfully. "What d'ye put me on this keer for, I'd like to know?" She
was grasping her pocket with one hand and waving her cotton umbrella
frantically in her excitement with the other. "Ye jest meant to rob
me!" she continued. "I know ye. Ye knew I had six dollars and
seventeen cents in my pocket. Ye shan't get it, that's what ye
shan't!"
"But, madam, this train does go to Philadelphia."
"Hey? it does, does it? What d'ye mean, then?" she demanded, turning
again upon Jock. "Then it was you that wanted to rob me! I'll turn
you over to the police, I vum I will!"
It was some time before it was explained that there was a little
junction not far from the St. Lawrence which rejoiced in the same name
as its larger sister in the adjacent state; but at last all was made
plain, and covered with confusion Jock took his seat once more, hardly
daring to look around upon his fellow-travellers, who evidently had
been hugely enjoying the scene.
But the troubles were not yet ended. As the porter volunteered to make
ready the old lady's berth at once, the boys vacated their seats for
their neighbor, who watched with evident consternation the
preparations for the night.
The berths were speedily prepared, and then the porter said, "I'll
take your tickets, madam, and you can retire when you please." As he
took the slip the porter glanced once more at her in amusement as he
said: "Yours is the upper berth, madam. Wait a moment and I'll get the
steps for you."
"What!" exclaimed the excited woman. "Up there in that garret? Me?
well, I guess not. Jerushy Jenkins don't climb up into any sech hole
as that! Not much; I'll ride on yer old cow-catcher afore I'll do
that."
"You may have the lower berth, madam," said Jock, quickly. "I'll be
glad to give it up to you."
"Ye will, will ye?" said Jerusha, suspiciously. "Well, I don't know
whether ye will or not. Do ye think it's safe, perfectly safe?" she
inquired of the porter.
"Yes, madam."
At last the trembling traveller was mollified, and soon afterward all
in the car were asleep. With the coming of the dawn our boys hastily
dressed and soon were gazing out of the windows at the silver-like
strips which here and there could be seen in the distance, and in a
moment knew that they were drawing near to the waters of the majestic
river, which already were reflecting the light of the coming day.
CHAPTER III.
THE SAIL DOWN THE RIVER.
The first impression of the boys was that they were passing through a
country hoary with age. The scattered homes of the farmers, which
occasionally could be seen, were evidently all of recent date, though
many of them were weather-beaten and had never known the touch of a
paint-brush. But the country itself in the gray of the dawn seemed to
be wrinkled and old. It was a level land and without any marked
features, save that of its venerable appearance; but all this was
instantly forgotten when suddenly the full sweep of the mighty St.
Lawrence burst into view.
Far as the eye could see the great mass of water stretched away, and
of what a beautiful color it was! Its strong, swift current could be
discerned even from the cars, and in the distance were the islands.
Beautiful cottages and well-kept lawns were before them, and from the
flag-poles fluttered the stars and stripes, winding in and out as the
morning breeze shook out the folds of the bunting. Far to the east
could be seen the shores of the larger islands, many of them covered
with trees, and already changing color in the light of the rapidly
approaching dawn. All together, the sight was one of imposing beauty
and grandeur; but all other things were speedily forgotten, for the
great river, as it went surging in its way, seemed to fascinate the
eyes of the eager boys.
Too much impressed by the sight to give voice to their sentiments, for
a few minutes the lads gazed at the changing scene before them; but
they were speedily recalled to their immediate surroundings by the
movements of the people in the car, who were all astir by this time.
"Here we are!" called Jock, gleefully, as the rumbling train came to a
standstill, and the passengers all prepared to leave the car.
In a moment the boys joined the procession, and as they stepped upon
the dock they saw that steamers, large and small, were there, and
innumerable smaller boats of all kinds and descriptions. What
impressed our boys more than the steamers and yachts, however, was
the sight of the beautiful St. Lawrence skiffs, numbers of which were
near the dock. Graceful and light as a birch-bark canoe, and with
cushioned seats and even equipped with chairs, it seemed to them that
never before had they beheld such beautiful little crafts. What speed
could be made in them, and once in the current of the great river, how
they would go!
The dock was filled, in spite of the early hour, with a multitude of
people, some of whom were selecting their baggage and giving orders
for its transfer to the waiting steamers. Others were calling to the
porters, and still others were themselves rushing back and forth
between the train and the boats, looking after their own belongings
and seeing that they were properly placed. It was a stirring sight,
and the fact that almost every man, to say nothing of the boys, was
equipped with the case which plainly enclosed a fishing rod, showed
that others besides themselves had hopes of sport on the great river.
Jock, who was the leader of the party, was looking eagerly about in
the crowd for some one who should correspond to the description his
father had given him of Ethan, the man who was to be their guide and
cook; but for a time he was unable to find any one whom he dared to
address as the one he was seeking.
Soon, however, a man clad in the country garb, with a flannel shirt
open at the neck, and a huge straw hat on his head, came near and
peered inquiringly at the boys. Satisfied with his inspection, he
approached and said in a deliberate manner,--
"Mebbe you're Jock Cope's boy?"
"Yes, yes," responded Jock, quickly. "He's my father, and you are
Ethan, if I'm not mistaken."
"That's what folks call me. These the boys goin' into camp with ye?"
he inquired with a drawl, turning to the other boys as he spoke.
"Yes, these are my friends," and Jock proceeded to introduce each to
Ethan.
"Glad to see ye," responded Ethan, apparently not very much impressed
by the sight of the band. "Got yer trunks checked?"
"Yes, they were checked through to Alexandria Bay. We don't have to do
anything here, do we?"
"Naw, unless ye want to go down to the Bay on the steamer. I've got my
boat here, an' if ye want to ye can sail down with me. Ye'll have
speak up, sonny, though, for if ye want to take the steamer ye'll have
to say so mighty quick."
"We haven't had breakfast," said Jock, "and if the other fellows feel
as I do, we'll want something to eat."
"Ye can get breakfast aboard the boat if ye want to an' can afford to
pay for it, or ye can go up to one o' the hotels an' get it, an' I'll
wait here for ye. 'Tisn't for me to say."
"Oh, let's wait and get our breakfast at one of the hotels, and sail
down the river in Ethan's boat," said Bert, eagerly; and as it was
apparent that all the boys shared in his desire, it was quickly
decided to leave their rods and the personal effects they had brought
with them in his care.
Ethan received the rods with a grunt, which was not expressive of high
admiration for their outfit, and the boys at once started up the
street to secure their breakfast. They were too much excited to give
much attention to the straggling little village of Clayton, for their
appetites were imperative and must be satisfied, and soon they
entered one of the hotels and secured places in the dining room.
"I tell you what," exclaimed Bert, "this is great! I never saw such a
sight as this river. We'll have a great time here. Even Bob is
excited."
"Hungry, you mean," replied that individual. "You fellows have been
all stirred up by the scenery, but I'm thinking of the inner man."
"I'm not," said Ben. "Do you know, Jock, I'm afraid of that Ethan of
yours."
"Afraid of him? What do you mean?"
"Why, he acts as if he was a king or some other potentate. You don't
really suppose he actually owns one of these islands, do you?"
"I don't know," replied Jock. "I'll ask him, if you want me to."
"Well, the way that same Ethan looks at us, and sniffs at our rods,
and treats us as if we were boys, just scares me; it does, for a fact.
I don't know the difference between a reel and a rod, and somehow I
know I shan't even dare to put a worm on my hook if he's looking at
me."
"Put a worm on your hook!" exclaimed Jock, laughingly. "You are
green. You don't use worms here."
"Don't use worms? What do you have for bait, then, I'd like to know?"
"Minnows, little fish."
"I should think it would hurt 'em if you put 'em on the hook," drawled
Bob; "I'm too tender-hearted for that."
"You won't have to hurt your tender feelings, Bob," laughed Jock.
"Ethan does all that for you. That's the advantage of having a
boatman, you see."
"Ah, yes, I see," replied Bob, with a sigh of relief.
But the breakfast was now brought in, and in a moment all other things
were forgotten as the boys fell to with a will, and ate as only hungry
boys in the early morning air of the St. Lawrence can eat.
When this task was at last completed, they started eagerly toward the
dock, and as they approached they discovered Ethan watching for them.
He had already hoisted his sail and all things were ready for the
departure.
As the boys leaped on board, they noticed the beautiful little craft
of which Ethan was the proud owner; but as he was evidently eager to
set sail at once, no remarks were made until after the boat was free
from the dock. Then the strong breeze and the swift current combined
to send them swiftly on their way down the river, and in the
exhilaration of the scene the boys for a moment gave free play to
their feelings.
"You don't often have a day like this, do you, Ethan?" said Jock.
"Hey? oh, we have 'em 'most as often as they come."
"I know that, but they don't often come, do they?"
Ethan looked at his questioner for a moment before he said, "You don't
know much, I see. Lived in the city all yer life, haven't ye?"
"Yes," replied Jock, feeling for the moment as if he were guilty of
something, though of what he could not just determine; but the
boatman's contempt was so evident that the lad resolved to ask no more
questions.
"Then you're Jock Cope's boy, be ye?" said Ethan, after a pause.
"Yes. I've often heard him speak of you, and tell how you two used to
sit together in the same seat over in the little red schoolhouse.
Father says it's still standing, and he wants me to go over and see it
some day while we're here."
"Wants ye to see it? What fur?"
"Oh, just to see it, that's all. He wants me to see the place where he
went to school when he was a boy."
"Humph! it isn't much to see. Jest a little shanty, that's all. Say,
they tell me your pa is worth a lot o' money. Is that so?"
"I don't know," said Jock. "He's got some, I suppose. Enough to pay
for our expenses here this summer, I think."
"But heow much has he got?" persisted Ethan.
"I don't know just how much. He never told me."
"Got five thousand dollars?"
"Perhaps so."
"I don't b'lieve it," grunted Ethan, contemptuously. "I know Jock
Cope, an' I know he ain't worth no sech money's that. He's done a pile
o' harm to this country, though, I'll say that for him," he added
glumly.
"Done harm? My father done harm? I don't believe it!" exclaimed Jock,
warmly.
"Well, he has, whether ye believe it or not."
"What's he done?"
"Oh, he wasn't satisfied to stay here an' do what his father did afore
him. No, he had to go off down to New York, an' they say he's worth
five thousand dollars now. I don't believe it, but all the boys reound
here do, an' so they're goin' off to teown to make their fortunes too.
Now my boy Tom, he's goin' to help reound your camp, ye know, he's got
the fever too. Somebody's told him if he'll come down there they'll
get him a job on the street cars an' pay him a dollar an' a half every
day." And Ethan's eyes became large as his voice dropped lower in his
efforts to be more impressive. "He's nothin' but a young fool, that's
what he is, and he's all took up with the notion. I want you boys to
tell him 'tisn't so, that is, if you know anything abeout it, which I
don't much believe for my part. It doesn't stand to reason that
there'd be anybody so tarnel foolish as jest to give him a dollar and
a half every day for standin' up on a street car. No, sir. I don't
believe no such thing."
The boys looked at one another, and not even the sight of the
beautiful river could keep back the look of amusement which crept over
their faces.
"Ethan, have you ever been in New York?" inquired Bob.
"Who, me? Well, I rather guess not. They don't get me to go to no sech
place as that. Pickpockets an' thieves an' gamblers. No, sir. I've
never been outside o' Jefferson an' St. Lawrence counties in all my
born days. This 'ere river is good enough for me, an' I'm goin' to
stay where I'm well off. Since these city people have got to comin' up
here summers, I'm makin' money."
From Ethan's manner it was evident that he wished the boys to question
him, and Bob was the first to improve the opportunity.
"Ethan, are you a rich man?" he inquired solemnly.
"Rich? well, I don' know as ye'd call it that exactly. I'm doin'
pretty well, though. D'ye know heow much money I took in last summer
rowin'?" he added, as if he were about to disclose some great secret.
"No; I can't imagine. How much was it?" said Bob.
"One hundred an' ten dollars an' sixty-nine cents!"
"You don't mean it! It can't be possible!"
"Well, it is trew, whether it's possible or not. I saved thirty-one
dollars an' sixteen cents an' have got it in the bank up to Wat'town
now."
"What did you do with the rest of it?"
"Oh, I had to live, didn't I? Well, I used that in livin'. My
neighbors thought I was livin' pretty high, but I didn't put on no
airs. I ain't proud."
"Whose island is that?" inquired Ben, pointing to a small island on
which there was a beautiful cottage. He felt that diversion was
necessary to break the spell Ethan's astounding statements had
produced, and accordingly asked the first question that occurred to
him.
"That? oh, that b'longs to another fool deown New York way. They tell
me he's just bought it an' give a thousand dollars for it. 'Tain't
worth it. 'Tisn't worth fifty cents. Ye jest can't raise nuthin' on
it. Why, I could 'a' had that island for a gift if I'd been willin' to
pay the tax on it twenty-five year ago, an' that wasn't more'n fifty
cents. There's yer camp ahead o' ye, boys."
Instantly the statements of the incredulous Ethan were forgotten, and
all peered eagerly at the place he had indicated. Even the
exhilaration of the sail which had occupied two hours and a half was
also forgotten now.
As they had swept on in their course the boys had been more and more
elated. On past beautiful islands, and summer camps, and parks which
seemed like large villages, they had come. Sometimes they had passed
close to the shore in places where the channel was almost like a
mill-race in its swiftness, and then again they were out in the river
where only an eddy here and there indicated the tremendous power of
the great water, on whose surface they were sailing. Wooded islands
had been seen, and then islands which appeared to be only great rocks
and boulders loomed up before them. Camping parties like their own had
been passed, and salutes had been fired to acknowledge their approach.
Men and women, boys and girls, had all seemed to catch something of
the life of the great river, and on every side there appeared to be
the joy which came from the freedom from care and the life-giving
breezes of the majestic St. Lawrence.
Only Jock, of the party, had ever been there before, and in the
novelty and delight of the experience, his companions had, perhaps,
failed to be duly impressed by the sceptical sentiments of their
boatman. At all events, when Ethan declared that the camp was in
sight, even his own presence became vague and unreal as the boys
peered eagerly before them at the place where they were to stay for
the coming six weeks, and where doubtless many and thrilling
experiences were to be theirs.
CHAPTER IV.
IN CAMP.
As the swift little boat swept forward the tents were soon visible,
standing as they did near the shore and yet close to the woods which
stretched away in the distance. There were two of these tents, and the
white canvas outlined against the green foliage presented a
wonderfully attractive appearance, at least to the eager boys, who
were all unmindful now of their boatman's financial problems and
intent only upon the vision of their abode for the coming few weeks.
Ethan explained to his companions that one of the tents was designed
to be their sleeping quarters and the other was to provide a kitchen
which could be used on stormy days. On other days the cooking was to
be done in the open air, and the fireplace and the pile of logs which
was to furnish fuel soon could be seen clearly as the party came
nearer to the island.
There was a rude little dock near the camping place, and to this Ethan
guided his boat and soon landed his passengers. As the boys leaped
out, Bert called to his companions: "This is great, fellows! Let's
give the school cheer!"
Instantly their united voices rang out, and Ethan looked up in
astonishment. "What d'ye do that for?" he inquired blankly.
"That's our school yell, Ethan," replied Jock. "Give it again, boys!"
As the sharp, clear cry rang out again they saw a young fellow of
about their own age approaching from the tents, and his evident
surprise was as marked as that of the boatman. Only a brief glance,
however, was required to convince the boys that it was Ethan's son
before them. There was the same general outline of features as in the
older man, and the same peculiar hitch as he walked.
"That's yer school yell, is it?" said Ethan. "Do they make ye do it
often?"
"Oh, whenever we feel like it," laughed Jock.
"Well, your pa an' I used to have a school yell when we went to the
little red schoolhouse, an' I want to tell ye that not one of ye can
come up to him either. Many's the time I've seen him toe a crack, an'
when the teacher brought his hickory ferule down ker-whack, yer pa
could make a louder noise than any o' you boys. He was a powerful one
to yell, Jock Cope was!"
Even Ethan's recollections were not of sufficient interest now to
prevent the boys from running up the bank to their tents, and soon
they were eagerly examining all the details of their camp. There were
four cots in one of the tents and in the other were places where their
trunks and guns and rods and their various belongings might be stored.
Ethan's son, who had been introduced as Tom, remained with his father
and assisted in bringing from the boat the articles which were to be
stored in the tents, and soon had everything arranged and in order.
The camp was on the wooded shore of one of the larger islands. Before
them was a view of the broad river, dotted here and there with
islands, on some of which were cottages and on others camping parties
not unlike their own. It was noon time now, and the sun was almost
directly above their heads. The air was almost motionless, but the
restless river was hastening on as if wind or wave, or heat or cold,
were all alike to it. The sublimity of the scene, the novelty of the
camp, the rushing waters, and tall silent trees all combined to
produce a feeling of intense delight in the hearts of the boys, and
they stood together on the shore looking out over the beautiful sight
and filled with expectations such as only light-hearted lads at such a
time can know.
"I say, boys, mebbe ye'd like something to eat."
In a moment the beautiful vision had lost its power, and turning
eagerly to the camp, Jock said: "You are right, Ethan. How did you
know we were hungry?"
"Didn't have to know. Folks have to eat, don' they? It's dinner time,
that's what it is. Most o' folks like to look at the river when they
first come, but they find scenery isn't specially fillin' as a diet.
They mostly wants somethin' to eat afore long."
"We're like the others, then," said Ben. "Did you say you had dinner
now in the middle of the day?"
"Yes, that's what I said. When did ye expect to have it?"
"Oh, I didn't know. We usually have it at night when we're at home."
"At night? Dinner at night?" exclaimed Ethan. "Ye must be funny folks.
Noon's the hour for dinner. Everybody knows that."
"Go ahead, Ethan. Have it now. We may want it every hour in the day,
if the feeling I have is anything that lasts very long."
Thus bidden, Ethan and Tom at once prepared dinner. While the younger
man made a fire, Ethan prepared the potatoes, whittling the skins as
if he had been carving an oar. He also split three black bass which
Tom had caught in the morning, and made them ready for broiling. In
addition to these he had fresh vegetables, a coffee pot, a can of
milk, and various other necessities, and to the surprise of the boys
it at once became evident that both Ethan and his son were adepts in
the art of preparing a dinner in a St. Lawrence camp.
Soon a savory odor rose from the fireplace, and the curiosity of the
boys gave place to a feeling of eagerness for the time to come when
they would be summoned to the repast. The few dishes were at last
brought forth, the dinner was declared to be ready, and the boys fell
to with a will.
What appetites they had! How good everything tasted! For a time even
conversation was neglected, but at last, when the cravings of the
inner man began to be appeased, then the joy and inspiration of the
hour once more returned.
"I s'pose ye've got a pretty fair house down to New York?" queried
Ethan of Jock.
"Oh, yes. It's one you might call comfortable, I suppose," said Jock,
with a laugh.
"Got good beds in it?"
"Yes."
"Your ma keeps a girl, I s'pose?"
"Keeps a girl? I don't know that I understand what you mean," said
Jock.
"I mean what I say. She's got a hired girl, hasn't she?"
"Do you mean the maids? The servants?"
"No, I don' mean no _servants_. I mean hired girls."
"Well, yes, I suppose she has."
"They have four servants--hired girls, I mean," drawled Bob.
"Four, four? What's yer ma do herself?"
"Oh, she's busy all the time, too busy, my father thinks," laughed
Jock.
"Four hired girls! I swan, if that don' beat all creation! What did ye
want to come down here for then, I'd like to know? Eatin' outdoors and
sleepin' on a cot when ye don' have to; that beats me! Ye city folks
must be a queer lot."
"That's just what we're here for, Ethan. We came on purpose to get a
taste of outdoor life."
"Well, ye're likely to have a good deal more'n a taste, I'm thinkin'.
Now, then," he said to Tom when the dinner had been eaten, "I'll leave
ye here to look after the boys while I go over to the Bay an' get the
trunks an' things that were checked through. I'll be back by the
middle o' the afternoon. Ye can get along without me, can't ye?"
"Yes, yes," said Jock. "We want to get out our rods and fix things up
a little. We can try the fishing to-morrow, can't we, Ethan?"
"Yes, ye can _try_ it," replied Ethan, dryly.
"You don't think we'll do much? Is that it, or isn't the fishing good
this summer?"
"Oh, the fishin' is all right. Lots o' fish here. No trouble about
that."
But Ethan at once went down to the dock and set sail for Alexandria
Bay, and the boys began to look to their rods and guns. Tom, who was
supposed to be clearing away the dishes, frequently paused in his
occupation to examine the belongings of the campers; but, although he
was feeling more at ease now with them, not one word of surprise or
commendation did he bestow. Indeed, his companions began to fear that
their tackle must all be wrong or out of date, for the only response
Tom would make to any of their anxious inquiries, was that 'he
supposed 'twas all good enough; he could tell better to-morrow.'
When everything had been done which could be done before the trunks
came, the four boys together left the camp and walked up the shore.
The novelty was still strong, and they were eager to examine their
immediate surroundings. And there was much to interest them. Swift
steam yachts frequently passed up the river, and the groups of happy
people on the decks could be plainly seen from the shore.
Occasionally a puff of smoke could be seen, and the boom of a small
cannon on some of the neighboring islands could be heard, and then the
shrill scream of the whistle of a passing yacht or steamer would
respond in acknowledgment of the salute. Skiffs were also seen, and
the rod held in the hands of the person seated in the stern would
indicate the occupation upon which he was bent.
Above them was the clear blue sky, behind them the whispering trees of
the forest, and before them the great, onward-rushing river, its blue
waters knowing no rest, and yet in spite of their evident haste
imparting a feeling of restfulness to all the beholders, so vast was
the power, so slight the effort required to maintain the steady,
constant course.
To Jock the great river almost seemed to be alive. At times it was
restless and almost angry, and then again it seemed to be hastening
past him as if it were unmindful of its surroundings, or scornful of
the puny people who sailed over its surface or stood wondering upon
its banks. But the feeling of exhilaration, the delight in the
presence of one of nature's most wonderful works, was apparent in all
the boys.
As they turned at last to retrace their way to the camp, Bob, who had
been silent most of the time, said: "This is a great place, Jock.
'Twas good of you to have us all here."
"Yes, it was pure philanthropy," said Jock. "You see, I had been down
here before and wanted all the more to come again; but my father
didn't want me to come alone; so I just had to make up a party, or
stay at home. I'm generous, am I not?"
"Yes; what was that?" Bob suddenly said, stopping short and peering
excitedly out into the river at a place where a whirl or eddy in the
stream appeared.
"That? oh, that was probably some fish."
"Jock Cope, do you mean to tell me they have fish like that in this
river?"
"Why, yes; what did you think was here?"
"Oh, I didn't know. But I'm wondering what I would do if a fish as
large as that one was should get hold of one end of a line and I
should be at the other."
"You'd wake up and go to work, for once in your life."
"I think I should, for a fact. I almost wish we could try it
to-night."
"We'll try it, all right, in the morning. Ethan will have to get our
minnows for us. Hark! what's that?"
The boys were now near the camp, and suddenly stopped as the sound of
some one calling was heard. And yet the voice was more like that of
one in distress, and fearful that something was wrong they began to
run.
As they came to a place from which they could see into the interior of
their camping place, they stopped and gazed curiously at the sight
before them. Tom, evidently thinking that he was unobserved, had taken
a position in front of one of the tents and was looking up into the
sky. His arms were occasionally flung out, moving with the grace with
which a pump handle performs its duties. He was standing with his feet
far apart, and his entire bearing betokened the evident excitement
under which he was laboring.
The startled boys were about to rush forward to his assistance, when
they were still further astonished by the words which Tom thundered
forth.
"Tew be--or not tew be," shouted the young fisherman.
The listening lads gazed blankly at one another, but before they could
speak Tom's voice was heard again.
"_Tew_ be--," then came a long pause before he shouted, "or not _tew_
be." His arms were again flung out wildly and his face was still
turned toward the sky. Apparently the question received no answer, and
varying the emphasis and inflection, the sadly troubled Tom again
broke forth,--
"Tew _be-e-e_, or not tew _be-e-e-e_."
Again our boys gazed blankly, first at the excited young fellow before
them, and then into one another's faces.
"He's sick! He's crazy!" said Ben, excitedly.
"He's going to commit suicide!" responded Jock, with equal excitement.
Moved as by a common impulse all four of the boys instantly darted
into the camp; but the startled Tom, bestowing upon them one glance of
terror and confusion, turned and ran swiftly into the woods.
CHAPTER V.
BEN TRIES THE CANOE.
Before any of the boys could start in pursuit of the fleeing Tom, one
of them suddenly called out, "Isn't that Ethan coming?"
They all turned at the words and perceived the fisherman already near
the dock, and with one accord they ran swiftly to meet him. His boat
was apparently filled with their trunks and belongings, and the two
canoes which Jock had ordered to be sent were also on board.
As Ethan ran his craft alongside the dock, Jock, too excited to note
carefully whether all his possessions had been obtained or not, called
out, "Oh, Ethan, something's the matter with Tom!"
"Hey? somethin' the matter with him? How long since?"
To the surprise of the boys Ethan did not seem to share in their
alarm. He was giving all his thought to the landing he was making,
and as soon as his boat was made fast he climbed up on the dock and
stood calmly regarding the excited lads before him.
"What's he been doin' now?" he said.
"Oh, I don't know," exclaimed Jock. "We had all gone up the shore and
when we came back to camp we heard Tom calling. We could see him, too,
and he was waving his arms and calling out as if he was in pain, and
when we ran in, he just looked at us a minute and then started off
into the woods as fast as he could go. He must be sick, Ethan. Come
on, we'll help you look for him."
"Was he a-sayin' anything?" inquired the fisherman, still for some
unaccountable reason not much aroused by the startling announcement.
"Saying anything?" exclaimed Bert. "I should say he was. He was
calling and groaning. Why, we could hear him way up the shore. He must
be in trouble. Come, Ethan; come on! We'll all help you."
"Was he a-sayin' anything? I mean any words like?"
"Yes, I believe he was," said Bob. "We could make out a few words."
"What was they?"
"Oh, he said something about 'to be' or something like that. We didn't
stop to listen much. The poor fellow was in such distress. What are
you waiting for, Ethan? Why don't you come on?"
"That's jest what I thought. Tom was sayin' his Hamlick."
"Saying what?"
"His Hamlick. Don' ye know what that is? Hamlick's a dialogue or a
play. I don' know who writ it, but Tom does. The young folks over to
the Corners is goin' to give a exhibition, and Hamlick's the one they
decided on. Tom is to be Hamlick, and he was jest a-practisin' his
piece."
For a moment the boys gazed blankly at one another, and then all but
Bob rushed from the dock as if they too had been stricken by the same
evil disease which they feared had seized upon Tom.
Bob, however, remained with Ethan, and with his face as expressionless
as he could make it at times, inquired soberly,--
"When is this play going to be given, Ethan?"
"Oh, I don' know. Some time this summer, I suppose. They 'most always
give somethin' while the summer boarders is here, and this year the
walks needed fixin' up in the Corners some, so they--I mean the young
folks, o' course--decided to give Hamlick; and Tom he's to be the
Hamlick in chief. Ever hear that dialogue down to your place?"
"Yes, I believe I have. I've heard of it, anyway."
"I thought likely. Pretty good thing, isn't it?"
"I believe it is thought to be a very good one. We shall want to know
when it is to be given so that we can all come over and see it."
"I'll let ye know when it comes off."
Ethan suddenly placed a finger in his mouth and emitted a shrill
whistle. "I guess that'll call up Tom," he explained.
A repetition of the signal brought the reluctant Tom from the woods,
and as he approached the dock he gazed in a shame-faced way at Bob, as
if he expected him to say something about what had happened; but Bob's
face was still expressionless, to the evident comfort of the young
fisherman.
"Step lively here, Tom," called his father. "We must get these trunks
and things up to the camp afore night. You 'most scared these boys to
death with your Hamlick," he added.
"Your father has been telling us about the play you are to give at the
Corners, Tom," said Bob, quietly. "We shall want to come over and see
it. You mustn't fail to let us know when it is to be given."
Somewhat reassured by the kind manner of Bob, Tom was more at his ease
and at once began to assist his father in transferring the cargo of
the little boat to the camp.
The other boys now returned, but a warning look from Bob caused them
all to be silent about the recent occurrence. In a brief time the
trunks had been placed in the tent where they belonged, the canoes
were left on the shore, and then Ethan and Tom began to prepare
supper.
The appetites of the boys apparently were as keen as they had been at
noon time, and the rapidity with which the table was cleared was a
delight to Ethan's heart. Neither Hamlick nor the Ghost could
interfere now, for the demands of their hunger were supreme.
Soon after supper Ethan and Tom departed for the night, promising to
return at daybreak in time to prepare breakfast and be ready for the
fishing which was to be done on the following day. The boys stood on
the shore and watched the boat as it sped away over the river, and
then when it had disappeared from sight they all turned and demanded
of Bob the explanation of Hamlick.
But Bob was in no mood to banter, and so he soberly related what Ethan
had told him about the efforts of the "young folks" at the Corners to
do something which should aid in improving the little hamlet in which
they dwelt. Somehow it all appeared in a different light now, and the
merriment was soon gone.
"I'm going to have a paddle in one of the canoes before I go to bed,"
exclaimed Jock, as he leaped up from the bank on which they were all
seated.
As the other boys had had no experience in that sport, they all stood
on the dock, eagerly watching their comrade as he took his seat in the
light little canoe and wielding his paddle swept swiftly over the
water.
"Did you ever see anything like that!" exclaimed Ben, delightedly.
"'It's like a feather on the water or a leaf upon the stream,' or
something like that we had in our English last spring at school. Isn't
it fine!"
"Yes, and how easily Jock does it too," added Bob, with a wink at Bert
as he spoke. "Travelling like that is just fun."
"I wonder if I can't do it," said Ben, looking longingly at the other
canoe, which was still on the bank.
"You can try it, can't you?" drawled Bob. "Nothing like trying, you
know. It's a knack, that's all, and you have to be careful. Shall I
help you bring the other canoe down to the dock?"
Ben glanced once more at Jock, who could be seen far out on the river,
and the sight served to increase his eagerness. "Yes; come on,
fellows. If you'll help me, I'll try it, anyhow."
In a moment the canoe was lifted and carried down to the dock. Then
Bob held one end of it securely and Bert the other, while Ben
cautiously took his seat in the middle. A shout from Jock caused them
all to look up, and they could see that he was paddling toward them
with all the speed he could summon.
"Perhaps he's calling for you to come out and meet him," said Bob,
soberly.
"I'll do it," said Ben, eagerly, "and then race him for the dock. Push
her out, boys!" he added gleefully, as he grasped his paddle.
The canoe shot out from the dock, and the boys stood eagerly watching
Ben as he drove his paddle deep into the water.
"Look out there, Ben!" shouted Bob. "Remember, you'll have to keep
your balance."
"Be careful, Ben! Look to your paddling!" called Bert.
"Don't tip her so much to one side!"
"Ease up, there! Don't lean so far over!"
"Sit up! Lean back! Lie down! Tip over!" called Bob, soothingly.
"Go up the river! Go down the stream! Come ashore! Turn around! Go
ahead!" shouted Bert, encouragingly.
But poor Ben was too much occupied with his own efforts to heed the
confusing calls of his companions. Twice the little canoe had almost
capsized, but somehow Ben had managed to keep it afloat, though he
had abandoned all efforts to paddle and was only striving to keep his
craft above the water.
"I say, you fellows!" he called in despair. "I can't manage this--Hi!"
he added, as the canoe gave a lurch and almost went over. "Throw me' a
rope! Come out and help me!"
"I can't, my dear, though much I wish,
For, oh, you've tied my hands,"
sang Bob, mockingly.
"Oh, come ashore, Ben, if you can't go ahead," called Bert,
soothingly. "You won't tip over. I'll risk it! I'll risk it!"
"You risk noth--" began Ben, desperately; but his exclamation was not
completed, for as the canoe gave a sudden lurch to one side the
unfortunate lad leaned to the other to assist it in righting itself.
He leaned too far, however, and then strove to reverse the weight. His
actions were frantic now, and it seemed as if there could be but one
result, and that must come soon.
"It's going!" shouted Ben, in despair.
"So I see," called Bob, encouragingly. "Keep it up, Ben! what you need
is practice. Practice makes perfect, you know. Keep it up! Keep it
up!"
"I'm going! I'm going! I'm go--" shouted Ben.
It was evident that he had spoken truly. For a time or two he
succeeded in righting his craft, but each effort seemed to make his
condition worse. Suddenly the canoe went over; the paddle in Ben's
hands flew out over the water, and then the lad's long legs and feet
appeared to be lifted into the air, and waved frantically for a moment
before, with a circular movement, they followed their owner and
quickly disappeared in the river.
"Going, going, gone!" called Bob, solemnly, as he gazed out over the
water at the place where his friend had disappeared.
Ben was an expert swimmer, much the best of the four, so that they had
no fears for his safety; and the ludicrous sight of those long legs,
with what Bob called "their despairing appeal to come over and help
us," disappearing in the St. Lawrence, was more than either could
endure. They burst into shrieks of laughter. They hugged each other in
their delight, and even Bob laughed until the tears rolled down his
cheeks.
[Illustration: "Suddenly the Canoe went over."--_Page 62._]
But Ben speedily appeared, and as he started out for the dock, Bert
called to him, "Your canoe's going down the river, Ben; so's your
paddle."
"The proper way, my friend, to paddle a canoe is from the upper, not
the under, side," said Bob, soothingly. "Take my advice, Ben."
Ben was for taking the canoe, however, which already was drifting away
from him; but as he started to swim toward it, Jock swept past him,
and, calling to him to go ashore, said that he would get both canoe
and paddle.
When Ben climbed in his dripping clothes up on the dock, the laughter
of the boys was renewed.
"You'd have done all right, Ben, if you'd left those feet and legs of
yours ashore. They were in the way. There are some things even the St.
Lawrence won't stand."
"You wait," said Ben, doggedly. "I'll show you yet."
And "show" them he did. As soon as the canoe was restored he insisted
upon repeating his experience. It was true that he was capsized again,
but he sturdily stuck to his task, and in an hour had, in a measure,
mastered the problem, and was able to paddle swiftly up and down the
river.
It was dark now, and the boys were soon ready for bed. A pile of logs
had been placed before their tent, and as soon as the other boys were
in their cots, Jock started the fire. The light of the flames could be
seen far out over the river, and it was long before sleep came to the
campers. The sighing of the wind in the tree-tops, the rush of the
mighty waters, the constant lapping of the little waves upon the
shore, the twinkling stars, which could be seen beyond the waving
branches, were all novel and strange. Then, too, when some of the boys
would be ready for sleep, others would not feel so inclined. They
would leave their tent and fire their guns at imaginary enemies or
wild beasts. The school cheer, and even the school songs, had to be
given again and again, but at last even these experiences became
monotonous, and the tired boys slept.
It was not long after dawn on the following morning when Jock and Ben
sat up in their beds and looked about them. Both of their companions
were gone, but the sounds that came from the river left no doubt as to
their whereabouts. Hastily dressing, both boys ran down to the shore
and there beheld their friends, clad in their bathing-suits, and
practising the art of paddling a canoe without departing from the
craft when it was in motion.
Apparently both boys had already succeeded, but even their efforts
were ignored when Ethan and Tom were discovered approaching in their
sailboat, and all knew that not only would the breakfast for which
they were eager soon be ready now, but that their first efforts in
fishing in the St. Lawrence would soon be put to the test.
CHAPTER VI.
THE FIRST DAY'S SPORT.
Ethan and his son soon had breakfast ready for the campers, and as
they had brought with them from home some dainty viands such as only
the housewives of the region knew how to prepare, these, with the food
the fishermen cooked, made a repast over which even a king might have
rejoiced, especially if he could have boasted of such an appetite as
the lads on Pine Tree Island had.
None of them was thinking, however, of kings or of kingly appetites
that morning; and when at last the boys ceased, chiefly because even
the well-spread table had been cleared, Jock turned to Ethan and said,
"Where are you going to take us to-day?"
"Fishin'."
"Yes, I know; but where are we going to fish?"
"Oh, I haven't jest made up my mind yet. Mebbe in one place, and then
again mebbe in another. Will try our luck till we strike what we
want."
Perceiving that Ethan was averse to committing himself on such
delicate matters, Jock called to his companions and they at once began
to collect their rods and the various necessities of the day, and by
the time they had all things ready, Ethan and Tom had stored away the
cooking utensils, and soon after came to the dock.
"Is it safe to leave everything here in the camp without any one to
watch it?" said Bob.
"Hey?" replied Ethan. "Safe? 'Tisn't goin' to rain to-day."
"Oh, I wasn't afraid of the weather. I didn't know but some one might
come along and, finding no one in the camp, help himself; that's all."
"Folks is honest here," said Ethan, gruffly. "I s'pose you have to
keep your doors locked down to New York, don't ye?"
"Why, yes, we usually do," said Bert.
"Well, I'm glad I don't live there, that's all I can say then. I
haven't got a lock on my house over at the Corners, and I haven't had
since I built, nigh on twenty-two years ago."
"What!" exclaimed Ben. "You don't mean to say you don't lock up
nights, do you?"
"That's just what I mean to say. I never had nothin' stole since I've
lived here. Folks is honest here, I tell ye. If anything is taken,
it'll be because some o' the city folks what come down here summers
has taken it. The city must be a dreadful place to live in. They say
even flowers won't grow there; an' if the posies don't like it, I
don't know what it must be when it comes to huming bein's and boys.
Heow ye goin' to divide up yer party?"
It was speedily arranged that Jock and Bob should go with Ethan, and
the other boys with Tom. The skiffs were at once prepared, and when
the fishing tackle had been placed on board, the boys took their seats
as the men directed.
What a delightful experience it was, they all thought. The skiffs were
models of beauty and grace, and the seats the boys occupied were cane
chairs from which the legs had been cut, and were also provided with
cushions. Bob was seated in the stern and Jock in the bow, with Ethan
between them, and in the other boat a similar arrangement had been
made.
As soon as he perceived that they were ready, Ethan grasped the oars,
and with steady strokes began to row out into the river. The water
over which they passed was clear and beautiful. Scarcely a breeze
ruffled the surface, and as the light skiff darted ahead, it almost
seemed as if it required no effort to send it forward.
"I don't know but ye might as well bait up," said Ethan, when they had
gone a few hundred yards from the camp. "I don't s'pose ye'll catch
anything here, but there's no harm in tryin'. It's about time for the
muscalonge to begin to run, an' who knows but ye might strike one?"
Ethan rested on his oars, and taking first one of the lines and then
the other, attached a live minnow to each of the hooks, and threw them
overboard.
"Neow, let out about a hundred an' twenty-five or fifty feet," he
said, "an' we'll troll till we get where we're goin' first."
Far behind on one side of the skiff stretched Jock's line, and on the
other was Bob's, and as they paid out the slender cord they could see
that their friends in the other boat, which was distant about two
hundred yards, had followed their example.
"This is what I call great sport," said Jock, contentedly.
"It is pretty good," replied Bob. "At least it isn't what you call
actual labor, except for Ethan. I think it's rather my way of fishing.
I've heard them tell about catching trout with an eight-ounce rod, and
how a fellow has to crawl through the bushes and tumble over the logs,
and then he makes his cast. He mustn't move, they say, not even if a
million million mosquitoes and black flies light on his hand; and then
if he succeeds, at last he yanks up a little speckled trout that
weighs about four ounces, and he thinks he's had a great catch. No, I
think this is the situation which is better adapted to my precious and
delicate frame," and as he spoke Bob stretched himself out lazily in
his chair and permitted his rod to rest on the boat, while he gazed
about him with an air of deep satisfaction and content.
And truly there was much to produce that feeling. The early sunlight
now flashed across the water and covered all things with its halo. In
the distance were the dark green forests, and here and there among
the islands, or on the main shore, the rising curls of smoke indicated
the location of the cottages or summer camps. The very air was a
tonic; or, as Jock declared, 'it seemed to him it was so laden with
life that he could almost bite it off.'
And all the time the two boats were moving slowly and steadily over
the water, Ethan pulling lightly at the oars and from time to time
glancing keenly at the lines, which seemed to fade away in the river.
The calls of the far-away crows or the sight of a great hawk circling
high in the heavens above them only increased the wildness of the
scene, and for a time the roar of the great city and the sight of its
crowded streets seemed only like the memory of a dream. Even the
occupation in which the boys were supposed to be engaged seemed
unreal, and Bob closed his eyes dreamily and permitted the rays of the
sun to strike him full in the face.
"I say, Ethan," said Bob, opening his eyes lazily, "don't you think it
hurts the fish you put on those hooks?"
"Hurt 'em? Naw! Fish hasn't any feelin's."
"How do you know that, Ethan?"
"They never make no complaint, do they?"
"Yes, they kick."
"No, they don't kick. They can't kick without legs, can they? They
jest wiggle."
"It's all the same. It seems pretty hard to put 'em on those hooks."
"Hard? Not a bit. It's give an' take with a fish. The big fish eat the
little ones, and the little ones eat the smaller fellows. Now it's
only gettin' what they tried to give, that's all; and they can't
complain."
Bob made no reply, and settled back into his former lazy attitude.
Ethan still rowed slowly on, casting occasional glances at the lines,
which the boys had apparently forgotten. But the fisherman knew what
was unknown by the others in the boat, and that was that they were
approaching a shoal, and it was not unlikely that something might
happen here of interest to all on board.
Suddenly Bob sat erect in his seat and made a frantic grasp at his
rod, which had almost been torn from his hands.
"Hold on, Ethan," he said quickly. "My hook's caught on the bottom."
The fisherman smiled, but made no reply as he backed water and swung
the little boat around in the current.
"Caught on the bottom, did ye?" he inquired sharply. "Well, that
doesn't look much like bottom!"
As he spoke, about a hundred feet in the rear of the boat a good-sized
fish leaped from the surface in the sight of them all, and almost
seemed to shake himself as a dog does when he has been in the water.
"Bass," said Ethan, laconically. "Now look out heow ye play him. Don't
give him any slack. Be careful. Keep yer hand on the reel."
It is doubtful whether Bob heard any of the boatman's directions, for
he was all excitement now. He stood up in the boat and gave all his
attention to the fish, which was struggling to free himself. Again and
again the tip of the rod was drawn under the water, and the "zip" of
the line as it sped from the reel was distinctly heard.
The bass was well hooked, and for a time the struggle became most
exciting. Again and again Bob brought the fish near to the boat, and
then, with a dart and a rush, away the victim would go, making the
reel sing as the line was drawn out.
"Be careful," muttered Ethan. "You'll tucker him out pretty quick, an'
then we'll have him. Give him the line, but don't let him have any
slack. That's right. Let him go," he added, as once more the fish
darted toward the deeper water.
Bob steadily held to his task, and when he felt that the run of the
bass was ended, began once more to reel him in toward the boat. The
fish was evidently tired now, and his resistance was much less strong.
Nearer and nearer the eager boy brought him, and soon, peering over
the side of the boat, could see in the clear water the movements of
the struggling fish. Ethan had grasped his landing-net, and was ready
for the last effort.
"Bring him up near the boat now," he said, "and we've got him. Look
sharp, and don't give him any slack!" he added, as the fish, perhaps
having caught sight of the boat, began once more to struggle
desperately. Darting first in one direction and then in another he
made the line cut deeply into the water, while more than once he
dragged the rod far below the surface.
"Look out, now! Don't give him any slack! Bring him up alongside!"
called Ethan, as with his landing-net in the water he endeavored to
thrust it under the struggling fish.
But, alas! in his excitement Bob either neglected the directions given
him or was unable to comply, for somehow his grasp on the reel was
removed, the line sped out, and when the excited lad began to reel in
again, the tension was suddenly relaxed, and with a quick movement of
the boat he was thrown back into the chair.
"He's gone! He's got away!" exclaimed Bob, ruefully.
"So I see," remarked Ethan, as he calmly picked up his oars and
resumed his labors.
"But he was a big fellow!" protested Bob, "and I had him right up to
the boat."
"He was a pretty good one," said Ethan, "but it's a game of 'now you
see him and now you don't.' It's a good deal of a trick to know how to
land a three-pound bass. Still, you didn't do so very bad for a
greenhorn."
Bob made no reply as he slowly reeled in his line at the boatman's
direction. Greenhorn! Well, there were some things he did not know,
although he had spent much time in the city. To his mind Ethan, with
all his good qualities, had been the greenhorn; but now the boatman
was the one to accuse him of the possession of that very quality. His
respect for Ethan went up instantly, and he looked up at him in a new
light.
"You'll soon get the hang o' it," said Ethan kindly, as he proceeded
to bait Bob's hook again. "You did first-rate for a beginner. The main
thing is to look out for yer slack. A bass is a fighter, and he'll
take advantage o' ye every time you give him a chance. I think we'll
try it again around this shoal. One strike may bring another."
"Why do the bass come to the shoals, Ethan?" inquired Jock.
"That's where the minnies [Ethan meant minnows] are, and they're the
ones the bass feed on. Now we'll try it again."
Once more Ethan began to row, and the long lines dragged on behind the
boat. Both boys were all eagerness now, and Bob's laziness had
departed. They watched and waited for the longed-for "strike," and
soon to Bob's great delight he felt the tug upon his line which
indicated that his hook had again been seized.
"Now be careful, son," said Ethan, "and mind you don't give him any
slack."
Mindful of the caution, Bob worked carefully, and after a time
succeeded in bringing the fish up to the boat, when Ethan deftly
thrust the landing-net underneath it and threw it into the boat, and
with a blow of a stout hickory club speedily put an end to the
struggle.
"I 'most always does that," he explained. "I don't s'pose a fish knows
anything about it, but I don't like to see 'em go ker-flop, ker-flop!
so I puts 'em out o' their misery. Besides, they're better eatin' when
ye treat 'em that way."
"This one is a little fellow," said Bob, regretfully, as he gazed at
the fish, which now had been thrown into the fish-box. "The other must
have been ten times as large as this one. That was a monster!"
"The big ones 'most always gets away," replied Ethan, smilingly. "An'
they grow mighty fast, too, sometimes. The farther away they git the
bigger they be."
"What do you mean?"
"Oh, nothin'; but that I've knowed a man when he was out with me to
lose a half-pound bass, an' by the time he got back to the camp or the
hotel, that 'ere bass weighed a plump five pound. It's marvellous
like, the way they grow sometimes."
"Where's the other boat?" said Jock.
"I dunno. We'll let 'em look after themselves a bit. We'll try it here
again afore we leave. It's your turn next to get one."
Eager to continue the sport, the boys once more let out their lines,
as Ethan began to row slowly over the shoal again.
CHAPTER VII.
IN GOOSE BAY.
The success which attended their efforts was not great, and after a
few more bass had been taken, Jock, to his chagrin, not having even
one strike, Ethan decided to leave that ground for another.
"I think I'll take ye over to Goose Bay," he said. "That's where I
told Tom to go, and probably they're there by this time."
"That's historic ground, isn't it, Ethan?" inquired Bob.
"Yes. The British and Yankees had a bit of a go round there in the War
of 1812. I'll show ye jest where it was when we get there."
"How did you know there was a fight there, Bob?" said Jock, quickly.
"'Most everybody knows about that, I s'pose," said Ethan, before Bob
could reply. "Everybody round these parts has heard of it."
Bob looked up at Jock and winked slowly. "Do you remember what Oliver
Wendell Holmes said about every little place he went to thinking it
was the central spot of all the world, and that the axis of the earth
came straight up through it? He went down to a little place named
Hull, once, and when he came away he said the people there were all
quoting Pope, though they didn't know it, and saying, 'all are but
parts of one stupendous Hull'! Remember that, Jock?"
"Ye needn't be makin' fun o' me," said Ethan, sharply. "I guess folks
round here is as smart as they be anywhere. You city people talk about
how green country folks are when they come to teown, but I don't
believe they're any greener than city folks be when they go into the
country."
"I didn't mean that," said Bob, quickly. "I was only wondering a
little why it was that you thought everybody ought to know about Goose
Bay, and the time the British and our men had here in the War of
1812."
"Why shouldn't they know about it, I'd like to know?" replied Ethan,
somewhat mollified. "It's hist'ry; an' ye study hist'ry, don't ye?"
"We pretend to; but Jock here doesn't know much about it, you see,"
said Bob.
"He'll larn. But I was speakin' about the greenness o' city folks in
the country. Well, they be green. My wife had a time of it with the
fresh airers only last summer."
"The 'fresh airers'? What are they?"
"Don't ye know what they be? Well, I swan, ye're greener 'n I thought.
They're the boys an' girls the folks pick up off the streets in the
city and send up into the country every summer. We had some last
year."
"Oh, yes, I know. You mean the children sent out by the fresh-air
fund."
"I s'pose I do. We call 'em 'fresh airers' up here."
"What did they do?" inquired Jock.
"Lots o' things. Two of 'em--we had five to our house--was walkin'
along the road with me the next day after they come, an' one little
fellow ran up the bank an' began to pick some buttercups what was
growin' there. The other little chap was scared like, an' he called
out, pretty sharp, 'Hi, there, Henry! Keep off the grass or the cop'll
get ye!' An' he meant it too."
"Poor little wretches," said Jock, sympathizingly.
"'Twasn't whether they was wretches or not; 'twas their greenness I
was thinkin' on. We had a lot o' bee-hives out near the back door, an'
after dinner that same day my wife looked out the window an' she see
that same little chap there with a stick in his hand. He'd jest poked
one o' the hives over, and the bees was fightin' mad. She was scared
'most out o' her seven senses, my wife was, an' she jest grabbed her
sunbunnit an' hurried out o' the house an' screamed to that young 'un
to come on. He didn't want to come, an' was layin' about him with his
stick; but my wife ran out an' grabbed him by the hand an' they
started up the hill 'lickety-whew, yer journey pursue,' an' the bees
after 'em. They finally made eout to get free from 'em, an' then the
little shaver was for goin' back an' havin' it out with 'em. 'Them
bugs bit me,' he says, says he, 'an' I'm goin' to go back and fight
'em.'"
Both the boys laughed heartily at Ethan's narrative, and now that his
good humor was restored, he said, "Wasn't that greenness for ye? That
same little chap was a great one, he was. He was tickled to pieces to
gather the hens' eggs. He'd be out in the barn an' kep' so close
after the hens they didn't have a chance to hop onto a nest, so that
my wife had to tell him that he mustn't go out there for the eggs
except when she told him he could. He teased like a good fellow, an'
finally 'bout noon the next day she told him he could go out an' get
the eggs. He was gone a long time, an' she kind o' mistrusted
some-thin' was wrong, so she started out to 'view the landscape o'er,'
as the tune says; but pretty quick she sees him a-comin' out o' the
barn holdin' his hat in his hand, an' lookin' as disconsolate like as
if he'd lost every friend he ever had or ever expected to have on this
earth. 'What's the matter, sonny?' says she, 'can't ye find any eggs?'
'Yes,' says he, 'I found two, but they ain't no good.' 'What's the
trouble?' says she. 'They ain't no good,' says he, again. 'The old hen
was on the nest, an' when I scart her off, the eggs was spoiled,' says
he. 'I guess she's cooked 'em, for they're both warm!' I'd like to
know if any country boy could be greener in the city than that city
boy was in the country?"
"I don't believe he could," laughed Jock.
"That's my opinion, too," said Ethan, soberly. "Why, that there boy
was the greenest thing alive! D'ye know, he 'lowed he'd never seen a
live pig in all his born days. What d'ye think o' that? Yes, sir!
never had seen a live pig, an' he was a boy ten year old, goin' on
'leven."
Ethan's reminiscences were cut short, however, for they were now
entering Goose Bay. Its wooded shores and high bluffs, its still
waters and little islands, in the light of the morning sun, presented
a scene of marvellous beauty, and both boys were much impressed by the
sight. In the distance they perceived their companions, and as soon as
they had been seen, Ethan exclaimed,--
"They're still-fishin'."
"Still fishing? Of course they are. Why shouldn't they be?" inquired
Bob.
"Ye're as green as that city boy I was tellin' ye of. Still-fishin' is
jest fishin' still, ye know. Not trollin' the way I'm goin' to, but
they're anchored, and are havin' a try with worms for bait."
"What do they catch?" said Bob.
"I don't know what they're catchin', but there's perch there, an' I
presume that's what they're fishin' for. We'll try the bass, though,
a spell longer."
Ethan rowed slowly in near the shore, and had gone but a short
distance before Bob felt the welcome tug upon his line, and, after a
contest of a few minutes, succeeded in bringing the struggling fish
close to the boat, where it was successfully landed by the boatman.
Bob was doing better now and profiting by his mistakes, but Jock had
not caught a fish since they had started from the camp.
"What's the trouble, Ethan? Why don't I get any?" he said.
"More'n I can tell ye. Bees won't sting some folks and dogs won't bite
'em, either. Mebbe it's the same way with fishes."
Jock's ill-luck still continued, however, and although Ethan rowed
over the rocky shoal for an hour and a half, not a fish did the eager
lad secure. Bob was rapidly becoming an expert, and already had landed
a half-dozen large bass, and had lost only three.
"I'll row ye in-shore a bit," said Ethan, dropping his oars and taking
a tin cup, with which he dipped up some of the water in the bay and
quenched his thirst.
"What's wrong with this work?" inquired Bob. "I'm not finding any
fault."
"Probably not," replied Ethan, dryly. "We'll change our tune a spell,
and see if we can't do some thin' for this other boy."
Bob uttered no further protest, and Ethan at once sent the little
skiff swiftly toward the shore. As it grounded upon the beach he said,
"Now you two boys get out an' wait for me here. I'll be back pretty
quick, an' we'll see what can be done."
The boys obediently leaped ashore and then stood for a moment together
as they watched their boatman. Ethan moved out near a low point and,
dropping overboard his anchor, took a light little rod they had
noticed in the boat, and began to fish. They could see him as he drew
several into the boat, and then in a few minutes he came for the
waiting lads.
"Wait a minute," he said, as he drew the boat up on the beach. "I'm
goin' to do somethin' else. I'm goin' to have young Jock get a fish if
such a thing is possible."
Ethan walked up the shore, and the boys could see him as he darted in
among the rushes, leaping about like a schoolboy. They could not
perceive what his object was, but as they had implicit confidence in
his ability, they remained contentedly where they were, and Ethan soon
returned.
"There!" he exclaimed. "Neow if them fish don't bite, it won't be
because we haven't given 'em what they want for dinner. Get aboard,
boys."
The boys quickly resumed the places they had occupied, and their
boatman once more began to row. "Don't let out yer lines yet," he
said. "Wait till I'm ready for ye."
Wondering what plan Ethan had in mind, the boys obeyed, and Ethan soon
started toward another part of the bay. He glanced keenly about him
and then peered over into the water. Apparently satisfied with his
inspection, he let the anchor fall, and as the skiff swung around
before the light wind and settled into position, he said, "Let's have
your lines, boys."
"We're going to still-fish, are we, Ethan?" said Jock.
"I'm thinkin' some on it."
"What do we catch here?" inquired Bob.
"That depends. Some folks catches one thing and some another, an'
sometimes they doesn't catch anything at all."
"Why do you put such a fish as that on my hook?" exclaimed Jock,
aghast.
Ethan had taken a fish, a "chub," he termed it, which must have
weighed a full half pound at least, and baited Jock's hook with it.
"To catch fish with," remarked Ethan, laconically, as, after
inspecting the struggling bait, he threw it overboard. "Now let him
take your line and go where he wants to. Not too fast. Go easy, like,"
he added, as he turned to equip Bob in a similar manner.
"Ethan thinks we're after alligators or whales," said Bob, as his own
line began to run out. "Oh, well, we'll have the fun of sitting out
here on the water if we don't get a strike," he added, settling back
in his comfortable chair.
Indeed it did seem as if no fish in the St. Lawrence would be
attracted by such a bait as that which the boatman had provided.
Neither of the boys really expected any result, but they were not
inclined to protest.
The scene about them was the reflection of that within. A perfect
summer day, with woods in the distance, and a silence interrupted only
by the harsh cawing of the crows. The beautiful water glistening in
the sunlight, and the gentle motion of the skiff as it slowly turned
with the slightly changing breeze, increased the sense of absolute
peacefulness. The roar of the city seemed like something unreal and
something which they never had actually heard. Neither of the boys
spoke for a time, and Bob closed his eyes as he leaned back in his
seat. Ethan also was silent, but his keen eyes were seldom taken from
the lines.
"Your bait seems to be goin' up-stream," he said in a low voice to
Jock.
Instantly the lad sat erect and looked eagerly at his line. It did
seem to be moving through the water, but as yet he had felt no tug,
and could hardly believe it was anything more than the motion of the
"chub."
"Is it a fish, Ethan?" he exclaimed excitedly.
"Looks like it."
"Shall I reel him in?" he inquired, as he started to rise from his
chair.
"No, no!" replied Ethan, quickly. "Let him get the bait. If he
swallows it for good and all, you'll have him."
All in the boat were now following the movements of Jock's line. The
lad had reeled out more, and still it was steadily moving away. For
two full minutes the excitement continued, and then Ethan said:--
"Reel in now, a bit. Do it gently, and don't skeer him. Want me to
take the rod?"
"No!" exclaimed Jock, decidedly. "I'll win or lose him myself."
Slowly he turned the reel, gazing eagerly all the time at his line in
the water, but as yet he had felt no response.
Suddenly there was a yank which almost took the rod from his hand, and
which made the reel sing as the line was drawn from it.
"Let him go! Let him go! Ye'll have to tucker him eout!" exclaimed
Ethan. "I'm thinkin he felt somethin' prick his heart."
"Shall I stand up?" said Jock, in increasing excitement.
"No, ye'll be overboard if ye do. Now, keerful! Reel him in when ye
can, and when he wants to take the bit in his teeth let him go. There!
That's the way! That's the way to do it!"
Jock was enjoying the contest hugely. He would reel in a few yards,
and then with a savage plunge the fish would dart away again, only to
have the measure repeated. Five minutes, ten minutes, passed, and
still the contest was not ended, nor had Jock had one glimpse of the
fish he had hooked. From its struggles and the manner in which it
pulled, the excited lad thought he must have caught a monster of some
kind.
He was reeling in steadily now, and peering at the same time over into
the water. Suddenly he caught sight of a huge body near the boat and
knew that it must be his victim; but the glance was only for a moment,
for with another desperate plunge the fish darted away again and the
reel repeated its song.
"He's gettin' tuckered out," said Ethan. "Now don't give him any
slack, and look out for your rod, or he'll snap it in a minit. Keep a
steady hand this time, an' I'll see what I can do with the gaff."
Jock had no idea of what a "gaff" was, but he gave it little thought,
whatever it might be. The fish was coming steadily this time, and once
more the eager boy could see him in the water.
"Now be keerful! Bring him up alongside the boat. There! That's
right!" said Ethan, in a low voice.
"What a beauty!" exclaimed the delighted Jock.
"Keep still, or ye'll scare him," warned Ethan.
But the fish was within reach now, and the boatman leaned forward, and
with a quick thrust of his gaff drove it into the body. There was a
splash of water, the light skiff rocked until the boys were almost
thrown from their seats, and then they instantly recovered themselves
and turned to see the result of Ethan's effort.
CHAPTER VIII.
JOCK HAS HIS TURN.
There was a commotion on board which seemed to threaten the safety of
all. The huge fish was throwing himself from side to side, but Ethan
was equal to the emergency, and with his merciful hickory club soon
put an end to the struggle.
"Whe-e-w!" exclaimed Jock, in delight. "Isn't he a beauty!"
"That depends," said Ethan, laconically. "I don't believe that chub
thought he was specially pretty, when he saw this fellow get after
him."
"He seems to have a remarkably open countenance," drawled Bob, as he
pried open the great mouth with the end of his rod.
"'Tis something of a mouth the pickerel has, for a fact," said Ethan.
"D'ye see how the teeth are all set the wrong way?"
The two boys eagerly examined their prize. The mottled sides still
glistened and the beautiful markings were all clear; but the mouth,
as the boatman had said, was enough to strike terror to all fishes of
lesser degree.
"Not much chance for a chub if that trap once shuts to on him," said
Ethan. "If he tries to back out, he only drives the teeth in farther."
"How much will he weigh, Ethan?" inquired Jock.
"Oh, seven or eight pounds. It's a pretty fair pickerel."
Jock was disappointed. To him it had seemed as if the pickerel must
have weighed much more than that. His disappointment was still further
increased when Ethan added, "They ain't much good for eatin'. Oh, ye
can eat 'em if ye want to, an' some folks like 'em first-rate, but
give me a bass every time."
"That's the reason I caught bass," drawled Bob. "It's a shame to pull
out a pickerel when you don't want him."
"Pity about you," laughed Jock. "I don't care about fooling with
little bass that aren't big enough to leave their mothers. When I
catch a fish I want to get one large enough to know what he's doing.
Hello," he suddenly added, "there comes the other boat. I wonder what
luck they've had."
The other skiff was now swiftly approaching, as Jock had said, and in
a few minutes it came alongside. Long before it was near enough for
his voice to be heard, Jock exultingly held up to view the immense
fish he had captured, and when his friends came closer, great was
their astonishment and many their words of praise.
"We'll go ashore for dinner now," said Ethan, after the prize had been
examined. "Ye're ready to stop a bit, aren't ye?"
"We are," shouted the boys together; and side by side the two skiffs
moved toward the shore.
Before the boys landed they discovered that near the place to which
evidently Ethan was going were the ruins of some building which
plainly had been a large one. The boatman explained that a hotel had
stood there at one time, but it had been burned, and never had been
rebuilt.
As the boys leaped ashore they all eagerly examined the catch which
Tom's boat had made. There were several bass and a fish which strongly
resembled the pickerel which Jock had caught, though it was much
smaller.
"They've got a pickerel, too," said Jock, as he discovered the fish.
"That isn't any pickerel," remarked Tom.
"What is it, then? It looks just like one," said Jock.
"It's a muscalonge. It's a little fellow, and the first one I've seen
this year."
"Ye ought not to have saved him, Tom," remonstrated Ethan. "If you'd
let him go, he might 'a' growed big enough to amount to somethin'."
"I thought of it, but I didn't know what luck you were having, and I
knew we'd want some fish for dinner, so I let him stay."
"If they're beginnin' to run, mebbe we'll strike one some day that's
o' decent size. Jock, if ye ever get a muscalonge what weighs forty
pound on the end o' yer line, ye'll find out that catchin' pickerel's
boys' play alongside o' it."
"Do you really think we'll get one?" said Jock, eagerly.
"Can't tell. Like enough ye will, an' jest as likely ye won't. Out
with ye now, the whole kit and posse o' ye," he added, and the boys
turned toward the grove of maples which grew near the shore.
"This is what I call great fun!" exclaimed Ben, as he threw his long
body on the grass. "I think I could almost make up poetry if I was to
stay here long enough."
"Your face looks as if it was burning with poetic fire," drawled Bob.
"It can't look worse than yours," replied Ben, as he placed his hands
on his cheeks.
Indeed, all four of the boys presented a similar appearance, for the
effect of the rays of the sun reflected from the water had made all
their faces of a decidedly brilliant hue. Jock tried to comfort them
by explaining that that was what was to be expected, and that more
marked results than these were likely to be attained before their stay
in camp was over. But for the present the boys were content as they
lay beneath the grateful shade of the spreading maples. In the
distance was the glorious St. Lawrence, and an occasional whistle
indicated that yachts were speeding over its course, or that the river
boats were passing. Other skiffs had now entered Goose Bay, and as
they moved slowly over the shoals or anchored near the "weeds," it
became evident that its waters were well known before the coming of
our boys.
It was now noon time, and the leaves upon the trees were hardly moved
by a breeze; out on the bay the sun was beating, and the quivering
motions of the air under the influence of the summer heat could be
distinctly seen. In the distance the calls of the crows could be
heard, but otherwise the quiet of the day was unbroken. On every side
was the solitude, and as one of the boys expressed it, 'they could
almost hear the silence.'
Yet the impression produced by it all was as strong as it was novel.
The struggle for existence, the life of the city, the rumble and
indefinable roar of the town, were all forgotten for the time. Here,
at least, was peace, and the reluctance of Ethan to leave his home by
the great river, or depart from the comradeship of the St. Lawrence,
could be readily understood. All four of the boys felt the influence
of the scene, and after a few minutes the laughter and conversation
ceased, and the young fishermen were as silent as the silent trees
above them.
Their revery was soon interrupted by the call of Ethan for them to
come to dinner, and with a shout the boys leaped to their feet and ran
to the place where the dinner had been prepared. The sight which met
their eyes was one which might have done even an epicure good. Both
the fishermen had been busy, and the results of their labors were now
manifest. A fire had been kindled near the shore, and over it had been
placed a contrivance with which nearly every fisherman on the St.
Lawrence was provided. A frying-pan and pot had been used, in the
former of which small pieces of salt pork and some of the recently
caught fish had been cooked, and in the latter were green corn and
potatoes. Coffee, also, had been made, and when the boys seated
themselves upon the bank they perceived that Ethan had brought other
dainties from his home. Huge "doughnuts," and cookies of ample size,
as well as pickles and various other dainties, were there. A large can
filled with milk was also placed upon the improvised table, and
altogether the "spread," as Bert termed it, was most inviting.
"Where did you get all these things?" exclaimed the delighted Bob.
"Brought 'em with me in the skiff."
"Is that what you do, every day you go fishing?"
"'Most always, when I take out city folks. I think they like the
dinner we cook about as well as they do the fishin' itself. 'Long
about noon time we usually land and cook the dinner. Every boat has a
lay-out somethin' like ours, though I don't say every one is as good
as this," he continued, with pardonable pride.
"I should say not," replied Ben, as the boys all fell to with a will.
For a time scarcely a word was spoken, so busy were they all in the
occupation upon which they were engaged. Ethan still remained by the
fire, and from time to time brought pieces of the sputtering pork,
which somehow seemed to disappear almost as rapidly as they came.
"What kind of meat did you say this is?" inquired Bob, as distinctly
as one could pronounce the words when his mouth was filled with the
article in question, and at the same time leaning forward to make sure
that the last piece on the plate should not be wasted.
"Salt pork."
"I never tasted of it before."
"Go 'long," said Ethan, incredulously. "Ye don't really mean it, do
ye?"
"Yes, I do mean it," replied Bob. "It's my first experience; and my
only hope is that it won't be my last."
"If you don't stop before long it'll be your last, I'm sure,"
interrupted Ben, himself as deeply engrossed in the occupation as was
Bob.
"Well," said Ethan, "I wouldn't 'a' believed that ye never eat any
fried salt pork afore. Why, everybody eats it."
"I don't wonder," murmured Bob, as he dexterously flung a corn-cob,
which had now served its full duty, at a tree in the distance.
"I'm afraid Ethan doesn't think we know much," said Jock. "He's been
telling us this morning about the greenness of city people when
they're in the country. I'm inclined to think he's right, too."
"Well, they be green," protested Ethan, sturdily. "I had a young
fellow from Bosting up here last year, what I rowed for, an' if ye
believe me, he didn't actually know how many teeth a cow had on her
upper jaw. No, sir, he didn't for a fact; an' he was in college, too.
Mebbe ye don't believe me, but it's true as yer life, what I'm tellin'
ye."
There was a twinkle in Ethan's eyes as he spoke, which was not lost
upon our boys, who were looking somewhat foolishly at one another.
Perhaps they were fearful that the question would be brought home to
them.
Their anxiety was relieved when Jock spoke up quickly, and said, "Tell
us, Ethan. How many teeth does a cow have on her upper jaw? I don't
know; I don't, for a fact."
"Thank you! You have expressed my feelings exactly," said Bert, partly
rising from his seat, and bowing in mock honor at Jock.
"She has all she needs, I'm thinkin'," said Ethan. "If ye don't know,
I shan't tell ye. I understand all four o' you boys are goin' to
college, an' when ye get there I'm thinkin' some o' those Latin or
Greek books'll tell ye all about it."
At last the dinner apparently was finished, and with a sigh Bob rose
from his seat.
"This has been a great treat, Ethan," he said. "If Delmonico or the
Waldorf-Astoria can do better, I've yet to learn it."
"There's one thing they can't furnish," said Ethan.
"What's that?"
"The appetite. It takes this river and the air to furnish that."
"That's so; though I hadn't thought of it."
"Hold on," said Ethan, quickly. "We aren't done yet. Tom, you go down
to my skiff an' bring up those pies an' things in the box under the
back seat. Be quick, lad, or the appetite'll get away from these
boys."
"Poison things? What do you mean, Ethan?" laughed Bob. "Aren't you
satisfied with feeding us in this way? Don't you want the trouble of
rowing us back to camp?"
"I didn't say nothin' about 'poison things,'" replied Ethan, gruffly.
"I was talkin' about pies. Ye know what pie is, don't ye?"
"I do that," replied Bob. "It's something I have never had enough of
yet."
"I should think ye ought to get enough, if ye have it three times a
day."
"Three times a day! I never have it but once, and then in small
doses."
"Sho! I know better. All folks always have it reg'lar three times a
day. Why, I shouldn't feel as if I'd had my breakfast if I hadn't had
a piece o' pie and a doughnut along with it."
"Ethan," said Bob, soberly, "do you take summer boarders at your
house?"
"No, I don't. We did take some one time, but we'll never do it again."
"Why not?"
"Why, do you know," said Ethan, in a low voice, as if he was imparting
a secret, "some o' those folks bothered us dreadful. Yes, sir; they
did, for a fact. There was one o' the men we couldn't get eout o' bed
before six o'clock in the mornin'. What d'ye think o' that? Yes, sir,
he'd actually lie in bed till six o'clock in the mornin'! But we must
get out o' this if we're to do any more fishin' to-day. Come, Tom,
help me clear away these dishes."
That task was speedily accomplished, and then the sport was resumed. A
fair degree of success attended their efforts, and as the sun began to
sink low in the western sky, Goose Bay was abandoned for the time
being, and the two skiffs were headed for the camp on Pine Tree
Island.
CHAPTER IX.
ANCIENT HISTORY.
It was supper time when the boys arrived in camp, and Ethan and his
son at once prepared the evening meal. Strange as it may seem to be,
the appetites of the campers were almost as keen as they had been for
the dinner at Goose Bay, and a full hour had elapsed before they rose
from the table.
As soon as the remains of the feast had been cleared away, that is, if
dishes can be called "remains," for little else was left by the hungry
lads, Ethan and Tom prepared to depart for home, promising to be back
in camp in time for breakfast.
"You won't forget what I told you, Ethan," called Jock, as the men
were about to set sail.
"No. I'll go over to the bay [Alexandria Bay, Ethan meant] and stop on
my way home. I'll fix you out to-morrow mornin' sure."
"What conspiracy are you up to now, Jock?" inquired Bert.
"That's a secret," replied Jock, laughingly. "If it's a good day
to-morrow you'll know all about it. You'll like it, too. I'm sure you
will; and it'll leave even the fishing we've had to-day away behind."
"What is it?" persisted Bert. "More fishing?"
"No. You've had enough of that for one day, I should judge by the
looks of your face. It'll peel in a day or two."
"I can stand it to have a layer or two drop off. But what is it you
and Ethan are going to do to-morrow?"
"Sufficient unto the day is the question thereof," answered Jock. "I
shan't tell you, Bert. It's to be a surprise."
"Come up here, you fellows," called Bob from the bank. "We want your
valuable assistance. My little body is aweary."
"Since when?" called Jock, as he and his companions started back to
camp.
"Since I've been trying to roll these logs into position. Lend a hand,
you two. I'm not equal to the task."
The boys all began to labor now, and soon had a great pile of logs in
the fireplace in front of the camp, under these some kindlings were
placed, and as soon as all things were in readiness, Bob took a match
and started a fire. The flames were soon leaping into the air and cast
their beams far out over the river. The boys then threw themselves
upon the ground in front of the blazing logs, and for a time no one
spoke.
[Illustration: "The fire roared, and the flames leaped higher."--_Page
107._]
The fire roared, and the flames leaped higher into the air. All about
them it was as light as day, and the scene was indescribably weird.
The great river swept onward in its course, and its waters reflected
the light of the blazing camp-fire. The branches of the tall trees in
the rear of the camp swayed before the night wind, and increased the
wildness of the scene. Bats could be seen circling about in the air,
as if they were startled and confused by the strange light. Across the
water came the faint and indistinct sounds of a party of young people
out for an evening sail. Altogether the experience was so novel that
the boys were all impressed by it, but it was impossible for them long
to remain silent, and Bob was the first to speak.
"I've been thinking about the history of Goose Bay. It is an
historical spot, you know, boys, just as Ethan said it was."
"Suppose you tell us about it, then," said Ben, whose long form had
hardly stirred since the fire had been kindled.
"That's just what I was intending to do," replied Bob.
"It'll be a good lullaby," drawled Ben. "If you hear any sound that
leads you to suspect that I have fallen asleep, please don't blame me.
I always go to sleep when I try to read history."
"As long as there are live coals here, you'd better not go to sleep,"
warned Bob. "I'll serve you worse than the tithing-men used to serve
the old farmers who went to sleep during the sermon."
"Oh, no, you won't. It won't be my fault if you put me to sleep. Did
you ever hear what Henry Ward Beecher said about the tithing-man and
his pole?"
"No. What did he say?"
"He said if he saw anybody going to sleep when he was speaking, he
didn't want any tithing-man to come around with his stick and stir the
man up, but he wanted him to take his stick and stir him up, for it
was his fault if he let a man go to sleep. See?"
"Yes," replied Bob. "I'll do my best. Listen, then, my children, and
you shall hear the wonderful tale of Goose Bay."
"I knew a goose had a tail, but I didn't know Goose Bay had a tail."
"Well, it has," replied Bob, as he pretended to kick a live coal
toward the mocker. "This is the tale of Goose Bay. Many years ago,
away back in 1813, the British and Americans were at war. I know just
how much you know about that, so I'll not go into particulars."
"Don't," drawled Ben. "I'm beginning to feel sleepy already."
"Well," resumed Bob, "it was about the middle of July in that year.
Our forces were over at Sackett's Harbor, but they weren't having much
excitement, so it was decided to fit out an expedition and come around
the lake to Cape Vincent and then go on a cruise down the St.
Lawrence, seeking whom they might devour."
"I thought it was a lion, a ro-a-a-ring lion that did that,"
interrupted Bert.
"So it is sometimes."
"But wasn't it the British lion you were telling about? Now I could
understand how a lion, a real genuine British lion, might go roaring
around, but when the eagle, the genuine American eagle, starts out on
an expedition, I never thought of him as 'roaring.' What is a roaring
eagle, Bob? Any relation to a soaring lion?"
"Oh, hold on, Bert, give Bob a chance to tell his story," said Jock.
"Story? Story? What more of a 'story' do you want than that? The
American eagle going down the St. Lawrence roaring and seeking whom he
might devour. Is that where 'Goose' Bay got its name, Bob?"
"As I was saying, when I was interrupted by this infant crying in the
night," resumed Bob, disdainfully, "the expedition was partly national
and partly individual, that is to say, it was a privateering trip with
government backing. The man who fitted it out was named Gilbert, I
believe."
"A kind of patriot for revenue only?" inquired Ben, blandly.
"Precisely. Well, they had two gunboats, the _Neptune_ and _Fox_, and
about forty-five or fifty men. They stopped at Cape Vincent and
Clayton, or French Creek as they used to call the place then, and then
kept on their way rejoicing, until they came to Goose Bay. There they
landed and had a parade."
"What did they parade for?" inquired Jock.
"No one knows, or at least I don't. What do they ever parade for?"
"For to show brass buttons and for to delight the ladies and small
boys. I used to think a drum-major was a bigger man than the
President," replied Ben, quickly.
"After they had landed and paraded, they--"
"Went fishing?" inquired Ben.
"They sent a few men down toward Ogdensburg to spy out the land."
"Weren't they roaring and seeking whom they might devour this time?"
"Keep still, Ben, I want to hear about this," said Jock.
"The next afternoon two men, their names were Baldwin and Campbell--"
"Good names!" interrupted Ben, again.
"--came back and reported that a gunboat and fifteen loaded bateaux
were coming up the river. The gunboat was the _Spitfire_--"
"That's a good name, too," remarked Ben.
"At once there was great excitement among the American men. They
arranged a force to cut off all retreat, and then started for the
enemy. Before they fairly knew it they were all taken."
"Who?"
"The British," replied Bob.
"Were they dead? Did they like it?"
"Then the Americans landed at Goose Bay. Oh, I forgot to say that not
a shot was fired in the attack on the bateaux and the _Spitfire_."
"That's the way to fight," drawled Ben. "That would suit me exactly.
If I could parade and then go out and call names, and then march back
in triumph with the haughty foe in chains, I'd like to be a soldier. I
wonder why I wasn't born into this world in my proper age."
"Of course our troops were highly elated," resumed Bob, "for the
_Spitfire_ was armed with a twelve-pound carronade and fourteen men,
and in the bateaux were two hundred and seventy barrels of pork and as
many bags of pilot bread."
"Was that where Ethan got the pork we had for dinner to-day?" inquired
Bert, innocently.
Not deigning to reply or to notice the laugh which arose at Bert's
words, Bob resumed. "The Americans sent sixty-nine prisoners across
the country to Sackett's Harbor, and then with the others they waited
for the enemy to come."
"Why did they wait? What did they want them to come for? I should
think they'd all have gone 'cross lots to Sackett's Harbor," said
Jock.
"They wanted to save the gunboat and supplies. The next morning about
sunrise the bold and brave foe, to the number of two hundred and
fifty, hove in sight. They had four gunboats and two transports and
were evidently ready for the fray. Our men had been stationed in
detachments along the shore, and soon the action was begun. 'They fit
all day and they fit all night,' as the poet says, though I don't know
whether that's history or not; but two of the gunboats had soon been
so injured by our fire that they had to stuff the holes the shot made
with weeds to keep them from sinking."
"Oh! Oh! Oh!" groaned Ben, sitting quickly erect, "I have lived long
in this weary world of woe, but that's the worst I ever heard yet. A
British gunboat stuffing the holes in its sides with weeds! There's an
insane asylum down at Ogdensburg, and either you or I must go there."
"It is a pretty big story, but that's what the book says," protested
Bob.
"Go on! go on!" said Ben, eagerly. "After the British had stuffed the
gaping wounds with seaweed, and our brave and determined lads, with a
fresh supply of spitballs and slingshots--go on! go on!"
"The next morning the redcoats wanted to call it quits, or rather they
sent a flag and a demand for our men to surrender 'to save the
effusion of blood.' The proud foe was sternly repulsed, and the firing
was resumed. It seems all they had expected was to gain time. Trees
had been felled across the creek,--Cranberry Creek they called it, I
believe,--but the foe managed to get away. They were said to have lost
a good many men."
"Did our side lose any?" inquired Bob.
"Three. But reinforcements soon came, and after the boats had been
patched up they started up the river again, bound for Sackett's
Harbor. Off Tibbet's Point they fell in with the _Earl of Moira_,
which chased them, and finally to get away they had to sink the
gunboat they had taken and the most of the bateaux, so that the
expedition came out about even."
"Bob," demanded Bert, once more sitting erect, "the next time hadn't
you just as soon tell us a true story?"
"That's true. I read it in the old histories."
"Do you know any more as 'true' as that?"
"Yes. I've been reading up on the St. Lawrence. I wanted to know
something about the region before I came down here. I don't believe
you know anything about Cartier, or Frontenac, or any of the early
discoverers."
"Carter? Who's Carter?" demanded Ben.
"I didn't say Carter. I said Cartier. He's the discoverer of the St.
Lawrence."
"He was, was he? Well, he's the man for me. Just think of it, fellows,
we'd never be camping here if this place hadn't been discovered. I
move you," he added, "that the professor be invited to resume his
falsehoods to-morrow evening, and that whenever we are seated before
the embers of our glowing camp-fire, or can't get asleep nights, that
he soothe us with his fairy tales."
The boys laughingly agreed to the proposal, and as they rose, Ben
said, "I feel a craving in the inner man. Any of you got a 'crave'
too?"
All four declared they were in suffering need of food, and at once
began to prepare another supper. When their labors were ended,
however, the results were far from satisfactory. Somehow the fish did
not tempt them, and when Jock opened the coffee-pot he exclaimed: "I
thought coffee was a liquid, fellows. Look at this, will you?"
With his fork he lifted from the interior of the pot long, stringy
substances, which certainly were not inviting to the sight.
"What do you suppose is the trouble?" said Ben. "There must be
something wrong with the coffee. Do you suppose it's poison?"
"I don't know. I'll leave it and ask Ethan in the morning," said Bob.
"He'll know all about it."
However, the boys discovered the pies and other viands the boatmen had
left in camp, "pies'n things" Bert termed them, mimicking Ethan's
dialect, and their immediate wants had, to all appearances, been
satisfied when they sought their cots.
So tired were they that even the question of what Jock and Ethan had
prepared for the morrow was soon forgotten, and the smouldering
camp-fire burned low and lower, while the boys slept the sleep which
can only be gained within the sound of the music of the mighty river.
CHAPTER X.
TOM SURPRISES THE CAMP.
The sun was just appearing above the tree-tops on the following
morning, when the camp was shaken by a report which caused the boys to
leap from their beds and rush out into the open space. So startled
were they that the absence of Jock was not perceived; but when they
discovered him on the bank, and a cloud of smoke could also be seen
floating over the river, they knew at once the cause of the alarm.
The presence of a small brass cannon on the ground near where Jock was
standing would have revealed the cause of the excitement if nothing
else had; and, as Jock laughingly turned to greet them, he said:--
"That's the signal to get up, boys. Ethan will be here soon, and we
don't want to delay breakfast."
"Where did you get it, Jock?" said Bert, eagerly examining the cannon
as he spoke. "It's a beauty!"
"Oh, I brought it with me, but I hadn't had a chance to mount it
before. We wanted something to salute the sun with, to say nothing of
the yachts and steamers that pass us every hour or two."
"You don't know how you frightened me," said Bob, slowly. "I almost
thought the British had come back for us."
"Look out at that smoke, will you, fellows?" said Ben, pointing to the
little cloud which could still be seen. "What do you think it looks
like?"
"What does it look like, Ben?" inquired Jock.
"It reminds me of the tail of a goose. Something like the tale of
Goose Bay, with which our imaginative friend here regaled us last
night."
"It makes me think of the story Virgil tells about Æneas, where the
'pious son' tried to grasp the shade of his faithful wife Creusa. She
just vanished into thin air, you remember."
"It's like Bob's history,--too thin," laughed Bert. "Isn't that
Ethan's boat?" he added, pointing as he spoke to a sail which could be
seen approaching the island.
"Yes; that's Ethan. Hurry up, fellows, or you'll be late for
breakfast. You know what his opinion is of people who aren't up early
in the morning."
His companions hastily returned to the tent, and by the time Ethan
landed they were ready for the breakfast which he speedily prepared.
"Goin' to have another good day," remarked Ethan, as he and Tom
cleared away the breakfast dishes.
"That's what we want," said Jock. "Ethan, did you bring over the
things we were talking about last night?"
"Yes, they're in the boat. We've got just the kind of a day we want,
too."
"What is it, Jock, you and Ethan are plotting?" inquired Ben.
"You'll find out pretty soon."
The boys were all eagerness as they followed Ethan down to the dock.
The boatman soon brought forth a small mast and sail, and as he spread
the latter out on the ground, its peculiar shape at once impressed the
interested beholders.
"What do you call that thing, Ethan?" inquired Bert.
"A sail."
"Yes, I see; but what kind of a sail is it? I never saw one like it
before."
"Likely not. They don't grow in cities. It's a 'bat wing.'"
The name was so appropriate that no one had any difficulty in
understanding the cause of the term, but the boatman did not deign to
make any further explanation and at once proceeded to fit the mast in
one of the canoes.
"I only had one," he explained, when the task was completed. "I can
get another at the Bay, probably, and as I didn't have time to stop
there this mornin' and see whether there was any letters for any o'
ye, if ye don't object, I'll take Jock along with me and sail over
there now. I can show him a little how the thing's managed on our way
over, and then when I come back I'll have a couple o' the bat wings,
an' can let the rest o' ye have a try, if ye want it."
Jock protested that some other one of the boys should be permitted to
have the first sail; but they all declared that he was the one to go,
and so the lad took his place in the little canoe, and in a moment the
light craft was speeding swiftly over the water in the direction of
Alexandria Bay.
"Isn't she a beauty!" exclaimed Bert, delightedly. "They wont be gone
long, will they?" he added, turning to Tom.
"No," replied Tom. "You'll get all the sailing you want, to-day."
The boys watched the canoe as it sped on before the wind. They could
see Jock, who was seated on the edge of the canoe in the bow, while
Ethan was in the stern and was managing the sail. At times the canoe
dipped until it seemed to the watching boys that it must be swamped,
but it always righted itself and then leaped forward with ever
increasing speed. At last it disappeared from sight behind one of the
neighboring islands, and then the boys turned with a sigh to the camp,
all of them eager now for the return of their companions, and for the
opportunity to try the merits of a canoe fitted out with a bat-wing
sail.
"What'll we do to pass the time, fellows?" said Ben.
"I think it would be a capital idea for Tom here to speak his piece
before us," drawled Bob. "He wants to practise, and perhaps we can be
of some help to him. Ben here is a prize speaker, you know."
Tom's face flushed, and for a moment he evidently thought Bob was
poking fun at him. "It isn't much of a piece," he said in confusion.
"The young folks are going to have a dialogue and try to raise some
money to fix up the walks over at the Corners."
"So your father told us," said Bob. "I'm in dead earnest, though, Tom.
It's more than likely that Ben can give you points. He took the school
prize in speaking this summer. Go ahead, anyway."
"And you boys won't make fun of me?" inquired Tom.
"Not a bit of it," said Bob, cordially. "We're coming over to see the
show when it comes off, anyway, so you might as well give it to us
now, or, at least, your part. You had pretty good courage to tackle
one of Shakespeare's plays, though. How did you happen to do it?"
"Oh, that was Mr. Wilkinson's idea; he's the teacher at the Corners,
you know. He said we might as well learn something worth hearing while
we were about it, so we finally chose 'Hamlet.'"
"Quite right, too," remarked Bob, encouragingly, as if he was familiar
with all such little matters as the great dramas of Shakespeare, and
was willing to share his courage with all the world.
Tom at last reluctantly consented, and striking an attitude, gazed up
into the sky as if nothing less than the ghost was beckoning to him.
His eyes assumed a far-away expression, and he waited a moment before
he began. Then apparently every muscle in his body became rigid, and
in a loud and unnatural tone of voice he commenced.
"Tew be-e-e- or not to be-e-e-e-e-"
As he spoke his right arm shot suddenly out in front of him, much
after the action of a piston rod in a great locomotive, and his eyes
began to roll. Bert suddenly rolled over upon the ground and hid his
face in the grass, and Ben as quickly turned and gazed out upon the
river as if something he had discovered there demanded his attention.
Only Bob was unmoved, and without a smile upon his face, he said
solemnly, "Why do you talk it off like that, Tom?"
"Isn't that the way to do it?"
"I should hardly think so. Don't you think Hamlet was puzzled and was
somehow half talking to himself? It seems to me as if he was musing
and didn't think of any one to whom he was speaking. He was talking to
himself, so to speak. Don't you think so, Ben?"
"Yes," replied Ben, desperately striving to control his voice, and not
turning his face away from the spot he had discovered on the river.
"Well, I don't know about it," protested Tom. "It always seemed to me
that Hamlet was a good deal of a crank, and instead of acting
naturally he was more likely to do the most unnatural thing in the
world."
"That may be so. Perhaps you are right about that," said Bob, "but
still I think he was communing with himself. They call it his
soliloquy, don't they?"
"Yes; but he was crazy, wasn't he? I think that's what the critics
say."
"I don't know. I believe so," replied Bob, though somehow his air of
confidence seemed to be departing. "Tom," he added, "have you read
much of Shakespeare?"
"I've read all he wrote," said Tom. "We can't do much except read in
the winter down here on the river."
Ben by this time had either examined the distant object on the river
to his entire satisfaction, or else was startled by Tom's words. At
all events he quickly withdrew his gaze and looked at the young
boatman in surprise, and even Bert had ceased to bury his face in the
grass. Somehow the comical aspect of Tom's speech had suddenly
changed.
"What have you read this winter, Tom?" inquired Bob, slowly.
"Oh, I've read all of Shakespeare, as I told you, and then I've read
all of Parkman's histories, and all of Bancroft. You know Parkman has
a good deal to say about the men who first came up the St. Lawrence,
and I wanted to learn all I could about the part of the country I live
in. But I wanted to know something about other countries too, so I've
read Motley's 'Rise of the Dutch Republic,' and Prescott's 'Conquest
of Peru and of Mexico.' Then I've read Wordsworth's poems. It seems to
me I enjoy him better than I do any other poet, for the country around
his home must have been something like this St. Lawrence country.
Don't you think so?"
Before Bob could reply, Ben and Bert suddenly rose from the ground,
and ran speedily into the tent where the trunks were.
"What's the matter with those boys?" inquired Tom, innocently, looking
up in surprise at the sudden departure of his companions.
"I don't think they feel very well," replied Bob, demurely; "or it may
have been that they've gone to see if their fishing tackle is all
right after the experience of yesterday. Tom," he added, "do you read
any fiction, any novels?"
"Not many. Pa doesn't like to have me. He says they're all lies
anyway, and there's enough that's true to read. I've read a little.
I've read most of Scott's novels and Charles Kingsley and some of the
other writers. The last book I read was Defoe's account of the London
plague. I don't like that very well, do you?"
"I've got to see what those boys are up to," said Bob, suddenly,
leaping to his feet as he spoke and moving with unusual quickness
away from the place where he had been lying.
"I say, Bob," said Bert, when their friend joined them, "the next time
you catch a weasel asleep, you let me know, will you?"
"I wouldn't have believed it," spoke up Ben, quickly. "Here we were
thinking we'd get some fun out of this greenhorn, and then he turns
round and puts us all in a hole. I wonder if he really has read all
those books he says he has?"
"You might examine him and see," replied Bob, dryly.
"Not much. You don't catch me that way. Here I was thinking we'd do
some missionary work for the poor benighted heathen of the region, and
lo and behold, they turn upon us and beat us at our own game. Who
would have believed it? I know I shouldn't, for one."
"Serves us right. I'll keep clear of Tom till his 'pa' comes back."
Bob's sentiments were echoed by his companions, and not one of them
ventured to remind the young boatman of the desire to hear him recite
Hamlet's soliloquy. Indeed, they did not venture near the camp until
it was almost noon time, and then Ethan and Jock returned with the
new "bat-wing sail." As they had also brought with them letters for
each of the boys, the time until dinner was ready was all consumed in
reading them, and perhaps no one of them regretted the fact.
After dinner, both Ethan and his son gave their entire attention to
the task of teaching the young campers the art of sailing a canoe
equipped with a bat-wing sail. Only one of the party was taken out
each time by a boatman, and then, after a trial trip, he was allowed
to hold the sheet while the boatman occupied the place in the bow
which the pupil formerly had held.
In this manner the entire afternoon was consumed, and when they all
returned to camp for supper, Ethan declared that he thought it would
be safe for the boys to use the canoes, though he advised that no one
should venture far from the island, and promised on the following day
to repeat the lessons.
When he and Tom had gone, Ben declared he was going out alone for a
sail. He would not listen to the remonstrances of his comrades, and
soon started from the dock. The boys watched him until the canoe
disappeared behind the nearest island. They had no thought of peril,
but when the darkness deepened, and at last the hour of retiring had
arrived, the uneasiness in the camp had become a fear which no one
dared to express.
CHAPTER XI.
A NIGHT OF ANXIETY.
To add to the consternation of the boys, the face of the sky was now
obscured by clouds, and the rising wind gave tokens of a coming storm.
The tall trees groaned and swayed, and the quiet waters of the river
were rising, and already were beginning to lash the low beach.
"I'm afraid Ben's in trouble," said Jock, unable to endure the silence
longer. "If he's all right, he never could find his way in such
darkness as this."
"He started out as if he was going up the stream," said Bert, no less
troubled than his friend. "He ought to have been able to get back."
"He ought not to have gone out at all, as far as the 'ought' is
concerned," replied Jock, gloomily. "Here we were thinking Ethan was a
greenhorn; but he's forgotten more than we ever knew. It was a fool
trick for Ben to start out as he did."
"Well, he went, and that's all there is to say about it. We'll pile
the logs up higher and wait. It's all we can do now," said Bob.
Bob's suggestion was at once acted upon; and soon the light of the
camp-fire was leaping up in long tongues of flame. The wind served to
increase the blaze, and the roar of the blazing logs was added to that
of the rising storm.
For a time the boys sat in silence before the fireplace, gazing out
over the river, and eagerly looking for the sight of the little canoe.
They knew that even a skilled sailor would not dare to venture out in
such a night, but as Ben was already on the river, he must find some
place to land; and so, hoping against hope, the lads waited.
"There comes the rain," said Bob, at last, as a few drops fell upon
his upturned face. "What a night to be out on the river in!"
"Jock," said Bert, "haven't I read that these canoes are upset very
easily on the river here?"
"I think it's likely. They are capsized, whether you've read it or
not."
"Ben can swim, anyway," said Bert, "and that's one comfort."
"I'm afraid he couldn't swim very far to-night," replied Jock,
gloomily. "He couldn't see ten yards before him, and he wouldn't know
where to start for. Whew! Just hear that!"
The rain was now coming faster, and beat upon the faces of the boys
and fell sputtering into the fire. The wind, however, was so strong
that the fire roared and snapped, and a cloud of smoke was borne away
down the river. Inky blackness surrounded them, and the sounds of the
storm-swept river became steadily louder.
"There's no use in all of us staying out here in the rain. The rest of
you go into the tent, and I'll stay here and attend to the fire," said
Jock.
"Don't you think we'd better try to go over to the mainland and rouse
out Ethan? Ben may be in trouble somewhere, and Ethan'll find him if
any one can," said Bert.
"I've thought of that," said Jock, "but it won't be safe to try it.
We've nothing but the canoe here, and it couldn't live in such a storm
as this. Just hear that, will you!" he added.
There was a great roaring in the trees now, and the sound became
steadily louder. The rain, too, increased, and sometimes seemed to
dash upon them in sheets. Out on the river the tossing waters could be
seen where the light of the camp-fire fell, and, capped with white,
they presented a wild sight. And Ben was somewhere on those angry
waters! For a moment it seemed to the troubled Jock that he could see
the picture of a little white-winged canoe driven on by the furious
storm, and in the stern of the boat was a terrified face which
strongly resembled that of the missing Ben. Just then there came a
still more furious blast. The tall trees bent and groaned, and the
tossing waters leaped before it, as a highly strung horse darts
forward at the touch of a whip.
Again it seemed to Jock as if he could see the little canoe driven
before the roaring wind. The gust seemed to lift the light craft in
its grasp, the pale face of the lad on board leaned forward, then
there was a sudden lurching of the boat, the sail dipped until it
touched the water, and then boat and boatman disappeared from sight
and nothing could be seen but the tossing waters and nothing be heard
but the roar of the storm. Thick darkness settled over all, and even
penetrated the heavy heart of the anxious watcher.
None of the boys was willing to leave Jock alone to watch the
camp-fire, and after the mackintoshes had been put on they all
returned and waited. Occasionally a fresh log was thrown upon the
blazing pile and the sparks flew upward, serving only to render more
intense the thick blackness that surrounded them.
There was slight hope of Ben returning now, but the anxious boys were
determined to keep the fire burning, for it would serve as a landmark
if, by any chance, the absent lad might be near. Their eyes were
seldom taken from the river, and hour after hour passed as the vigil
continued.
About midnight the storm abated, and soon the twinkling stars appeared
in the sky. In the renewed hope that Ben might have been able to gain
the shelter of some secluded island and remain until the storm had
passed, they piled the logs still higher and waited and watched for
the canoe to appear.
There were few words spoken now. The river gradually became more
silent and resumed its former peacefulness, and the tall trees ceased
to bend and sway. Perhaps the end had already come and even the waves
were satisfied with the ruin they had wrought.
"I shan't give up hope yet," said Jock, at last. "Ben wouldn't be
likely to try to get back before morning, and he'll wait for daylight
wherever he is."
"Wherever he is," murmured Bert, as if he was speaking to himself.
"You don't really think he's been--that anything has happened to him,
do you?" said Jock, anxiously.
"I hope not."
"I don't know what I'd say to his father and mother," began Jock,
again. "And just think of it! When we were counting on such a good
time, too, and to have this happen almost at the very beginning! Don't
you think we'd better go over to Ethan's now and rouse him out? He'd
know what to do."
"I think we'd better wait till it's light, anyway," said Bob. "I
suppose you're thinking of sending Ethan with his sailboat to look him
up?"
"Yes, that was what was in my mind. You see, Ben may have met with an
accident. He may have lost his paddle, or his mast may have been
broken. There's a hundred things I can think of, and if he should be
cast away on some island, he wouldn't be able to get off without
help."
"You don't know whether to go up the river or down," said Bert,
disconsolately.
"Ben started up the river when he went off," replied Jock; "but it's
just as likely that he's been carried down the stream, with the
current and the wind both to push him on. Ethan will know what to do,
though."
"He'll probably go in one direction and Tom in the other," suggested
Bob.
The three boys lapsed into silence, and while no one spoke openly of
the great fear in his heart, it was nevertheless evident that a common
anxiety had them all in its grasp. Occasionally one would rise and go
down to the dock and peer eagerly out over the river, but his failure
to discover anything of interest would be betrayed by his silence and
gloom when he rejoined his fellows.
The slow hours dragged on and still the heavy-hearted lads waited. The
leaves of the trees dripped steadily, and the monotonous sounds
served only to deepen the feeling of depression. Try as they would the
boys could not shake off their fears, and when at last the first faint
streaks of the dawn appeared in the eastern sky, they were so worn by
their watching, and the anxiety of the long night, that the coming day
brought no relief.
"Two of us had better stay here in the camp," suggested Bob, when the
light became more pronounced. "If you know where Ethan lives, Jock,
you'd better take the canoe and go over to his place."
"I'll go," replied Jock, quickly.
The opportunity to bestir himself afforded a slight relief, and going
at once to the bank he lifted the overturned canoe from its place and
bore it in his arms down to the water. Quickly taking his place on
board he grasped the paddle and with vigorous strokes sent the light
craft swiftly over the water in the direction of the mainland. His two
friends watched him as long as he could be seen and then returned to
the camp. The fire had burned low by this time, but as daylight was at
hand there was little use in keeping it up, and the boys occasionally
stirred the embers as if in the ashes they were looking for something
they had lost.
As the glow of the dawn became more pronounced, and at last the great
sun itself appeared above the horizon, the waiting lads had no thought
of breakfast. Even the wonderful appetite of which they had boasted on
the preceding day, was not able to move them now. The keen air had
lost its power, and all hunger was gone.
From time to time a boat was discovered on the river, and the lads
watched each in silence until it was hidden from sight among the
islands; the missing Ben did not appear. More than two hours had
elapsed since Jock's departure from the camp, when Bob suddenly
exclaimed:--
"Isn't that a canoe out there on the river?"
"Where? Where?" inquired his companion, eagerly.
"Out there in the direction of the point! Hold on a minute, and I'll
get the glasses and we'll see what we can make of it."
Bob hastily ran into the tent and returned with the glasses. Lifting
them to his eyes he gazed long and earnestly at the little spot on the
surface of the river, and then without a word handed them to his
friend. Bert eagerly took them, and after he had peered intently at
the distant object, he lowered the glasses and said in a low voice,
"It's a canoe, Bob, and it's headed this way."
"That's what I made out of it," replied Bob.
"If it was Ben he'd have a sail."
"I don't know whether he would or not. He might have lost it, you
know, in the storm. That isn't the direction from which Jock would
come."
"No. He went straight across from here. Do you think it's Ben?"
Bob made no reply, but he ran swiftly down to the dock, and his
companion as speedily followed him. There they waited for the
approaching canoe, confirming themselves by repeated uses of the
glasses that it was headed for the camp. The little boat became more
distinct, and soon they could see the movements of the occupant as he
deftly wielded his paddle.
At last, when it was within two hundred yards of the dock, after
another long look through the glasses, Bob said, "It's Jock."
Neither of them spoke until Jock ran the canoe in-shore, and then by
the expression upon his face they knew that he had no good report to
make.
"I found Ethan," said Jock, as he lifted the canoe out of the water
and placed it on the bank, "and he and Tom have gone out. One has gone
up the river and the other down."
"What did he say?" inquired Bert, eagerly.
"Nothing."
"Does he think Ben's--"
Bert did not complete the question, and then said, "We weren't looking
for you to come from that direction. We thought perhaps it might be
Ben."
"Ethan sent me over to a man he knew a little farther up the river.
I've started him out to look, too. That's the reason why I came from
that direction. Ethan suggested that I should bring some breakfast
over for you, but I didn't think you'd want any. I knew I didn't,
anyway."
"Nor do we," said Bob. "What are we to do now, Jock? Isn't there
something we can do?"
"Ethan told us to stay here in camp till he came. He says he'll be
here by noon, and then if he doesn't learn anything, we'll decide
whether we'd better telegraph home or not."
Jock's voice broke as he spoke, and his evident anxiety was shared by
the other boys. The end would soon be at hand, but before Ethan's
return there was nothing for them to do but to strive to possess their
souls in patience and wait. Working would have been much more easy for
them all, but there was nothing they could do. They dared not venture
forth from the island for fear of losing their way in the tangled
maze, but they paced back and forth along the shore, peering eagerly
out over the river for the boat which still did not come.
About noontime Ethan returned to camp, but he had found no trace of
the missing Ben; and when an hour later Tom returned, he also had the
same disheartening report to make, for neither had he seen any one who
knew of the lost boy.
CHAPTER XII.
THE MISSING CAMPER.
Ethan beckoned to Tom, and together they at once began to prepare
dinner. The boys noticed their proceedings, but in spite of the fact
that they had had no breakfast, none of them took any interest in the
boatman's task. They did not leave their position on the bank, and
still stood looking out over the river, vainly watching for the coming
of a canoe which as yet had not appeared.
Dinner was soon ready, and Ethan at once summoned the young campers.
His own distress was evident, and did not tend to allay the anxiety of
the boys; but in response to their protest that they were not hungry,
he said:--
"That doesn't make a bit o' difference. Ye've got to eat whether ye
want to or not. It may be we'll have a lot o' work yet to do, and if
ye don't eat ye can't work."
"Ethan," said Jock, "don't you think we'd better telegraph to my
father or to Ben's?" The boys had obeyed the summons, and were now
seated at the table, but the eyes of all were upon the boatman.
"Telegraph?" replied Ethan. "It'll cost ye four shillin' to do that."
"I don't care what it costs," said Jock, recklessly; for even Ethan's
fear of a telegram and its probable expense did not interest him now.
"Wall, mebbe, mebbe," said Ethan, slowly. "Ye'd better eat yer dinner
first, and then we'll see what can be done."
No one spoke during the early part of the dinner, and although the
boys managed to eat some of the food which had been provided for them,
it was evident that they were not hungry, and their thoughts were all
upon their missing comrade. The hopes which they had had at the coming
of the day had disappeared now, and with the passing of the hours the
conviction deepened that Ben was lost. How could they ever send word
to his home? When Jock thought of the enthusiasm with which they had
come, and then realized that he was the one who had proposed the camp,
he was ready to blame himself as the cause of all the sorrow and
trouble. Already in his mind he could see Ben's father and mother,
when the word should be received in their home. How could he bear it?
But Ben was gone; there could be no question about that, and it was
quite probable that they never would learn how or where he had
disappeared. The hungry current of the river bore swiftly onward in
its course all that it seized, and traces of missing boat or boy would
be difficult, if not impossible, to find. His eyes filled with tears,
and he started abruptly from the table.
No one spoke to recall him, for they all understood his feelings, and
indeed their own sympathies were now increasing; but as Jock ran
toward the shore, he perceived that Tom was standing on the bank and
gazing earnestly out upon the river.
Jock looked up to see what had interested Tom, and perceived a small
steam-yacht coming close in-shore. Even while he was watching it, the
beautiful little craft stopped, and a moment later he saw a canoe
lowered from the stern and some one step into it.
The whistle of the yacht sounded shrilly, and in a moment all the
campers were running swiftly toward the dock. No one spoke, but the
canoe was now being paddled toward them, and in a brief time such a
shout rang out from the watchers as was seldom heard on the great
river.
"It's Ben, it's Ben!" cried Jock; and instantly his companions joined
in the word.
There could be no doubt about it now, for even Ben's face could be
seen as he occasionally turned and glanced at them. The yacht whistled
again, as if the people on board shared in the manifest excitement of
the camp, and then turned and steamed up the river, leaving a long
trail of dark smoke behind it. None of the boys marked her departure,
however, interested as they would ordinarily have been in the approach
of such a beautiful visitor, for they were all intent upon the canoe
and its occupant now.
Nearer and nearer came the canoe, and soon it was close to the shore.
In their eagerness, the boys ran into the water, and to save himself
Ben was compelled to relinquish his paddle, and suffer himself to be
drawn up on the beach. As soon as he was safely landed, there was a
scene enacted which none of them ever forgot. Jock was laughing and
crying at the same time, and even the phlegmatic Bob was not unmoved.
"You rascal!" he said at last, when a momentary lull came, "what do
you mean? Give an account of yourself, sir!"
"Here I am," replied Ben, evidently not unmoved by his reception.
"Proceed, my lord, and do as it seemeth good in thy sight."
"Where have you been, Ben?" said Jock, eagerly. "Tell us about it."
"Mebbe he wants some dinner, first," suggested Ethan, who was not the
least unmoved of the party. "He can tell us while he's eatin'."
"We're all hungry, now," said Bert; "we've been fasting while you've
been gone, Ben. Don't we look so?"
"Fasting, fasting?" exclaimed Ben; "then you must have suffered
keenly. I'm as hungry as a bear, myself. Come on, and I'll tell you
all about it, while I'm sampling Ethan's wares."
The boys were soon all seated at the table again, and now that their
lost comrade was found it seemed as if the lost appetites had also
been restored. They fell upon the food before them in a manner which
highly delighted Ethan, and compelled him and Tom to busy themselves
in preparing more.
The dual occupation seemed in no way to interfere with Ben's ability
or disposition to talk, and he at once began his story.
"Well, fellows, it was like this. When I started out last night I
intended to go only a little way. I was going up just around the first
island and then come straight back to camp; but when I rounded the
island, I found the passage so narrow and dangerous I thought I'd go
on around the next one. When I got to the end of that I found I was a
good way out of my course; for the island was a pretty long one, you
see, and when I cleared it, and I came out into the open river again,
I must have made a mistake in my bearings. I didn't realize I'd lost
my way till about a half an hour later, but then I knew it. There were
islands all around me, and the wind had died away, or at least had
died down a good deal.
"I kept on, thinking I'd strike a familiar spot, but the current is
much stronger over there than it is here, and I found I was going down
the stream all the time. I ran the canoe in-shore and took in my sail
and thought I'd paddle, for the wind was mostly gone, as I said. I got
along all right till I was out in the open water again, and had gone a
good distance, but I couldn't find the island I was looking for.
"I began to look about me then, for the sun was almost out of sight by
that time, and the first thing I knew it was dark, and the rain was on
me. I'd been so busy I hadn't fairly realized there was a storm
coming, but I knew it pretty quick then, I can tell you. I kept on and
did my best, but that wasn't much, as you can imagine, and all the
time it kept getting darker and darker. I was wet to the skin in no
time, and the way the waves began to toss my frail bark about was a
caution. Paddling wasn't of much use, and I began to look about me for
some place to run into. Everything was pretty dark, and getting darker
all the time, and I couldn't make out any island anywhere near me. But
I wasn't staying in one place all the time, let me tell you, for the
river was busy if I wasn't, and I went down the stream very swiftly,
for the wind was at my back.
"I don't just know how long the thing kept up, or how far I'd gone,
but I pretty soon saw a light ahead of me which I decided in very
short metre must be a cottage or a house on some island. The paddle
was still in my hands, for I'd been lucky enough to hold on to that,
and then I did my best to steer for the light I'd seen.
"It kept coming nearer to me all the time, or so it seemed to me,
though I suppose I was the one that was doing the travelling, and
after a while I found I was correct, and that it must be 'a light in
the window for thee, poor sailor, a light in the window for me.' I
pulled for the shore, or rather ran for it, and I thought I was just
going to run into shelter, when plump! my canoe struck a rock, and I
was in the water before you could say Jack Robinson. The water didn't
come much above my knees, and then, when I discovered that I wasn't
dead, I swallowed my despair, also a few gallons, more or less, of
this noble river, made a grab for my canoe, and somehow managed to get
to the bank.
"The storm was getting in its fine work then, but it didn't make much
difference to me, for I was wet and couldn't be any wetter. I'd
reached the superlative degree, you see, by that time. I looked up,
and there on the bluff was the light which I'd seen when I was out on
the river; so, when I'd carried the canoe up on the bank, I decided to
try my luck in the house, for I knew I couldn't get back to camp that
night, so I marched up to the door and rapped as bold as you please.
[Illustration: "She looked at me a minute, as if she didn't know what
to make of it." _Page 151._]
"I almost fell over backward when the door was opened by one of the
prettiest girls you ever saw. She looked at me a minute as if she
didn't know what to make of it, and to tell the truth, fellows, I
couldn't think of anything to say. But her father came to the door
just then, and in a few minutes they knew all about my story, though I
don't remember a word I said.
"At any rate, if I was a stranger they took me in, and the goodman of
the house dressed me out in some of his clothes. He was 'a trifle too
short, and a shaving too lean' for me, so that when I was finally
dressed I didn't hardly dare to go downstairs again, for I could
hear their voices through the floor, you see, and I knew there was
more than one girl there then.
"Finally, I plucked up courage and went down, but do you know what
those girls did when I came into the room? Well, they tried to be
polite and all that, but they were mightily tickled about something,
and pretty quick one of them got up and made a rush for the window and
made out that she was looking out into the storm; but I could see her
put her handkerchief to her face as if she was crying, and then the
other three girls went to join her and see the dark, and then one of
them said, 'Tee-hee,' and before you could say Jack Robinson they were
laughing with 'inextinguishable laughter,' as our Homer has it.
"At last one of them turned to me, and I was glad to see her blush,
for she ought to have been ashamed of herself, and I think she was,
and she said, 'You must excuse us, Mr. Dallett. We are ashamed of
ourselves, but really we couldn't help it. If you will come over here
with me you'll see for yourself what it is that troubles us.' Well, I
went over and she stood me up in front of a mirror and what do you
suppose I saw, fellows? There was a chap looking at me from that
mirror, and he was a little pee-culiar I must admit. The coat he had
on was about three sizes too small for him. His trousers were about
four inches above the tops of his shoes, and he looked as if he was
mostly hands and feet.
"Well, I laughed. I couldn't help it, and we had a good time, after
all. You see, Miss Bessie had three of her classmates with her
spending the vacation, and they're a lively lot, I can tell you. I had
a good time, and this morning, clothed in my right mind and also in my
proper garb, they brought me back to camp in their steam-yacht."
It was the middle of the afternoon before Ben's story was ended, and
after they had given vent to their delight over the safe return of
their friend, Ethan said, "Ye don't want me to stay any longer to-day,
do ye?"
"No, Ethan. You can go home. Come over early to-morrow morning."
"To-morrow's Sunday," said Ethan, soberly.
"You don't mean it?" exclaimed Jock. "I'm ashamed to say I'd actually
forgotten even the days of the week."
"I'll come over and take ye all to church," suggested Ethan.
"We'll go to church, but you needn't come for us," said Ben, quickly.
"Ye can't go then, for I thought I'd take yer canoes back with me. I
don't want to leave ye in any more danger."
"No, no. You're not going to take the canoes," protested Ben. "We're
going to master them, now. I'll never give up in the world."
Ethan hesitated, and then under protest finally yielded. He explained
that they could attend service at the Corners, at Alexandria Bay, or
the "Park," as they preferred.
"We'll go to the Bay," said Ben, quickly, so quickly that the boys all
laughed, thinking that they understood his motive.
"'Twill be better for ye to go there," said Ethan, soberly; but he had
no idea of the trouble which his suggestion brought on the young
campers on the following day.
CHAPTER XIII.
A MISHAP.
Sunday morning dawned clear and beautiful. When Ethan came over to the
camp to prepare breakfast, the river lay like a sheet of glass before
the vision of the boys. The twittering of the birds was the only sound
to break in upon the stillness. The summer sunshine covered all things
in its softened light, and as far as the eye could see the hush of a
solemn silence seemed to have driven away all other effects. Even
Ethan's manner was more subdued than on other days, and when our boys
obeyed his call to breakfast, they also were in a measure under the
spell of the perfect summer day.
Sentiment did not interfere with appetite, however, and ample justice
was done to the boatman's labors; and though he referred to his
desire, when he was ready to depart for home, to carry the boys
himself to the Bay to attend service, his offer was once more
refused.
About an hour before the time when the service was to be held, the
boys placed the two canoes in the water again, and with Jock and Bob
in one, and their two friends in the other, they began to paddle. The
light little crafts sped swiftly over the water, and keeping well
together, not long afterward began to approach Alexandria Bay.
To them all it seemed like a novel way of attending church, but they
soon discovered that they were not the only ones to come in that
manner. Sailboats and skiffs, canoes and steam-yachts, could be seen
in various directions, and though these were not numerous, it was
evident that they were all bent on an errand similar to their own.
The boys were paddling more slowly now, as they came near the dock,
and the two canoes were within a few yards of each other. Not an
accident had occurred, and the confidence of the young campers had
been largely increased by their success. They halted a moment to
determine where was the best place to land, when Ben glanced up at an
approaching yacht, and discovered his friends who had welcomed him to
their cottage when he had escaped from the storm. His own presence was
discovered by them at the same moment, and the girls crowded together
near the rail, waving their handkerchiefs and calling to him, as they
perceived that he had seen them.
Eager to return the salutation, Ben took his paddle in one hand, and
with the other tried politely to lift his cap. But alas for human
efforts! His movement suddenly destroyed the equilibrium of the
treacherous canoe, and as it tipped dangerously to one side, Bert, who
was taken unaware by the movement, strove to restore the balance; but
unfortunately he leaned to the same side to which Ben turned, and in a
moment the canoe was capsized, and the occupants sent speedily into
the water.
A cry of alarm and dismay escaped the lips of the girls on the yacht,
and the few men standing at the time upon the dock echoed it. Startled
by the shout, Jock glanced up, and to his consternation discovered his
friends struggling in the water. In his efforts to turn about his own
canoe, he too destroyed its balance, and instantly both he and Bob
were also thrown into the river.
The second accident increased the confusion and alarm, both on the
yacht and on the dock; but in a moment two skiffs were manned, the
struggling lads were drawn from the water, and the canoes as speedily
seized and restored.
When it was seen that the boys were all safely landed, the yacht came
in alongside the dock, and as the girls sprang lightly from the boat
and beheld the dripping, woe-begone lads before them, they burst into
a hearty laugh, in which the boys themselves, in spite of their
confusion, were compelled to join.
"Good morning, Mr. Dallett," said Miss Bessie, to Ben. "What made you
go into the water? Did you think we wouldn't recognize you unless you
came before us in wet clothes?"
Ben laughed, and presented his friends to the young ladies and then to
Miss Bessie's father and mother, Mr. and Mrs. Clarke. The last named
expressed her sympathy for the boys in their accident, and suggested
that the yacht should be used to carry them back to their camp.
"I don't believe they want to go back, unless Mr. Dallett wants to get
that suit of papa's he wore the other night," said Miss Bessie,
mischievously. "That would make a good go-to-meeting suit for him."
Ben laughingly declared that he preferred his present garments, but
the offer of Mrs. Clarke to the free use of the yacht was declined,
and, waiting only until the party had disappeared up the street on
their way to the church, the boys speedily reëmbarked, and began to
paddle swiftly back toward the camp on Pine Tree Island.
"I say, fellows," said Ben, eagerly, as they landed, "let's dress up
and go back again. We'll get there in time for the benediction."
"It's more than that you need," said Bert, glumly. "Tipping two canoes
over in one morning ought to be enough to satisfy you."
"Ben's right," said Jock, quickly. "It'll be all the better to go back
now. We don't want to give up, do we? We started out to go to church,
and I say let's go. We'll have to be quick about it, though, to get in
even for the benediction."
The proposal was agreed to, and hastily changing their clothing they
resumed their places in the canoes, and soon afterward landed at the
dock at Alexandria Bay. Then they walked swiftly up the street to the
little church, but were chagrined to find that they were too late even
for the final part of the service. The congregation had already been
dismissed, and as the boys approached the building they discovered the
people just beginning to depart.
Their friends soon perceived them and expressed their surprise at
their return, which Ben hastened to explain had been brought about by
their desire to accomplish that which they had set out to do in the
beginning. "They were not going to be floored," he declared, "by any
such little thing as the upsetting of a canoe."
As they walked down to the dock, Mr. Clarke said to Jock, "I received
a letter from your father, yesterday."
"Did you?" replied Jock, eagerly. "I didn't know that you knew him."
"Oh, yes, we've had business relations for years. He's a good man."
"You're not the only one to hold that opinion," said the boy, with a
laugh.
"No, I am aware of that. He wrote and requested me to keep an eye on
you. From what I saw this morning, I'm afraid I ought to keep two
eyes in the direction of your camp, instead of one."
Jock laughed, and his cheeks flushed slightly as he heard the laugh
echoed by the girls, but he protested that such an accident as that
which had occurred was not to be considered in a serious light.
"Not that, perhaps," replied Mr. Clarke, "but the one your friend had
the other night was serious enough. It was a narrow escape he had."
"Yes, we were all badly frightened."
"I'm not going to scold you, for I doubt not you'll learn by your
mistakes. Still I should advise you not to take many chances with
canoes on this river. What with the swift current and the squalls
which come, no man knows when or how, it's hardly safe for one who is
not an expert."
"I know that, and we shall be careful."
"That's right. Now Mrs. Clarke would be pleased, I know, to have you
go back home with us and dine there to-day; or if it is not convenient
to-day, then some other day will do as well," he added, as he saw that
Jock hesitated.
"I thank you, Mr. Clarke, and I am sure all the boys will be glad to
come, but Ethan will come over to get our dinner for us to-day, and
there's no way of getting word to him."
"Very well; then come some other day. You'll let us carry you back to
your camp in our yacht, won't you? It's directly in our way."
The invitation was accepted, and the canoes taken in tow. Upon the
invitation of the boys the party all landed at the dock and went up to
the camp together. There everything was of interest, particularly to
the girls, who wanted to understand just the uses of all the various
camp belongings.
Doubtless very clear explanations were given, for at last when they
returned to the yacht they all expressed themselves as delighted with
what they had seen, and the boys were glad to renew the promise Jock
had given that the invitation to dine at "The Rocks," the name by
which Mr. Clarke called his cottage, would be accepted soon.
Not long afterward, Ethan appeared, and as he began his preparations
for dinner, he said,--
"I hear ye had trouble over to the bay to-day."
"Who told you?" said Ben, quickly.
"I don' know as I just remember. Everybody was talkin' of it, though.
I warned ye. Yer pa can't say I was responsible."
"You aren't responsible, Ethan," said Jock, quickly; "'twas Ben."
"How?" inquired Ethan, stopping short in his occupation, with the
frying-pan in his hand.
"He got light-headed and destroyed our balance. The centre of gravity
fell outside the base, and as a natural consequence what took place
naturally occurred."
"Was that it?" said Ethan, slowly. "I heard ye capsized."
After dinner the boys stretched themselves upon the bank, and in the
cool shade began to talk over the experiences of the morning. At last
even that topic ceased to interest them, and for a time they were
silent.
"This is a great river," remarked Ben, at last, breaking in upon the
stillness, and looking out over the water, which was sparkling under
the rays of the sun.
"So it is," replied Bob, lazily. "That was an original remark, my
friend. I'd like to know just how many times it's been said since the
first white man saw the river."
"Bob's going to tell us about Carter," said Bert, solemnly.
"I know of no Carter. Cartier discovered the river, if he's the one
you have in what you are pleased to call your mind."
"I stand corrected," replied Bert. "Go on with your Carter or
Cartier."
"I don't know that there's much to tell. Jacques Cartier was a
Frenchman who lived about four hundred years ago. Just think of it,
fellows; four hundred years, almost, since the first white man saw the
river St. Lawrence."
"Did you say he lives here now?" inquired Ben, solemnly.
Bob gave him a look of scorn and then went on with his story. "Francis
I. fitted him out with two ships of sixty tons each, and with a crew
of a hundred and twenty men he set sail from St. Malo, April 20, 1534.
They say it was only twenty days later when he reached the east coast
of Newfoundland."
"They say?" interrupted Ben. "Who are 'they'?"
"The historians, and other fellows. He sailed north, and finally
planted a cross on the coast of Labrador near Rock Bay."
"What did he plant it for?"
"Then he went south," continued Bob, without giving any heed to the
interruption, "and came down the west coast of Newfoundland until
finally he was driven by the unfavorable winds toward the Magdalen
Islands. He soon started out again, and, still sailing west, landed at
last at the mouth of the Miramichi, and with some of his men began to
explore the bay of Chaleur; but pretty soon afterward he set sail with
his ships--"
"Did he take his men with him?" interrupted Ben.
"And sailed north and landed in the bay of Gaspé. He thought the bay
was the mouth of a large river, so he landed and remained there a
little while before he started on again."
"He was a wise man," said Ben. "Now if he'd remained there after he'd
started on, that would have been another matter. But to remain there
before he left the place,--ah, that's the man for me, every time."
Even Bob laughed good-naturedly at the interruption, and then resumed
his story.
"He had some dealings with the Indians there at the bay of Gaspé, and
one of the chiefs was so taken with Cartier that he gave him
permission to take his two sons back to France with him on the
condition that he would bring them back in the following year."
"Whose two sons? Cartier's?" inquired Bert.
"No, the Indian chief's. Of course the Frenchman promised; but before
he left he planted another wooden cross there, and put on it a shield
with the arms of the French king, and the words, _Vive le roi de
France_."
"How the king must have felt to have his arms left there," murmured
Bert.
"Cartier soon after set sail, and after doubling the point of
Anticosti found himself in a channel and sailed a little way up what
was really a branch of the St. Lawrence, though he didn't know then,
of course, that there was any such river."
"He'd found the St. Lawrence and didn't know it?" inquired Jock.
"Yes."
"He was like some men I know," said Bert. "He knew more than he
thought he did."
"Some men think they know more than they do," replied Bob, soberly.
"Well, Cartier knew the winter was coming on, so he decided to go
home. He sailed out through the straits of Belle Isle, and finally
arrived at St. Malo, September 5, 1534. The king was mightily pleased
with the trip, and promised to send him again in the next year."
"Then, as I understand it," said Jock, "Cartier didn't really sail up
the river in 1534. He only found a little piece of it, and didn't know
what it was he had discovered."
"That's it. He'd discovered it, but didn't know it."
"Poor fellow!" murmured Ben. "And, Bob, did he die?"
"You'll find out," said Bob, "when I tell you the rest of it."
"What! is there more to follow?"
"Yes, it's 'to be continued in our next.'"
"I don't know what I've done to deserve all this," said Ben, "but I
suppose I'll have to put up with it. When's the next instalment due?"
"Not till after we've finished the other thing we're to do to-morrow."
"What other thing?"
"Oh, that's a secret between Jock and me," was Bob's reply, as he rose
from the bank and started toward the camp, an example which all of his
companions at once followed.
CHAPTER XIV.
ETHAN TELLS OF THE "JUMPERS."
With the coming of the morning the little brass cannon in the camp on
Pine Tree Island woke the echoes, and likewise the boys, who had not
left their tent when Jock had gone forth to greet the sunrise. There
was no sleep to be had, however, after the summons, and soon all,
except Bob, were dressed and waiting for the coming of Ethan.
That worthy was soon discovered, though he and Tom came in the
sailboat instead of the skiff which they used on ordinary occasions,
and the sight recalled to Ben the "secret" which had been referred to
on the preceding evening.
"What's to be done to-day, Jock?" inquired Bert, as he stopped to
watch the approaching craft which was speeding swiftly toward them
under the strong breeze.
"You'll have to wait till Ethan comes and tells us," answered Jock.
"It's never safe to reckon without your host, you know."
Ethan and Tom soon landed, and questions of the future were soon
ignored in the immediate prospect of breakfast. Bob also had to be
aroused, and as that was a task which required the combined efforts of
his friends, by the time it was successfully accomplished breakfast
was waiting, and all speedily seated themselves before the rude little
table.
"I'm thinkin'," said Ethan, "that it would be a good day for a trip
down the river. The wind's good this mornin', and if you boys want to
try it, I don't know as we'll find a better day."
"That's the thing," said Ben, enthusiastically. "How far down do you
go, Ethan?"
"Oh, that'll depend," replied the boatman, who was usually as averse
to giving a decided expression of his opinion as any lawyer might have
been. "We can go as far as we want to, if not farther, and then if we
haven't gone far enough we can go farther, I take it."
"Precisely," laughed Bert. "Thank you, Ethan."
"Ye haven't anything to thank me for," replied the boatman, soberly.
"I was jest givin' you my opinion, that's all."
"That's what I was grateful for," said Bert. "Ethan, do the people
down here ever laugh?"
"Laugh? I s'pose so. I don't jest know what ye mean."
"Oh, nothing much; but I've noticed how sober everybody was. We've
seen a good many, but I don't believe I ever heard one of them give a
real good hearty laugh. I didn't know but they'd forgotten how."
"I guess they don't spend no time grinnin', if that's what ye mean,"
replied Ethan, evidently stirred by the apparent reflection upon the
people of the region. "I don't know as they have the regulation
snicker some o' the city folks puts on. I've sometimes suspicioned
that they put on that grin o' theirs first thing in the mornin', along
with their clothes. They say, 'how de do,' 'how de do,' an' smile an'
smile jest as if they'd got to do it, same's as they'd take a dose o'
pickery. I don't see no sense in it, for my part."
"There's comes a big steamer!" exclaimed Ben, suddenly pointing up
the river as he spoke. "Good-by, fellows! I'm off!"
"It's a liner," said Ethan, soberly, pausing to look at the boat,
which was larger than any other on the St. Lawrence, and which was
leaving a long trail of thick black smoke behind it as it approached.
"What's a liner?" inquired Bert.
"Don't ye know what a liner is? It's a line boat."
"But what is a line boat, Ethan?" persisted Bert.
"It's a boat that goes regularly to Montreal," said Tom. "That's what
pa means. It gets along here purty early in the morning."
"What's that young un up to now?" exclaimed Ethan, abruptly. The boys
all turned at his words, and saw that Ben had run down to the bank and
launched one of the canoes. He leaped on board and, steadying himself
carefully, was already paddling out upon the river as if he had gone
to meet the huge steamer.
"He's goin' to take the breakers, the pesky little reptile," said
Ethan, evidently annoyed by the recklessness of Ben. "I should think
he'd had enough o' canoein' in rough water for one day."
Ben, however, was too far out by this time to be recalled; and as the
boatman probably thought all attempts to summon him would be useless,
he wisely held his peace and stood upon the bank with the boys
watching the movements of the reckless lad. The great steamer came
steadily and swiftly forward, and Ben almost as swiftly advanced to
meet it. He was plying his paddle rapidly, and the canoe almost seemed
to leap over the water. A long line of rolling waves were upturned by
the steamer in its course, and stretched away like a furrow left by a
ploughman.
Ben rested a moment as the great vessel came abreast of him and then,
quickly dipping his paddle deep into the water, sent the light canoe
straight for the tossing waves. No one on the bank spoke as they
breathlessly watched their companion, and it was evident that they all
expected to see him overturned in the boisterous water.
Soon Ben could be seen as he entered the wake of the steamer, the
canoe was lifted high for a moment and then disappeared from sight.
Again it rose and seemed almost to stand upright, but it rode the wave
successfully and again went down into the trough of the sea. So up
and down, tossed like a leaf on the stream, the little canoe held to
its course, and it soon became apparent that Ben was master of the
situation.
"He done it," remarked Ethan, forcefully if not grammatically, and a
sigh of relief escaped from his companions as they perceived that Ben
was safe.
Jock quickly turned, and the brass cannon belched forth its salute to
the passing vessel. The delight of the boys was great when they saw a
little cloud of steam shoot upward from the steamer and the heavy
whistle acknowledged the salutation. Some of the passengers on the
deck waved their handkerchiefs, and not to be outdone Bert seized the
tablecloth from the table, from which the dishes already had been
cleared, and waved it in response to the salutes from the deck.
There was another cloud of fluttering handkerchiefs waved at them from
the deck, and then the great steamer passed on its way to the largest
of Canadian cities.
Ben by this time had returned to the camp, and as he landed and lifted
the canoe to its place on the bank, Ethan said sharply to him:--
"That was a foolish risk to take, boy. What did ye do it for?"
"Oh, I wanted to see how it seemed to take those breakers," was the
reply. "Besides, I thought it was a good time to put my ability to the
test."
"Ye haven't got no ability," replied Ethan, gruffly. "It was a foolish
trick; and if ye'd been spilled and got drowned, I'd had the blame of
it."
"I knew you were close by, Ethan," protested Ben. "I couldn't drown
when you were in camp. I just had to do it, you see, for I wasn't
going to let that canoe get the better of me. I'm going to learn how
to manage one while I'm here if I get tipped over a dozen times."
"Ye ought to be careful, though," said Ethan, evidently mollified by
Ben's words of praise. "I didn't believe a city fellow would have so
much grit."
"You don't know us yet," replied Ben, with a laugh.
Ethan said nothing more, and at once gave his attention to fitting out
the sailboat. This task was soon completed, and the eager boys at
once took their places on board.
"Have you got everything we shall want?" inquired Jock, before they
set sail.
"I don't know whether I've got everything ye want, but I've got
everything ye need," said Ethan.
"Got those 'p'is'n things'?" inquired Ben, soberly.
"Yes, I've got the pies an' things," replied Ethan, shortly. "Now, if
ye've got no further speeches to make, we'll cast off."
The boat was soon free from the dock, and, as the sail filled, it
began to move swiftly over the river. There was a strong breeze, and
aided by the swift current the boat drew rapidly away from the island.
Ethan held the tiller, and when, after he had satisfied himself that
nothing had been neglected, he at last took his seat, and gazed about
him with a smile of contentment upon his sunburned face.
"This is something like it, boys!" exclaimed Ben, as he looked about
him over the great river.
The wooded islands, the glistening waters of the river, the strong
breeze, and, above all, the swift motion of the boat, lent an
additional delight to those who were on board.
Camps, not unlike their own, were passed; cottages, on the piazzas of
which groups of people could be seen; the beautiful St. Lawrence
skiffs, in which were men starting forth on an errand like that which
had taken our boys a few days before to Goose Bay, were noted, and all
were enthusiastically greeted. Occasionally some beautiful steam-yacht
would meet them on its way up the river, and in response to their hail
would toot forth its salute. Altogether, the scene and experience were
so novel and inspiring that the boys all felt the exhilaration, and
their delight was unbounded.
"Do ye see that island over there?" inquired Ethan, pointing as he
spoke to one which lay between them and the shore.
The boys all glanced in the direction, and then the boatman said,
"They had a fracas there in the Civil War with the bounty jumpers."
"Bounty jumpers? What are they?" said Ben, innocently.
Ethan gave him a look which was almost one of contempt, and then said,
"I thought you was goin' to college."
"I am," said Ben; "but I don't go because I know it all, but because I
don't. If I knew as much as you do, Ethan, perhaps I shouldn't go."
"Ye don't know much for a fact," replied Ethan, soberly. "I s'pose
ye'll be studyin' Latin and Greek and lots o' such 'tarnal nonsense
when ye git there. If there was a six-year-old boy 'round here that
didn't know what a bounty jumper was, I'd send him to the 'sylum, I
would, for a fact. Have ye found out how many teeth a cow has on her
upper jaw yet?"
"Not yet," laughed Ben, good-naturedly. "What's that got to do with
bounty jumpers?"
"A bounty jumper," began Ethan, ignoring the question, "was a man what
jumped his bounty."
"How far did he jump? What made him jump, anyway, Ethan?" said Bob.
"He jumped straight into Canada, and then he jumped back again."
"Was he any relation to the wise man who jumped into the bramble bush?
Ever hear that story, Ethan? It's a good one. Jock knows it, and he'll
tell it to you if you want him to," said Bob.
"Tell us about the bounty jumpers," interrupted Jock, quickly.
"Well," began Ethan, slowly, "you know, they was a-offerin' a bounty
of a thousand dollars to every man who'd enlist."
"When?" interrupted Bob. "Was it during the War of 1812?"
"No. 'Twas in the secesh war, that's when it was."
"You weren't here when the War of 1812 broke out, were you, Ethan?"
inquired Bob, soberly.
Ignoring the laugh which followed, Ethan went on: "They wanted men
putty bad in the Civil War, and so they offered a thousand dollars to
every one who'd enlist. Well, lots enlisted; and then, after they'd
got their money, they'd leave the army and put straight for this
river, and git over into Canada. Then they'd cross over the border
somewhere, and enlist somewhere else, take another thousand dollars
and light out for Canada again. 'Twas a payin' job in those days; paid
better'n drivin' a horse-car down to the city. There were regular
'bounty brokers,' as they were called, to help these rascals, and
finally the government sent some provost marshals up here to look out
for these fellows, and one of the liveliest tilts happened right by
that island.
"There was a camp o' the jumpers on that island, and they had come to
be as bold as ye please. There was so many on 'em that they felt
pretty secure like, and besides, the wife o' one o' the men lived in a
little house right on the shore. She used to go to school with me an'
your pa," he added, turning to Jock as he spoke, "and he'd know her
name in a minute if I should tell ye what it was. Well, she used to
come out and wave a white cloth at the camp, and then her husband, or
some other fellow, would come ashore an' get what she cooked up for
'em.
"One of the marshals found out the trick an' he made up his mind he'd
get some o' these fellows; so one day he came down to the house, and
as he wasn't dressed up like a soldier, jest wore ordinary clothes
like yours or mine," he explained as he glanced at the boys, not one
of whom changed the expression upon his face as he was addressed, "and
so, though the woman was pretty suspicious, she didn't think he was on
the lookout. Pretty quick she went out o' the house and waved the
cloth, for she probably thought the men were gettin' hungry, and then
a boat left the camp, and when it came pretty close to the shore the
marshal, who was a-peekin' out o' the window, saw the very man he
wanted most of all--this woman's husband.
"He waited till the boat was close in, and then he rushed out and
yelled to the man to give himself up, and to strengthen his argument
pulled out a pistol. The man was scared like at first, but the woman
wasn't a mite, an' she jest yelled out, 'Don't ye do it, Bill; don't
ye do it.' At that the marshal began to make his pistol pop, an' he
fired all six o' the cartridges, an' never once touched the man or the
boat, either."
"Is every man hereabouts as good a shot as that?" drawled Bob.
"I'm thinkin' they shoot as well as they do anywhere," replied Ethan.
"Well, some o' the marshal's friends came up, an' they went into the
house to make themselves to home. They waited all night, an' a
neighbor came in an' told them the jumpers was fixin' to come ashore
and shoot every one of 'em. Jest then they heard a drum an' fife over
in the camp, and they fixed up the house to stand a siege. They
barricaded the doors and windows, and waited for deserters, an'
likewise for the mornin'.
"The mornin' came, but the jumpers didn't; an' as the camp was too
strong to be attacked, the marshal an' his friends cleared out afore
noon and left the region. But that scrape happened right over there by
that island. I could tell ye a whole lot more o' stories o' the
jumpers, but I've got to look out for this boat now, or ye'll all be
goin' down to the bottom instead of down the river."
As Ethan spoke, he quickly rose and began to give some sharp
directions to Tom. Apparently they were needed, for the boat was
moving with wonderful speed now. As the boys looked over into the
river they could see that the swiftness of the current had greatly
increased. The waters ran like those in a mill-race, and it almost
seemed as if the boat had been lifted by some unseen and mighty hand,
and thrown forward with incredible swiftness. No one, save Ethan,
spoke, and the white faces of the boys indicated that the alarm which
they thought their boatman had displayed was shared by them all.
CHAPTER XV.
IN A FOREIGN LAND.
On either side the boys could see great eddies in the stream, in which
the water whirled as if it were twisted about on some unseen axis. The
boat itself was moving swiftly, and as it was swept onward by the
current, they of course could not fully perceive the motion of the
river. The experience was a novel one, and the alarm of the boys was
but natural.
Their confidence was in a measure restored when they saw that Ethan
apparently was not frightened, and as he noticed them watching
intently a whirling eddy off to their right, he laughed and said,--
"That's a pretty good twister, isn't it, boys?"
"Yes," replied Bert. "What would happen to us if we should be caught
in it?"
"Nothin'. Nothin' at all."
As the boys looked up in surprise, he continued, "There's a mighty
sight o' difference between the eddy and the current, let me tell
you. Some folks mistake one for the other in more ways than one, I'm
thinkin'. In my paper, which comes reg'lar every Friday, I sometimes
read the most alarmin' articles. I suppose the men that write them
think they're all true enough, an' they really are afraid the country
is goin' to the dogs. When I read 'em I confess I'm a bit skeered at
times; for what with the strikes an' riots an' all sorts o' things
that happen, it does look like as if it was goin' to be a bit of a
blow; but I look out o' the window o' my house, an' I see the great
river a-hurryin' on as if it was all the while afraid it would be
late, or wouldn't get there on time. But I see more'n the current, for
I see some big eddies, too. They whirl an' boil as if there was a big
fire down below, an' when I see 'em I always think that some folks
can't tell the difference between a eddy and the stream. Then I make
up my mind that that's what's the trouble with those newspaper
fellows. They've seen a eddy and mistook it for the current: an' all
the time the great stream is a-goin' on jist as smooth and swift as ye
please. This river is a great teacher, in my opinion."
Ethan's quaint words served to quiet the fears of the boys, though
doubtless they failed to appreciate the deeper philosophy which lay
beneath them. At all events, they soon perceived that the river was
calmer now, and that the boat was not moving at the speed it had had a
few minutes before.
"That must have been one of the rapids, wasn't it, Ethan?" inquired
Jock.
"Rapids? I rather guess not. That spot's no more like the rapids than
a milk pail's like a mill-pond. No, sir! When ye strike the rapids,
ye'll know it. It's most like slidin' down hill on water."
"But how do the boats come up the river, then?" queried Ben. "They do
come up, for I see them every day. I shouldn't think they could get
through the rapids, if they're like what you say they are."
"No more they don't."
As the boys looked blankly at him, Ethan laughed and said, "They come
up the canal. Course they can't get through the rapids."
"I didn't know there was a canal," said Ben.
"Humph," grunted the boatman; but it was evident that his opinion of
their knowledge was but slight, in spite of the fact that they had
endeavored to impress him with the entrance into college they had all
gained.
"Are we going down to the rapids to-day?" inquired Bert.
"To-day? Well, I guess not," said Ethan, decidedly. "How far down the
river d'ye think them rapids be?"
"I didn't know," protested Bert, hastily. "I only asked for
information."
"We'll go down there some time, but we'll have to make a two or three
day trip of it. Even this boat o' mine, and she's no laggard, I'd have
ye understand, couldn't make it in a day. But we're goin' down there.
There's fishin' below the Longue Seaut that leaves Goose Bay and Eel
Bay and all the spots among the islands in the shade."
"What do they catch?" inquired Bob.
"Fish."
"Oh!" And Bob lapsed into silence once more.
Indeed, it was becoming more and more difficult to deal with Ethan;
and his estimate of their knowledge, or rather their lack of it, was
so apparent that they began to feel as if they were the embodiment of
the city greenhorns he had so contemptuously referred to when they had
first entered camp.
For a time there was silence on board, and the boys all gave
themselves up to the enjoyment of the hour. In the distance were the
shores, and in various places the farmers could be seen at their work.
The farmhouses, low and quaint, appeared here and there, and the
cottages, though less numerous than among the Thousand Islands, were
still much in evidence. Perched on some high bluff along the shore, or
built in groups in some grove, they continually presented a spectacle
of life far different from that which was to be seen in the towns or
cities.
To Ethan their coming was the most natural thing in the world, for
where could another such region be found as that along the borders of
the majestic St. Lawrence? The only thing against which he rebelled
was the price paid for the spot on which some cottage had been
erected, and as they passed the summer homes he frequently referred to
the amount of money which had been paid for the lots.
"That's where Tod Church lives," he explained, pointing as he spoke to
a low farmhouse on the shore, near which stood several modest
cottages.
"Is that so?" replied Bob seriously, as if the abode of Tod was a
matter of intense interest to him. "Was he in the War of 1812 too?"
"No; he wasn't. Tod's a young man. He's only fifty-nine, jest three
months younger'n I be. But Tod's got rich!"
"You don't mean it!" exclaimed the serious Bob. "How did the aforesaid
Tod acquire his wealth?"
"He didn't do nuthin', an' yet he's well off, Tod is. Some folks is
born lucky. That's all the difference there is between folks, in my
opinion. Some has luck for 'em and some has it agin 'em."
"And Tod had it with him, did he?" inquired Bob.
"He did that. His father left him well fixed, for Tod had the house
and fifty acres o' land all clear. And now he's gone an' sold some
lots up there on that bluff where he couldn't raise nothin', and he's
got two thousan' dollars in clean money for 'em. Neow if that isn't
luck, then I don't know what luck is," said Ethan, impressively. "He
jest works when he feels like it, and when he doesn't, he doesn't.
Jest takes his ease and comes an' goes when an' where he pleases, an'
doesn't ask no odds of nobody."
"Fortunate youth!" murmured Bob; and again silence came upon the
party.
For an hour more they sped on before the breeze, which still continued
strong. The sun was high in the heavens, and across the bright blue of
the sky occasional masses of silver-colored clouds passed. It was a
perfect summer day, and the deep peace which rested over all things
seemed to include the boys in its embrace. The boat was handled
perfectly by Ethan and Tom, and it must have required men made of
different material from that in our boys not to feel the keen delight
of living amidst such surroundings. The rush and roar of the city were
things impossible to be imagined, and even the grind of the closing
days in school, and the prospect of the hard work in college, were all
vague and meaningless.
"What's that place ahead, Ethan?" suddenly exclaimed Jock, sitting
erect as he spoke, and pointing to a place of considerable size to
their left.
"Brockville."
"Why don't we stop there and get dinner?"
"I've got something for ye to eat aboard the boat."
"I know that; but we'll want it all on our way back."
"It'll cost ye four shillin' apiece for your dinner if ye go to the
hotel, though I know another place where ye can get it for three
shillin'; but I'm not sure the place is bein' run now."
"Never mind the cost, Ethan," said Jock, recklessly. "We're out for a
time of it, and even such extravagance can be put up with once in a
lifetime."
"Jest as you say," replied Ethan, though it was evident that he felt
in a measure responsible for the expenditures of the lads under his
care.
The dock was soon gained, and as Ethan made his boat fast, the
light-hearted boys leaped ashore. "Come on, Ethan! Come on, Tom," said
Jock. "We'll go up to the hotel and get our dinner."
"Who? Me!" exclaimed the boatman in surprise.
"Yes, you. You and Tom too. Come on, both of you."
"No," said Ethan, shaking his head decidedly. "I ain't a-goin' to pay
no four shillin' for a dinner when I've got enough to eat aboard my
boat."
"Well, let Tom come, anyway," urged Jock, perceiving that Ethan was
not willing to accept the invitation. "We should be glad to have both
of you come, and we'll stand treat for the dinners."
Ethan was about to refuse permission for Tom to accompany the boys,
but perceiving the look of intense desire upon his son's face, and as
Jock increased his solicitations, he relented, and together the boys
started up the street.
It was nearly two hours later when they returned, and as Ethan
perceived them, he said, "I hope ye got yer money's worth, boys."
"It wasn't our fault if we didn't," laughed Jock. "Now, Ethan, we want
to look about the place a little. Will you come with us?"
"I s'pose I'd better, or ye'll git lost," replied the boatman; and
soon afterward the little party was walking about the town, which, in
its architecture and life, presented many contrasts to that with
which they were more familiar.
When they approached the public buildings, Ethan related the story of
the rescue which a party of American soldiers had made there in the
War of 1812. It seemed that a considerable body of prisoners had been
secured by the British, and confined in the jail at Brockville, or
Elizabethtown, as the place was known in the earlier days. Their
friends on the other side of the river had assembled for their rescue,
and crossed the ice one dark night and fell upon the guard, and at
last secured the release of their fellows. Ethan told the story with
many quaint additions of his own, and we may be sure his young friends
were deeply interested.
"This _is_ a great country," said Ben, when Ethan ceased. "It's
historic ground from one end of the river to the other."
"I s'pose so," remarked Ethan, quietly, "though I don't take much
interest in such things. Folks is queer. They call it hist'ry when a
lot o' men git up with guns and shoot at one another; but when they
are peaceable like, and just 'tend to their farms an' mind their own
business, then it isn't any hist'ry at all. I've seen a crowd gather
in a minit up at the bay or Clayton around a man what's drunk, but
when a man is sober and decent they don't pay no 'tention to him at
all. It seems to me this 'hist'ry' you're talkin' about is a good deal
like that."
"Perhaps it is," admitted Ben. "I hadn't thought of it before."
On their way back to the boat Ethan stopped to make a few purchases,
and carefully stowed the packages on board when they set sail.
"We'll go a bit farther down the river," he said, as he headed the
boat down the stream. "We've time enough."
"Ethan, what have you got in those bundles?" inquired Ben.
"Some things my wife wanted me to git. Can buy 'em cheaper over here."
"But they'll cost you as much after you've paid the duty, won't they?"
"Duty? Duty? Who's a-goin' to pay any duty, I'd like to know?" replied
Ethan, sharply.
"Why, I thought everybody had to pay that when they bought things in
Canada."
"Well, I'm not goin' to. I'd like to know why I can't buy things in
Brockville if I take a notion, 'specially when they're cheaper."
"But I thought everybody up here believed in a high tariff, and voted
for it."
"So they do. We ain't a-goin' to have them come over into our country
and compete with us! Not much!"
"How can you buy over there and not pay duty, then?"
"Hey? What's that ye say? Ye act as if ye thought I'd been stealin'.
Most everybody does it, an' I guess it's all fair enough. Did you pay
duty for that dinner ye et up to the hotel? Ye brought some things
away inside o' ye, an' I brought some outside o' me. Tell me the
difference, will ye?"
"Ben ought to have paid," laughed Bob. "When a man buys food by the
wholesale, he ought to pay duty, I'm sure."
Ethan said no more, and as the boys were not disposed to dispute the
strange ethics in which he evidently believed, the party once more
became silent.
An hour later Ethan sighted a steam-yacht coming up the river, and in
response to his hail it stopped and took the boat in tow. This made
the returning voyage easy, and added to the novelty as well; and just
before dusk the line was cast off, and the boat was headed for the
camp, where soon after the boys arrived safely.
"I'll get ye some supper now," said Ethan, as he and Tom at once began
their preparations for the evening meal.
"Good for you, Ethan!" said Ben. "All the 'p'is'n things' you had on
board have been long since exhausted."
"So I noticed. I wonder sometimes if there's anything that will fill
ye up."
"Your supper will, I'm sure."
"I'll try it, though I'm doubtful," replied the boatman, grimly.
A little later he left the tent and approached the boys, holding
something in his hands. "Somebody's been here while we've been gone,"
he said. "They've left a letter and their tickets."
Jock received the note and the "tickets," as Ethan called the visiting
cards, and tearing open the missive he read it and then said: "Mr. and
Mrs. Clarke have been here, fellows. They have left an invitation for
us. Keep still and I'll read it."
He read the letter aloud, and in a moment his friends were as
interested in the contents as he himself had been.
CHAPTER XVI.
AN ALARM IN THE CAMP.
The note extended a cordial invitation to the boys to dine at "The
Rocks" on the following day, and Mr. Clarke offered to send his yacht
to convey them to his island. The dinner was to be in the middle of
the day, in accordance with the custom of the region, and as that fact
left the afternoon practically free, all the party were eager to
accept. Perhaps it was not merely the expected pleasure of meeting Mr.
and Mrs. Clarke, or of enjoying a trip in his yacht, which was
acknowledged to be one of the most beautiful and fleet on the entire
river, which moved them; but if other inducements, not referred to in
the note of invitation, did appear, no one mentioned them.
After supper, when Ethan prepared to depart from the camp, Tom said,
"I think I'll wait a little while, pa. I'll come home in a couple of
hours."
"All right, son," responded Ethan. "I think ye'd better take one o'
the canoes when ye start, and leave the skiff with the boys. It'll be
safer like, ye see, if they take it into their heads to go out on the
river."
Ben made a wry face at the implied slight on their ability to use the
canoes, but no one spoke, and the boatman soon departed.
"I wanted you to hear me speak my piece again, if you would," said
Tom, when his father had gone. "I know I don't do it very well, and as
you have had so much better advantages than I have, I'd like to have
you help me, if you will."
Before any one could reply, Bert made a sudden dart from the camp-fire
and was speedily followed by Jock. "What's the matter with those
boys?" inquired Tom, innocently, as he glanced up at the departing
lads.
"I don't think they feel very well," replied Bob, soberly.
"They don't? Do you want me to go over to the bay and get a doctor? It
won't take an hour."
"No physician can reach the seat of their trouble," said Ben,
solemnly. "It's deeper than any human skill can go."
"You don't mean it! Perhaps I'd better wait and not ask you to hear me
speak my piece to-night."
"Oh, that won't make any difference. Ben, here, is perfectly willing
to hear you. In fact, he enjoys it; and while you are speaking, I'll
go and look up the other fellows, and see what I can do to help them."
Bob's evident desire to escape was all unnoticed by the unsuspecting
Tom, and as soon as he was left alone with Ben, he began to speak. For
a half-hour or more the camp resounded with, "Tew be or not tew
be-e-e," but no one returned to disturb the orator until the practice
had been ended.
Then, as the three lads came back, Tom said, "I'm sorry, boys, that
you don't feel well. I told Bob I'd go over to the bay for a doctor,
but he said you didn't want any."
"No physician in Alexandria Bay could prescribe for those boys when
they get an attack of self-abasement. It's a serious matter."
"There's one thing about it," said Jock, "and that is, that Bob,
here, isn't likely to catch it."
Tom, evidently, did not appreciate the point, but he nevertheless
accepted Jock's invitation to remain, and stretched himself on the
grass before the roaring camp-fire with the others.
"I was about to remark the other evening, when my irreverent friend
interrupted me," began Bob, "that Cartier came back here."
"Bob, are you going on with that yarn?" demanded Ben.
"No yarn about it. I'm going to help you fellows to see the point for
once in your lives."
"You mean you're going to try to make a point some one can see,"
retorted Ben. "Well, wake me up when you come to the point. Life's too
short to spend it in trying to understand Bob's stuff. If he ever
comes to a point, let me know;" and Ben rolled over upon the grass,
and covering his face with his hat, pretended to be sleeping.
"Go on with your Cartier," said Bert. "I don't know what we've done to
deserve all this, but if we've got to have it, then the sooner it's
done the better."
"Cartier," began Bob, giving the name a peculiar emphasis to expose
Bert's ignorance, "made a great stir when he got back to St.
Malo,--that was in September, 1534, as I said,--and the king was
tickled most of all. He immediately promised to fit out a new
expedition, and a lot of the young nobles and swells wanted to join.
Cartier was the rage, you see, and even the children cried for him;
and as for the ladies, why, even brass buttons didn't count along with
Jakie's commission as 'captain and pilot of the king.'
"About the middle of the next May everything was ready, and Cartier
and his men went up to the cathedral together, and special services
were held for them, and the bishop gave them his blessing. Having
looked after that part of it, Cartier then took his men aboard his
squadron and set sail. He had three vessels this time, though I don't
just recall the names of them."
"_La Grande Hermione_, _La Petite Hermione_, and _L'Emérillon_,"
suggested Tom, who had been listening attentively.
"Thank you," replied Bob, somewhat confused, to the evident delight of
his companions. "Those were the names. Well, they hadn't been out on
the ocean sailing very long before they were separated by the storms,
but after a rough passage they finally came together in the straits of
Belle Isle."
"At the inlet of Blanc Sablon," suggested Tom.
A laugh greeted his words; but though Tom's face flushed, he soon
perceived that he was not the cause of the merriment, and though he
could not understand Bob's momentary confusion, he, too, joined in the
good-natured laughter.
"On the last day of July they sailed to the westward and started up
the St. Lawrence. It was the first day of September when Cartier found
the mouth of the Saguenay, and the fourteenth when he came to a little
river about thirty miles from Quebec, which he named the Sainte Croix.
The next day an Indian came to see him--"
"Hold on, Bob, isn't that enough?" inquired Bert, in apparent despair.
"The Indian was an Algonquin chief with a funny name--"
"Donnacona," suggested Tom, mildly.
Again a loud laugh greeted his word, and the abashed Tom subsided.
"That's right; that's what it was," said Bob, quickly. "Thank you,
Tom. Well, Cartier had the two Indians with him whom he had taken to
France, and so he could hold a powwow with this Algonquin, but I
haven't time to tell you what they talked about."
"Oh, yes. Please tell us," pleaded Bert, in mock eagerness.
"No, I can't stop--"
"You're right. You can't tell, and you can't stop, either, till you're
run down."
"As a result of the interview, Cartier left two of his vessels there,
and, taking the _L'Emérillon_, he sailed up the river as far as Lake
St. Peter, but he found a bar there--"
"What?" exclaimed Bert, sitting suddenly erect.
"A bar. That's what I said."
"Was he looking for a bar all this time? Didn't they have any farther
down the river? I'm ashamed of Carter. I didn't believe he was that
kind of a man."
"This was a sand bar," laughed Bob, "and blocked his way, so he left
the ship's crew there--"
"The ship's screw?" interrupted Bert. "Now I know you're giving us a
fairy tale. Ships didn't have any screws then. They hadn't been
invented. Even side-wheelers weren't known then."
"I didn't say ship's screw. I said ship's crew. Can't you understand
plain English?"
"That's what I said, too, the ship's screw. Didn't I, fellows?"
appealed Bert, turning to his companions.
"There's a big difference between a ship's screw and a ship's crew."
"Perhaps you can see it, but I can't. A ship's screw is a ship's
screw, and that's all there is to it," protested Bert, solemnly.
"All right; have it your own way," said Bob. "Cartier left his behind
him, anyway, and with three of his men took a little boat and came on
up the river, and on October 2d arrived at Montreal, which he called
Mount Royal."
"What did he call it that for? Why didn't he call it what the people
there called it? I believe in calling things by their right names, I
do."
"It had an Indian name which I don't at this moment recall--"
"Ask Tom," suggested Bert.
"Hochelaga," said Tom, in response to the appeal.
"What did you say, Tom?" inquired Bert, soberly.
"Hochelaga," laughed Tom.
"Oh! Then that was the place where the bar you spoke of was, was it,
Bob? Pardon me. Pray resume your fascinating disquisition, as
improbable as it is flighty. You were about to describe your Carter
when he and his followers stopped on the bar, a course of action of
which I highly disapprove. That's one thing I like about this river,
it's all wool and a yard wide. A safe place for children and no
temptations to speak of--unless a canoe is one for Ben."
"A yard wide?" interrupted Tom. "The St. Lawrence a yard wide! Why,
it's three-quarters of a mile wide up here at Cape Vincent, where it
leaves the lake, and on the other side of Quebec it's ten and twenty
and even thirty miles wide, and at Cape Gaspé it's all of a hundred
miles wide."
Again the boys broke into a hearty laugh, in which Tom was compelled
to join, although he did not understand just what it was he was
laughing at; but the good nature of them all was so apparent that he
did not suspect that he was the cause of their enjoyment.
"Cartier stayed only three days at Montreal--" resumed Bob.
"Didn't he like the Hochelaga?" interrupted the irrepressible Bert.
"Keep still, Bert," pleaded Jock, laughingly. "I want to hear about
this."
"I would I were as this one is!" drawled Bert, pointing to Ben as he
spoke, who was now soundly sleeping and apparently doing his utmost to
emphasize the adverb as much as he did the verb.
"Cartier left after three days," began Bob once more, "and went back
to the mouth of the Sainte Croix, and there he passed the winter. And
a terrible winter it was, too. The men weren't used to such awful
cold, and they suffered from the scurvy so much that when the spring
came twenty-five of them were dead, and only a very few of the hundred
and ten who were alive were free from disease. His men had been so
reduced in numbers that Cartier decided to take only two of his
vessels back to France with him and so left the _Petite Hermione_
there."
"That's a likely story," said Bert. "Left the ship behind him?"
"Yes, that's what he did."
"It may be so, my friend, but I don't believe it."
"It is true," said Tom. "They found the old boat in the mud there in
1848,--the very ship that Cartier left more than three hundred years
before."
"Oh, of course, if _you_ say so I'll believe it," replied Bert.
"He first took possession of the land," said Bob, "by setting up a
cross bearing the arms of France and a Latin inscription, _Franciscus
primus, Dei gratia Francorum rex, regnat_."
"I've read about that inscription, but I don't know how to read
Latin," said Tom, eagerly. "What does it mean?"
"Ask Bert," suggested Bob.
"Jock'll tell you," said Bert, quickly.
"Bob knows it, and he'll tell you," protested Jock, hastily.
"Cartier stole Donnacona and nine other Indian chiefs and sailed away
for France, where he arrived about the middle of July, 1536. And
that's the end of chapter two," Bob added, as he rose from his seat.
Tom now departed for home, and as the boys began to prepare for the
night, Bob stopped for a moment before the prostrate figure of Ben,
who was still sleeping soundly on the ground before the camp-fire.
"I was never treated thusly in all my experience as a lecturer," said
Bob. "I'll fix that fellow. I'll show him he mustn't spoil my speeches
with his hilarious snorings."
Running into the tent Bob speedily returned with several short pieces
of rope, in each of which he made a slip noose. Then he carefully
adjusted one to the sleeping lad's right hand, and without disturbing
him, made the rope fast to the nearest tree. In a similar manner he
treated the other hand and then the two feet, and last of all the head
of the still unconscious Ben.
"Now, I'd like to wake him up," said Bob, regarding his work with much
satisfaction. "He won't go to sleep again when I'm lecturing, I fancy.
If he moves his right hand he'll make himself all the more secure, and
if he tries to stir his other hand or his feet he'll be still worse
off. Next time he'll see the point, I'm thinking."
The boys were soon ready for bed and still Ben slept on. The camp-fire
flickered and burned low, the long shadows ceased, and even the
waiting boys at last closed their eyes and slept.
How long they had been sleeping they did not know, but they were
suddenly awakened by a yell that startled them all. Quickly sitting
up, the boys at first could not determine what it was that had so
alarmed them.
In a moment, however, the yell was repeated, louder and longer than
before.
"It's Ben," said Bob, quickly. "I'll go out and ascertain whether he
can see the point."
As he turned to rush into the open air, he was startled by the sounds
which came from the roof of the tent in which they had been sleeping.
Something was moving about on it, and to the alarm of the boys it
sounded very much like the snarl of a wild beast. Evidently it was
something large, too, and in a moment all three darted forth from the
tent into the darkness, just as there came another yell from the
prostrate Ben, even more piercing than those which had preceded it.
CHAPTER XVII.
ON GUARD.
Bob's first impulse was to run to his prostrate friend, and with a
knife he quickly severed the cords by which Ben was bound. Angry as
Ben was, he did not speak, but instantly leaped to his feet and stood
with his companions peering eagerly at the body which could be seen
upon the roof of the tent.
The fire had burned low, but still threw out its long shafts of light,
and in the shadows the animal seemed to assume fantastic shapes. The
boys were all alarmed, and to their distorted vision the visitor was
apparently of large size, and every moment they expected to see him
spring from the tent. He had not moved since they had rushed out from
the tent, and though he uttered no sound he seemed to be crouching as
for a spring.
"It's a bear," whispered Bert.
"No, it isn't a bear; it's a panther," replied Jock, in a whisper as
tremulous as that of his friend had been.
The suggestion was in no wise reassuring, and for a few moments the
boys stood and watched their strange visitor, ready to dart into the
woods at the first sign of new danger. The animal, however, had not
stirred, and was still crouching upon the roof.
"If I only had my revolver, I'd fix him," said Ben.
"Where is it, Ben?" whispered Bob, eagerly.
"In the tent there. I say, fellows," he continued, "if you will keep
his attention off to one side I'll crawl in and get the pistol. Can't
you throw some sticks or stones at him, or poke him with a long pole?
While you're doing that, I'll creep round to the other side and get
into the tent. He won't see me if you keep him busy."
The suggestion of a pole met with no favor, but sticks and stones were
more practical, and selecting a short club as a weapon of defence in
case of an attack, the three boys drew off together a little farther
into the woods and then began to throw the missiles at the crouching
animal.
As their aim was poor they added shouts to their other "weapons," and
soon the camp was ringing with their calls, though the animal did not
move and seemed to be alike fearless of their missiles and wild cries.
Ben, meanwhile, had crept stealthily around to the farther side of the
tent, and when the uproar of his companions rose to its highest point,
darted quickly into the tent, secured his revolver and then ran out
again with a celerity which his friends might well have envied.
Possessed of his weapon he called to the boys, and as soon as they had
joined him he stepped nearer the spot and cocked his pistol. He could
still see their visitor in the same attitude and place where he had
been when first discovered. The camp-fire flickered and the trees
moaned under the night wind. The wash of the waves upon the pebbly
beach was the only other sound to be heard, unless the rapid beatings
of the hearts of the boys were audible to others besides their owners.
"Don't move, fellows," whispered Ben, as he slowly raised his revolver
and took aim.
His warning apparently was not needed, for not one of the boys moved
from his place. Each was intently watching that crouching form upon
the roof, and waiting for the report of the revolver, which should
either put an end to their suspense by killing the animal, or bring
upon themselves the rush of an angry and perhaps wounded beast.
The suspense was not ended when the first report of Ben's pistol broke
sharply in upon the stillness of the night. From all appearances they
thought the animal had not been hit, but as he showed no disposition
either to advance or retreat, Ben quickly raised his revolver again
and two shots rang out in quick succession.
"Look out, Ben, you'll hit the tent," whispered Bob, made somewhat
bolder by the continued failure of the animal to move.
Ben then fired the remaining cartridges, and to the delight of his
companions, they saw their enemy roll from his place on the tent and
fall with a thud upon the ground. There was the sound of a struggle
for a moment, and then all became still again.
The boys waited anxiously, and at last Ben said, "I hit him! I hit
him! He's dead, fellows. Go on and see what he was."
[Illustration: "Bob took a long stick and poked the motionless form."
_Page 213._]
As no one seemed to be quite willing to respond to the appeal, Ben
himself thrust a long torch or broken limb of a tree into the fire,
and then, holding in his hand the blazing branch, at the head of the
column advanced to view the fallen foe.
They approached carefully and cautiously, Ben explaining that
"panthers sometimes lived a long time after they were dead," and soon
they could see the motionless body before them. Holding the torch in
one hand and his reloaded revolver in the other, Ben stood ready to
shoot at the first returning sign of danger, while Bob took a long
stick and cautiously poked the motionless form.
His actions produced no response, and then, concluding that their
enemy was indeed dead, they came nearer and soon stood looking down
upon their victim. A closer inspection revealed the fact that it was a
much smaller animal than they had thought it to be, but none of them
had ever seen one like it before.
As Jock leaned down to touch it with his hand, he suddenly drew back
with a cry of pain, and instantly his companions darted from the
spot. As they were not pursued, their courage revived, and once more
they returned to inspect the body of the strange animal. He was dead
now, that was evident; and satisfied as to that fact, Bob declared
that he was going back to bed.
"We ought to keep a guard to-night, though," suggested Bert. "Perhaps
these animals hunt in pairs. I've heard of panthers that do."
"That's all right; we'll have a guard," replied Bob. "Ben's the one to
do it."
"Me? Well, I guess not! Say, who fixed me that way?" he suddenly
inquired, his anger evidently returning at the thought of the wrongs
he had suffered.
"Well, I did," drawled Bob, "if you really want to know."
"What did you do it for?"
"To make you see the point. When I'm lecturing on the early
discoverers of the St. Lawrence, I don't want you to go to sleep. I'm
not doing it for the fun of the thing. It's duty, pure duty; I want to
teach my benighted countrymen something about the heroes of this
region."
"Nobody asked you to," replied Ben, half laughing, though he was still
angry over his wrongs. "If I'd invited you to speak or paid for the
privilege that would have been another matter. Where did you get the
stuff, Bob? Out of an almanac or the cyclopædia?"
"Out of my head. By the way, Ben, what made you yell so when you woke
us up?"
"Yell? Well, perhaps you'd keep quiet when you opened your eyes in the
night and saw a wild beast crawling over the roof of the tent and
ready to spring upon you and devour you. Then when I tried to move I
found some one had tied me hand and foot."
"Your voice was free. Your lungs seemed to work all right," suggested
Bob.
"They might not, though, if it hadn't been just as it was. When I
tried to raise my head the string choked me, and I couldn't use my
hands to help me, either. That was a dangerous thing to do, Bob. I
don't believe in practical jokes. Why, do you know, I thought at first
I was having the nightmare; but when I saw that great beast there, I
knew I was only too much awake. No, Bob, you'll have to be the one to
stand guard to-night."
"Makes no difference to me," drawled Bob. "I'm entirely willing."
It was evident that the other boys were as willing as he, and after
Ben had given him his revolver, and all three had bestowed upon him
many cautions and much advice, he was left to himself.
Bob waited until the sounds that came from the tent indicated that all
within were asleep, and then he coolly entered, and selecting his own
blanket and pillow, returned with them to the fire.
Before spreading them upon the ground, he stopped for a moment and
seemed to be thinking intently upon some matter. The result of his
deliberations became apparent, when he placed both blanket and pillow
carefully behind one of the trees in a spot where they would not be
seen by any one in the camp. Then he returned, and, cocking the
revolver, advanced to the front of the tent.
Lifting his arm, as if he was aiming at the distant sky, he suddenly
opened his mouth and emitted some screeches that might have made an
Indian chief envious, and at the same time began to dance about and
discharge the revolver.
"Hi! Yi! Yi! Hi! Yi! Yi!" he shouted.
The din caused by his unearthly cries, punctuated by the rapid
discharge of the revolver, brought the startled inmates instantly to
the door.
"Hi! Yi! Yi! Hi! Yi! Yi!" repeated Bob, dancing about with increased
vigor, and at the same time discharging the last remaining chamber of
the revolver as he beheld his frightened comrades.
"What is it? What is it, Bob?" exclaimed Ben, breathlessly.
"Did you see anything?" added Jock, equally excited.
"See anything? No, I didn't see anything," replied Bob, slowly.
"What! You didn't see anything?" demanded Bert. "What did you make all
that racket for, then?"
"Did I make any racket?" inquired Bob, in his most innocent manner.
"Didn't you really see anything?" said Jock.
"No-o-o. I didn't see anything. But I'll tell you, fellows, I was
afraid I might. I thought it might be just as well to scare away any
prowling beast that might be near. Did I disturb any of you?" he
innocently added.
"Oh, no, you didn't disturb us," said Ben, sarcastically. "We just
came out to see if you were all safe yet."
"It's fearfully lonesome out here, fellows," drawled Bob. "Don't one
of you want to sit up with me awhile?"
"Not much we don't," replied Ben, as he darted into the tent again,
followed by the other two boys. "We'll leave you alone in your glory."
"Well, wait then till I load up again," said Bob, as he, too, entered
the tent. "Where's the cartridge box, Ben?"
"Over there on the table," replied Ben, lazily. "Help yourself," he
added, as he turned over upon his side.
Bob evidently did "help himself," for he not only filled the empty
chambers with cartridges, but he slipped the box also into his pocket.
When he returned to the fire, he spread the blanket upon the ground
once more and carefully adjusted the pillow.
"If I've got to stay on guard I might as well do it in style," he
murmured, as he stretched himself upon the blanket, and was soon
sleeping as soundly as his friends in the tent.
He did not sleep so long, however, for about once in every half hour
he rose, and taking his stand in front of the tent he repeated his war
dance, punctuating it with the sharp reports of his revolver and his
ear-splitting shrieks.
In vain the boys begged of him to permit one of them to relieve him of
the task, but Bob remained obdurate. "No, sir," he declared. "I'm
doing my duty! I'm not going to let one of those St. Lawrence panthers
into this camp to-night if I know myself. I'm going to protect you, no
matter at what cost to me."
And so there was not much sleep in the camp that night, though it was
likely that Bob enjoyed as much as any one, for between his efforts to
frighten away the "prowling panthers," he slept on his blanket before
the fire.
Perhaps the excitement of the night caused the boys to sleep somewhat
later than usual on the following morning, for Bob, who was the first
to awake, was roused by the voice of Ethan.
"What ye sleepin' out here for?" demanded the boatman in surprise.
"That you, Ethan?" drawled Bob, as he opened his eyes. "Oh, that
reminds me," he added, as he hastily leaped to his feet, and grasping
the revolver, rushed up to the front of the tent, where he repeated
his frequent performance of the night.
"What ye doin' that for?" demanded Ethan, in astonishment.
"Keeping the wild beasts away. Ethan," he added solemnly, "we've been
attacked. A fearful beast leaped on our tent in the night, and tried
desperately to tear it into pieces and get at us to devour us."
"Hey?" demanded Ethan, sharply.
"Yes. That's just what he did," repeated Bob, as the boys came out of
the tent and joined him. "But we managed to shoot him."
"Ye did, did ye? Well, where is he now? Show me yer beast."
Bob silently led the way to the spot where they had left their victim.
Ethan looked sharply for a moment at the body, and then with a snort
of contempt, said, "Pish! Nuthin' but a hedgehog!" and Tom, for the
first time our boys had heard him since their arrival at the camp,
laughed aloud.
CHAPTER XVIII.
AN UNEXPECTED RACE.
The other boys by this time had joined the group, and so crestfallen
were they all when they discovered how insignificant was their
nocturnal visitor, that Ethan quickly said,--
"A hedgehog will make a big scratching sometimes. I've known 'em when
I've been logging to git up on the shanty in the night, and from the
noise they made, I'd been willing to declare a bear was after us. It
was perfectly natural, boys, for ye to be skeered."
Breakfast provided a speedy diversion, and after securing some of the
quills of their victim they cast the body into the river, and turned
to their repast. It was decided, in view of the visit they were to
make that day at "The Rocks," that they would not venture far from
camp; but about an hour later Jock called the attention of his
companions to a spectacle on the river.
About a half-mile in front of the camp they beheld a tug moving down
the stream, dragging behind it several huge loads, which, although
they were not boats, still somehow resembled them. They rested low
upon the water, and men could be seen moving about over them.
"What's that, Ethan?" demanded Bert, as he beheld the strange
procession.
"That?" replied the boatman, pausing in his task and looking in the
direction indicated by the lad. "Them's logs."
"Logs? I don't understand. What do you mean?"
"I mean what I say. They're rafts made out o' logs. They come from up
Ottawa way. Ye see, the lumbermen cut the logs in the winter and float
'em down the stream, and a good many on 'em is sawed up over there,
but not all. They make rafts out of a part, and haul 'em down the
river to Montreal, or some other town."
"But what are those houses or huts I can see on the rafts?" persisted
Bert. "And there are people there too. Yes, I can see women and
children," he added, as he lowered the glasses he had been using.
"That's what they are," replied Ethan. "They're cabins. They have to
have a place for their women folks and children, don't they?"
"Do you mean to tell me they _live_ on board those rafts?"
"Course they do. Why not?"
"Bert!" exclaimed Ben, quickly, "I'm going to take a canoe and go out
to visit them. Want to go along?"
"Yes!" exclaimed Bert, eagerly, as he ran with Ben to the beach, where
the canoes were kept.
The other boys followed them, and warned Bert against intrusting
himself to a canoe in which Ben was to be pilot and helmsman; but both
were too eager now to heed the advice of their friends, and in a few
minutes they had launched the canoe, adjusted the mast and, spreading
the bat-wing sail, went skimming over the water in the direction of
the approaching rafts.
Whatever Bert's fears may have been, and doubtless they were many, Ben
managed to keep the canoe upright, and in a little while drew near the
slow-moving crafts. The sail was then lowered, though the canoe was
almost capsized in the attempt, and using their paddles, the boys soon
drew alongside one of the rafts and successfully clambered on board,
dragging their boat after them.
It was a strange spectacle which greeted their eyes. Two families
evidently were living on board, and the children stood and shyly
watched the arrival of their unexpected visitors. Two little huts had
been erected near the stern of the raft, and the women were then
hanging their weekly washing on the lines which had been stretched
from side to side.
One of the men now approached the boys and respectfully saluted them,
and Ben explained their purpose in coming. In response to their
request they were conducted to one of the huts, and hospitably invited
to share in the meal which was soon to be prepared.
Ben declined the invitation, but curiously observed the places in
which the people were dwelling for a time. Rude berths or bunks had
been built along the sides of the cabin, and a few rough chairs and
the various utensils which were necessary for cooking were also seen.
On the open raft a fireplace had been made, over which an iron pot
could be placed.
Altogether the scene was as novel as it was interesting, and after
remaining to talk with the men and to bestow some small coins upon the
bashful children, as the camp on Pine Tree Island had long since
disappeared from sight, they soon departed, thanking the people for
their kindness in explaining all the details to them.
The boys succeeded in embarking safely and then set sail for the
Island, where they arrived about three-quarters of an hour afterward.
Ethan and Tom had already departed for the day, and the campers were
now waiting for the arrival of Mr. Clarke's steam-yacht, which was to
convey them to his cottage.
"I'm going down there in a canoe," exclaimed Ben. "Any of you fellows
want to come along with me?"
"Nay, verily," said Jock. "You have a fancy for appearing before the
girls in your wet clothes. For my part, I don't enjoy that."
"I'll not tip you over," replied Ben. "I'm learning about all there is
to learn in handling canoes. It's as easy as--as Latin, when you once
get the notion of it."
None of the boys could be persuaded, however, and soon Ben departed
alone. He placed two paddles in the smaller of the canoes, and then
spreading his sail, departed from the camp amidst the cheers of his
friends, not one of whom expected to see him in a presentable
condition when they should arrive at "The Rocks."
Ben, however, was unmindful of their scepticism and sailed away as if
no shadow of possible ill clouded his vision. In spite of his many
mishaps he was determined to master the canoe, and no matter how many
upsettings he had, they all only strengthened him in his purpose.
It was a perfect day for his venture. A gentle breeze slightly ruffled
the surface of the river and bore the light little canoe steadily on
in its course. The water was so transparent that in places, as Ben
occasionally glanced over the side of his boat into the river, he
could see the rocks upon the bottom, and several times beheld the
hungry bass as they darted swiftly away at his approach. The sound of
a belated mowing-machine came faintly from the shore where he could
see men toiling in the fields. The reflections of the islands were so
clear and distinct that he could hardly have determined which part
was above and which below the surface as he glided past them. The bold
rocks, the deep green of the bordering trees, and the many-colored
cottages provided variety in the scene about him, and as Ben moved
onward before the gentle breeze, at times it almost seemed to him that
he was in fairy-land.
His first interruption came when a steamer approached, and not yet
ready to test his prowess too severely, he turned out of the course
far enough as he thought to place him beyond all danger; but he soon
discovered that the wash of the steamer reached far that morning, and
in a moment his frail craft was being tossed about as if it had been a
leaf in the current of the mighty stream.
However, he managed to hold his boat, and soon the troubled waters
subsided, though he could see that the motion of the waves had
extended even to the shores of a far-distant island.
At last he came within sight of "The Rocks," and beheld the girls on
the dock watching one of their number whom he could see in a canoe not
far away. The yacht could not anywhere be seen, and concluding that
it had gone to the camp for his friends, he gave all his attention to
the immediate task of landing in the presence of the girls without
capsizing.
As he approached he discovered that the beach on one side of the dock
was low, and not quite daring to run in alongside the regular
landing-place, he sent the canoe straight ashore and succeeded in his
attempt with no worse mishap than wetting his feet.
He was eagerly greeted by the girls, and as he took his stand on the
dock beside them, one of them said:--
"Have you given up appearing here as you did the first night you
came?"
"I hope so," answered Ben. "I'm going to keep at it till I have got
the better of the thing. I practise every day."
"Are you practising for the races, Mr. Dallett?" inquired one of them.
"What races?"
"Why the regular canoe races next month. Don't you know about them?"
"Tell me about them."
"They meet down here not very far away, and have a regatta every
summer. They have races with double bat-wings and single bat-wings,
and one paddle and two paddles, and I don't know what all, only it's
perfectly lovely. And the girls wear the colors; and yes, there is a
race for the ladies, too. We're urging Bessie here to go into that.
Have you ever seen her in a canoe?"
"No, I never have."
"Well, you ought to. And are you really going to enter the canoe race,
Mr. Dallett? And will you paddle or sail?"
"Yes," said Ben, forming a sudden resolution, "I'm going into the
race."
"And will you paddle or sail?"
"Paddle."
"How perfectly lovely. I say, girls, wouldn't it be fine sport for
Bessie and Mr. Dallett to have a race now? Mr. Clarke won't be back
for a little while yet with the yacht and the boys, and I think it
would be fine to have a race right here."
"Not very fine for me, I fear," replied Ben. "Miss Bessie would beat
me."
"I'd do my best, you may be sure of that," exclaimed the young lady
referred to. "Do you want to race with me, Mr. Dallett?"
"I'm afraid--"
"Oh, never mind, if you are _afraid_," said Bessie, quickly, her eyes
sparkling as she spoke. "Possibly you might tip over."
"I'll try it," said Ben, doggedly. He knew he would never hear the
last of it from his companions if he should refuse, and even the girls
would not be averse to referring to the matter.
"Get your canoe, then," said Bessie, quickly.
"What's the course to be?" inquired Ben.
He wished now that he had not consented so readily. If by any chance
he should win the race, he could see that his rival would not take her
defeat quietly; and, on the other hand, if he should be beaten by a
girl, his life in camp would not be lacking in spice. And Miss Bessie
was so confident and eager. Yes, he wished that he had not consented,
but there was no withdrawal now.
"The course will be around the island," explained Bessie. "It's about
half a mile and clear water. If you lose the race and are beaten by a
girl," she exclaimed, "I'll despise you."
"And if I win," laughed Ben, "you'll never forgive me."
"_If_ you _win_? Win if you can!" and she quickly took her place in
her canoe and began to wield her paddle in a manner that increased
Ben's misgivings still more.
He, too, was soon ready, and as the canoes came alongside in front of
the dock, one of the girls counted "One! Two! Three!" the signal
agreed upon for starting, and in an instant the race was begun.
Whatever Ben thought about racing with a girl, he speedily discovered
that it was no holiday task before him even to keep up with her canoe,
to say nothing of passing it.
Quick to take advantage of the start, she was fully three yards in
advance of him when his paddle struck the water. His long arms gave
him a decided advantage, but what his contestant lacked in reach she
seemed to supply in quickness, and her dexterity was simply
marvellous.
In his eagerness not to be outdone, Ben drove his paddle so far down
into the water, that his canoe was almost upset, and when he tried to
right it Bessie had increased her lead and called mockingly to him
that 'she could tow him around the island.' But he soon had gained
his balance, and his long sweeping strokes began to tell. Nearer and
nearer he came to the canoe in front of him, and, do what she could,
she could not increase the distance between them, and when they turned
the point and were hidden from the sight of the girls on the dock, she
was only a length in advance.
Almost together they then swept on, and when at last they turned the
other point and came in on the home stretch, they were side by side.
Suddenly their ears were saluted by calls and shouts and the shrill
whistle of the yacht which was now approaching with the boys on board.
Ben did not mean to win now, but he did want to come in even, and was
doing his utmost to hold his own.
He was paddling in a course parallel to that which Miss Bessie had
taken and about three rods distant, when suddenly he found himself in
the wash of the little steamer, and before he was aware of what had
befallen him, was struggling in the water.
Ben's disappearance was greeted with shrieks of laughter, but when
several minutes had passed and he did not come to the surface, the
laughter suddenly ceased and the onlookers were gazing into one
another's faces with consternation and fear. In a moment Jock and Bert
leaped into a skiff and with swift strokes rowed out to the place
where Ben had capsized.
CHAPTER XIX.
A MOONLIGHT SAIL.
The alarm of the boys was in nowise decreased when they were unable to
discover a trace of the missing Ben. The clear water enabled them to
look far down into the depths, but only the rocks upon the bottom of
the river could be seen. Their alarm had become consternation now, and
they glanced into each other's faces with an expression of fear, which
was increased by the shouts of the girls on the dock and the calls of
those who were still on the yacht.
As the boys changed the course of the skiff, Bert suddenly exclaimed,
"Look at that, will you? See that canoe!"
The canoe in which Ben had capsized had been left to itself and was
steadily drifting toward the shore of the island. Suddenly it was
lifted from the water, and the long form of Ben appeared as he carried
the little craft upon his shoulders, his head still remaining
concealed beneath the boat.
Not heeding the shout which greeted his welcome appearance, Ben waded
ashore, and after depositing his burden upon the bank, turned and
quietly faced his companions.
His solemn manner, his dripping clothing, and above all the relief
which all felt at his escape caused the shouts to be renewed; but Ben
slowly approached the group of girls and said, "Miss Bessie, I'm ready
to try it again. Shall we take the same course?"
"No, sir!" exclaimed that young lady. "You've frightened us almost to
death, and I'll not be responsible for your safety any more."
"But I was safe, perfectly safe," replied Ben, soberly. "I'm at home
in the water, every time."
"It's a pity you're not more at home on it, then," replied Bessie,
with a nervous little laugh. "How did you escape? Where were you?"
"Who, me? Why, I swam up under the canoe, it sheltered my delicate
face from the sun, you see, and I just pushed it ashore."
The others had landed by this time, and although the boys joined in
the laughter, Ben could see that Mr. Clarke was annoyed by the trick
he had played.
"Go up to the house," said Mr. Clarke, quietly, "and I'll get you a
change of clothing. But you ought never to play such a prank as that
again. It's altogether too serious a matter. This water is so cold
that it is very easy for a man to be taken with a cramp in it, and
sink before any aid could come to him. Don't do it again."
Ben, somewhat chagrined, made no reply, and followed Mr. Clarke to the
house. When he reappeared he found his friends seated on the broad
piazza, and they hailed his coming with shrieks of laughter, for Ben
once more had been compelled to don the garments of their host, and as
they were much too small for him, the sight he presented was ludicrous
in the extreme.
"I think, Mr. Dallett," said one of the girls, "that you ought to buy
that suit of Mr. Clarke. You don't know how becoming it is to you."
"No, I don't believe I do know," replied Ben, ruefully, glancing down
at his wrists, which protruded several inches below his sleeves. "I'm
not just sure whether I wouldn't have felt better to have stayed out
there in the river."
"A trifle too short and a shaving too lean,
But a _nice_ young man as ever was seen,"
murmured Bob.
Even Ben, and Mr. Clarke, who had now joined the group, were compelled
to join in the laugh which followed, and soon the good nature of all
was apparently restored, Ben himself adding to the fun by the
nonchalance with which he paraded in his "uniform" before the admiring
gaze of the assembly.
After dinner had been served, the group returned to the piazza and
seated themselves in the chairs, evidently at peace among themselves
and with all the world. The cottage, as has been said, was situated on
a high bluff, and from it a view could be obtained of the majestic
river for miles in either direction. The bracing air, the sparkling
water, the sight of passing yachts and of swiftly moving canoes, all
lent an additional charm to the occasion, and for two hours they
remained there, enjoying themselves as only light-hearted young people
can.
At last Mr. Clarke proposed that they should take a trip with him in
the yacht, and as they eagerly hailed the invitation, all, including
Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, were soon seated on board. There they sang songs
and told stories and commented upon the constantly changing scene of
beauty into which they moved. Darting in and out among the islands the
fleet little yacht, skilfully handled by the pilot and engineer,
daintily seemed to pick its way, as if it too shared in the delight of
the company. Beautiful cottages, palaces they seemed to the boys, were
passed, and quaint little spots, dotted by tents or rude huts, whither
some humble family had come for an outing, were frequently seen.
Fishing parties were discovered among the bays, and parties of
campers, living much as did our boys in their camp on Pine Tree
Island, were passed; and when at last the yacht turned homeward, all
were ready to declare that never before had they had so enjoyable an
afternoon.
To the proposition of the boys that they should return to their camp,
a strong objection was offered by Mrs. Clarke, who declared that they
must remain for supper; and we may be sure no great amount of urging
was required to make them yield.
"I'll take you back to camp this evening," said Mr. Clarke, when they
all resumed their seats on the piazza.
"I thought I'd go back in my canoe," suggested Ben, who was clad in
his proper garments now. "I want the practice, you see."
"No, sir!" said Mr. Clarke, sharply. "You are to go back with us. I'll
not be responsible for your safety in that shell of yours."
Ben made no reply, and soon was sharing in the enjoyment of the party.
The sun was now low in the western sky, and as its departing beams
fell across the waters it made them glow like a veritable lake of
fire. The wind had all died away, and the surface of the river was
almost like glass. A scene of greater beauty or of more indescribable
peace and calm they never before had seen.
But the laughter which came from the piazza of Mr. Clarke's cottage,
and the enjoyment of the assembly there, were not to be checked even
by the solemn stillness of the river.
"One would never think," said Mr. Clarke, when a break of a moment
came, "that this peaceful river was ever the scene of bloodshed."
"Bob, here, knows all about that," said Bert. "He puts us to sleep
every night with his stories of the early discoverers. We almost feel
as if we were on their trail."
"So you are, for it's all historic ground," replied Mr. Clarke; "but I
wasn't thinking of the discoveries just then, but rather of the
struggle along the border here in the War of 1812, and of the
pirates."
"Pirates?" exclaimed Miss Bessie, quickly. "Why, you never told us
there were any pirates here. I shall be afraid to go out in my canoe
again--unless I have Mr. Dallett along to protect me," she added.
Ignoring the laugh which followed, her father said, "Well, there were
pirates here, for you can't call them by any other name. There are
none here now, of course, but in what was poetically called 'The
Patriot War,' it wasn't the same peaceful St. Lawrence that we see."
As all appeared to be interested in his words, Mr. Clarke continued.
"This patriot war, so called, occurred along about 1837-40. It really
was an attempt to revolutionize Canada by a lot of desperadoes, or
pirates, as I call them, who were filled with hatred as bitter as it
was unreasonable against our sister country, and the worst leader of
them all was a William Johnston, or Bill Johnston, as he was more
familiarly known by his neighbors along the St. Lawrence River. He
lived near here, you see.
"In December, 1837, a band of disguised men from Canada set fire to
the steamer Caroline out near Niagara Falls, and aroused great
excitement all along the border. The next month Congress appropriated
$625,000 for the protection of the northern frontier, and called for
volunteers. On the very same day a circular was issued over here at
Watertown, signed by six prominent men, asking for money and help for
the so-called refugees from Canada. The signers professed to be
law-abiding citizens and all that, and _perhaps_ they were, though
there were serious doubts about the matter then and since.
"In most of the villages secret organizations had been formed,
known as Hunter Lodges, and they were making plans for raising money
and men to invade Canada. Indeed, they had their preparations all made
for crossing on the ice as soon as the river here was frozen over, and
falling upon Kingston.
"One night in February the arsenal at Watertown was broken into and
four hundred stands of arms were stolen by men who were thought to be
engaged in the proposed movement. Some of the things were afterward
recovered, and a reward was offered for the capture of the men.
"Matters were made worse by the fact that the arsenals at
Elizabethtown and Batavia were also broken into at about the same
time. The very next day after the affair at Watertown, men began to
arrive at Clayton, which used to be called French Creek, and it is
said that there were four thousand stands of arms there, five hundred
long pikes, and twenty barrels of cartridges; but what they lacked was
men, for, though nominally there were a good many there, there were
few if any real _men_ among them, as you can readily imagine.
"There was no discipline, and less order, and when, at last, less
than two hundred of the rascals crossed over to Wolf Island, they were
more like a mob than an army. The Kingston people were badly
frightened, though they had slight cause to be alarmed, and they sent
over a force of sixteen hundred soldiers to meet the 'invading army';
but when they arrived at the island, the 'army' had pretty much melted
away. Still the country was pretty thoroughly stirred up, and forces
were stationed at Cape Vincent, Clayton, and other places to maintain
order. Congress also took further action, and most of the people
thought the troubles were ended.
"But in the last of May, 1838, the steamer _Sir Robert Peel_ was
plundered and burned over here at Wells Island. She was a large boat,
I understand, and some hundred and sixty feet long. She started from
Brockville, and there were threats made before she set sail that she
would have trouble, but no attention was paid to them. The passengers
were all asleep when she arrived at Wells Island, and the crew were
taking on wood, when a band of men, disguised as Indians, and
rejoicing in such fictitious names as Tecumseh, Judge Lynch, Bolivar,
Captain Crocket, and I don't know what all, rushed out of the woods,
and, yelling, 'Remember the _Caroline_,' drove away the crew and
passengers, and taking the steamer out into the channel, set it on
fire.
"First they had seized the money on board and such valuables as they
could find, you may be sure.
"Of course there was a great stir then in the country. This Bill
Johnston I mentioned a little while ago was one of the leaders, and
both the Canadian governments and our own offered big rewards for him
and the other men. I believe Governor Marcy placed the reward for the
arrest of Johnston at $500 and $250 was offered for some of the
others, while some were thought to be worth only $100 each. The Earl
of Durham did better still, for he promised to give £1000 for the
conviction of any of the parties engaged in the outrage. Some of them
were arrested and tried over at Watertown, but it was almost
impossible to convict them, and the jury brought in a verdict of 'not
guilty.'"
"Was Johnston captured then?" inquired Jock.
"He was captured, but not then. He was taken later, but not until some
other stirring events had occurred, and even then it didn't do much
good. But I'll have to reserve the other parts of the story of the St.
Lawrence pirates until your next visit, for if I'm going to take you
back to camp, we must be starting."
When the boys went down to the dock they found that the girls also
were to accompany them. Ben's canoe was taken on board, and then the
party started on one of the most enjoyable experiences on the great
river--a moonlight sail among the islands.
The time passed rapidly, and when they came out into the channel near
their camp they discovered one of the great river steamers before
them. To the eager request of Miss Bessie "to take the breakers," Mr.
Clarke reluctantly consented, and the little yacht was headed for the
waves which could be seen in the wake of the steamer.
The conversation ceased as the yacht approached. Ben had taken his
seat in the bow, and the girls were huddled together amidships, half
dreading and yet eager for the exciting experience.
Nearer and nearer came the little craft, and soon it was lifted high
on the crest of the waves. Down it went into the trough of the sea and
rose again as the swell lifted it. On the third attempt, however, it
failed to respond as promptly as it had done before, and instead of
rising on the crest of the billow it struck it fairly in the midst,
and in a moment a great flood of water fell upon the yacht and swept
over its entire length.
CHAPTER XX.
THE START FOR THE RAPIDS.
There was a moment of intense excitement on the yacht and then came a
shrill scream as the brave little craft righted itself and came out
into the still waters once more. As soon as it was perceived that no
one was injured, the reaction came, and shouts of laughter succeeded
the cries of alarm.
It was speedily found that no one had entirely escaped the sweep of
the great wave, but Ben had fared worst of all. Seated high in the bow
as he had been, he had received the full force of the water and was
drenched from head to foot. Some of the others had not fared so badly,
but now that all danger was past, they were disposed to make light of
the mishap and to look at it in the light of a joke.
"The next time we'd better leave Ben at the camp," suggested Bob.
"He's a regular Jonah. If he can't fall into the river, he manages to
have the river fall on us. The only safe plan will be to leave him
out."
"I don't think you need complain," replied Ben, as he ruefully
surveyed his dripping garments. "I was a regular breakwater for you
all. I got the most of the water myself."
"We shan't complain," said Mr. Clarke, quickly. "It was a foolish
venture at best. The waves were coming too swiftly for the boat to
adjust herself. She took the first two of the breakers all right, but
before she could rise for the third it was upon us and there was no
escape."
The engineer and pilot had not spoken during the conversation, but the
broad smiles upon their faces were indicative of their quiet enjoyment
of the mishap, and soon they brought the little yacht alongside the
dock in front of the camp. The good nights were then spoken, the boys
leaped ashore, and as their visitors departed, they discharged the
little brass cannon as a parting salute. The shrill whistle of the
yacht responded, and soon the fleet boat had disappeared in the
darkness, and all was quiet in the camp on Pine Tree Island.
The days which followed were filled with their own experiences,
interesting, if not novel. Every morning Ben rose before his friends,
and when they came forth from the tent for breakfast they would
usually see him returning from the river in his canoe. His mishaps had
only served to increase his determination to succeed, and though he
was careful not to boast of his success in the presence of his
friends, nevertheless his own progress was satisfactory, to himself at
least.
Nor was he the only one to use the canoes. Sometimes with the bat-wing
sails, and at other times with only a paddle, the boys set forth from
the camp, and perhaps their lack of skill in no wise detracted from
the zest of their enjoyment.
There were trips among the islands on the excursion steamers, visits
made to Kingston, Gananoque, and various other points on the Canadian
shore, and occasionally the boys donned their evening dress and
repaired to the parlors of the hotels at Alexandria Bay. On Sunday Mr.
Clarke had stopped for them with his yacht and they had gone up to
Thousand Island Park to attend service there in the huge tabernacle.
Indeed, the days were all filled with their own interesting
experiences, and not one of the boys had found a moment of the time
dragging or uneventful.
The nearest approach to that experience had occurred when one rainy
day had come and compelled them to remain most of the time within
their tents. Bob had improved the opportunity by perusing a book which
he refused to let his companions examine, and thereby greatly
increased their curiosity as to its contents; but he had declared they
would know what he was doing in due time, and must rest content until
he should be willing to explain it all.
A decided break in the camp life came one day when Ethan said: "I've
been makin' arrangements for you boys to go down the Longue Seaut. I
shan't go with ye; but you won't need me, for I've got word from two
o' the boatmen down there, and they can do more for ye than I could,
'cause they know every foot o' the ground."
"Down the Longue Seaut?" exclaimed Jock. "I'd like to go, but I don't
know what my father would say to it. I promised him when we came away
we wouldn't take any chances."
"I wrote him," replied Ethan, quietly, "an' he says it's all right."
"Right it is, then," exclaimed Jock, delightedly. "I've been through
the rapids there on a steamer when I went to Montreal, and it's a
great experience, I can tell you, fellows. The water is tossing and
boiling all around you, and the boat just shuts off all steam and lets
her go it. You feel the boat go bump! bump! and all the time it seems
as if the water was just dropping out from under you all. Do we really
go through the rapids in skiffs, Ethan?"
"Yes, that's jest what ye do, only ye take what they call the Little
Seaut instead o' the Big Seaut. All the difference the' is, is that
one is on one side o' the island an' the other the other. An' the
Little Seaut isn't quite so big as the Big Seaut, though there isn't a
sight o' difference between them."
"You think it will be safe for us, do you?" inquired Bob, quietly.
"Safe? Yes, or I wouldn't let ye go. 'Twouldn't be safe for ye to try
it alone, but in the hands o' the men I'm goin' to trust ye to, ye'll
be all right enough. An' ye'll find some fishin' there what is
fishin', I'm tellin' ye."
"I'm sorry you and Tom are not to go," said Jock.
"So be I; but I've got some work to do on my place, an' Tom here is
goin' to practise his Hamlick. They're to have the show next week,
ain't they, Tom?"
"Yes," replied Tom. "I'd like to go with you, boys, but I can't this
trip. Perhaps you'll get a muscallonge or a sturgeon, and that will
pay you well."
"Yes," said Ethan, "it's 'bout time for muscallonge to begin to run.
If ye git one o' them fellows, you'll never forget it all yer born
days. They're fish what is fish! An', besides, everything isn't fished
out down there. Up here the lines is so thick that it's like runnin'
through the meshes of a seine for a sizable fish to get up the river."
The interest of the boys was keen enough now to satisfy even the old
boatman, and in response to Jock's request he explained the plans he
had made for them.
"Now yer best way will be to take the steamboat down to Ogdensburgh
to-morrow mornin', and there ye change to a little boat that'll take
ye down to Masseny, or rather it'll take you to the Landin'. Then ye
can drive over to the Springs [Massena Springs, Ethan meant] an'
there's some big taverns there. City folks come up to drink the water,
though for my part I'd about as soon drink dish-water or pisin' tea."
"Do they have 'pi's 'n things' there too?" inquired Bert, soberly.
"You'll find eout all 'bout that," responded Ethan. "Then the next
mornin', afore it's fairly light, ye'll have to be drove back to the
river,--it isn't more'n three or four mile,--an' yer boatman will be
there by the Landin', all ready and waitin' for ye. Then they'll take
ye in their boats down through the rapids, and send the team along the
shore, so't ye can ride back; an' they'll have a rig to bring back the
boats too."
"Why don't they sail or row back?" inquired Ben.
"Why don't they row back? Well, I guess ye won't be askin' no sech
question as that after ye git there. Ye'll know more'n ye do now. Oh,
there's another thing," he added; "ye don't want to take yer
fish-poles along."
"Why not?" inquired Jock, quickly. "I thought you said there was fine
fishing there. I should think we'd want to take our rods with us."
"No, ye don't want yer _rods_," said Ethan, sharply. "Ye might jist as
well have pipestems as them poles o' yours. They'll have all the
rods ye want. I've got that all fixed for ye."
Ethan soon afterward departed from the camp, and left the boys to
themselves. For a time they talked over the exciting prospect, and at
last Bob said: "It grieves me, fellows, to see you wasting your time
like this. Now I feel it my duty to enlighten you as to the third
expedition which Cartier made--"
But Bob got no further. With a shout his companions rose from the
ground, and ran swiftly to the tent, where they at once prepared to
retire. Bob soon followed, first piling the logs high upon the
camp-fire, and then he too forgot all about Cartier's third voyage of
exploration.
The camp was astir early on the following morning, and as the boys
were to go to Alexandria Bay to take a steamer at an hour which was
early even for the early-rising Ethan, they hastily ate the
breakfast of "pi's 'n things" which the boatman had prepared before
his departure on the preceding night.
As soon as this had been eaten they closed the tents, which Ethan and
Tom had promised to visit daily in the absence of the boys, and ran
down to the dock, where the skiff was in readiness.
"That's too big a load," said Ben, as he stopped before the boat in
which his companions were already seated. "I'll not go in that craft."
"Oh, come on, Ben!" shouted Bert. "You won't have to do any of the
rowing."
"I'm not afraid of that."
"Well, what are you afraid of, then? Come along."
"I'm afraid of you. I'll go over to the bay in my 'light canoe.'"
As he still refused to listen to the boys, Jock said: "Let him come in
the canoe, fellows. He'd only tip us over if we took him in the
skiff."
"I'm learning to paddle my own canoe," called Ben, as his friends
started. "I'm like the little busy bee, which improves each shining
hour--"
"Come on, Ben," called Bob. "You'll be late, and we'll lose the
steamer."
Ben smiled as he took his place in the canoe, and, grasping his
paddle, sent his craft swiftly over the water. Soon he had overtaken
his companions, and despite the efforts of Jock, who was rowing, to
keep up with him, speedily passed the skiff, and arrived at the bay
long before they did. The boys discovered him seated on the edge of
the dock, swinging his long legs over the water, and gazing with an
air of abstraction about him.
"Why, hello, fellows! Where'd you come from?" he exclaimed, as the
skiff approached.
"That's what you've been doing mornings, when you were up so long
before us, was it?" said Jock, as the boys landed. "I must say you
have improved, Ben, in your 'canoemanship.' What are you thinking of?"
Whatever the thoughts in Ben's mind may have been he did not give them
utterance, and after the boys had left the boat in charge of a man at
the bay, they all returned and joined him on the dock.
It was not long afterward when the steamer arrived, and they were
received on board. Taking their seats together on the deck beneath
the canopy, they gazed with interest about them as the boat passed
down the river. The camps and cottages were stirring now, and again
our boys felt the exhilaration of a ride in the early morning on the
great river. When they approached "The Rocks" they could see the
people on the piazza, and waved their handkerchiefs as a morning
salute. A returning salute was given, but whether they had been
recognized or not they could not determine.
The ride to Ogdensburgh was enjoyed all the way, and when they arrived
there they had their dinner, and soon after embarked on the little
steamer which was to carry them to Massena.
The increasing novelty of the scene kept them interested in spite of
the time which had been consumed since they had departed from their
camp. The current was much swifter, they perceived, as they went down
the river. In places it seemed to rush with a speed that made the
efforts of the little boat almost useless. There were great whirling
eddies, too; and as the boys gazed at them they were wondering what
the Longue Seaut Rapids must be if the place where they were was
thought to be comparatively smooth and safe.
Late in the afternoon they arrived at the "Landing," and although they
discovered there that they might have made plans different from those
which Ethan had made for them, they were not inclined to complain when
they were seated in the wagon which was to convey them to Massena
Springs.
The road led through a prosperous farming country, and though
evidently it was somewhat new, as far as the abode of the people who
dwelt there was concerned, it still left upon the boys the impression
of great age. Occasionally, in the distance behind them, they could
obtain glimpses of the mighty St. Lawrence rushing onward as if
already it had heard the call of the rapids. Dairy farms, orchards,
cheese factories, and various other interesting sights were passed,
all of interest to the eager lads. There was almost no time for them
to tire, for a ride of a few miles brought them into the little
village of Massena.
Then up the long street they rode to Massena Springs, distant about a
mile from the main village, and there their driver stopped before a
modest brick hotel.
This, then, must be the "tavern" of which Ethan had spoken; and glad
to have arrived at the end of their journey, the boys leaped out, and
at once entered the building.
CHAPTER XXI.
SHOOTING THE LONGUE SEAUT.
That evening the boys visited the "Springs" proper, and drank of the
waters which were supposed to be of a quality to restore all wasted
faculties of mind and body. The taste, however, was anything but
agreeable to the lads, which was explained to them by the fact that
none of their vital forces had been wasted, and, therefore, there was
no craving for that which would supply their deficiencies.
They were interested in the stories which were told them of the good
old times before the introduction of railroads and similar modern
contrivances, when people from far and near used to journey to the
springs in pursuit of restored youth and strength, stories which
"reminded" Bob of the efforts of the early discoverers to find the
fountain of youth in the far-off land of Florida.
He was compelled to postpone his lecture, however, for the boys
decided to retire at once, and soon all four were sleeping soundly in
the "tavern" which Ethan had recommended.
Only the gray of the dawn had appeared when they were summoned in the
morning, and hastily dressing, they made their way to the dining room,
where an early breakfast was served them. Their carriage was in
waiting for them even at that early hour, and soon they were riding
back to the Landing, where boats and boatmen were to be ready for
them, if Ethan's plans were fulfilled.
The driver explained to them on their way that the day was not to be a
very good one for fishing, for it gave promise of being bright and
intensely warm. The latter prophecy was the more difficult to believe,
for the boys felt the chill of the early morning, although each had
brought an overcoat for protection.
The impression of the great age of the region seemed to be stronger in
the early hours even than it had been in the preceding evening. The
stillness was almost oppressive. Anything like the bustle and stir of
the great city was almost like the memory of a dream. Here, at least,
were peace and quiet, and even the problems of life itself were all
remote and vague. As they drew nearer the river, from some of the
farmhouses the occupants came forth and stopped for a moment to gaze
at the passing carriage, and then turned to the barnyards where the
cattle were waiting to be milked. Men and women, boys and girls, all
came forth to engage in this occupation, and all alike seemed to have
been there for years, and to belong to the very antiquity of the
region.
Keenly as the boys were enjoying the ride, they all seemed to be
disinclined to talk, and the first break in the silence came when the
flash of the great river was perceived beyond the distant trees. Soon
they came to a spot from which the swiftly moving waters could be more
clearly seen, and then their driver turned into the road which ran
along the bank, and the river was all the time within sight.
It was a marvellously impressive scene. The glory of the coming day
was almost upon them. The fertile farm-lands, the thriving farmers,
the cattle huddled together near the barns, or already trailing off
for the distant pastures, driven, perhaps, by some barefooted boy; the
evidences of life and civilization on all sides, were supplemented by
the swiftly moving waters of the mighty river from which they were
seldom able to remove their gaze.
It was not long afterward when they arrived at the Landing, and all
other thoughts were forgotten in the eagerness with which they looked
before them to discover some trace of their boatmen.
These were speedily found, and as they declared that all things were
in readiness for the expedition of the day, our boys were soon on
board the skiffs, which were as beautiful and shapely as those they
had seen and used among the Thousand Islands.
Jock and Bob were assigned to one skiff, in which their boatman,
George, was waiting. He was a young man of quiet manners, and his
companions at once had a feeling of implicit confidence in him as he
quietly greeted them. Ben and Bert were in the other skiff, and with
their boatman, a much older man than George, were the first to leave
the dock, and soon had disappeared from the sight of their friends as
they moved swiftly down the river.
Jock and Bob soon followed, and as George rowed out with the current,
he said, quietly, "You might as well put out your lines, boys. You
never can tell what'll happen."
He rested a moment upon his oars, and after baiting the hooks with
frogs, cast the lines into the water and, taking up his oars, again
held the boat closer to the shore, and prevented it from moving too
fast in the swift current.
The rods, as Ethan had foretold, were very different from those which
the boys had previously used. They were short, stout hickory poles,
and the reels were several times as large as the ones to which they
had been accustomed. Indeed, they seemed like small wheels, four or
five inches in diameter; but as Jock settled back into his chair in
the stern and began to pay out his line, he could see that Bob, whose
chair was on the other side of the boatman, was as content as he, and
no questions were asked.
For a time the boys gave themselves up to the enjoyment of the
morning, after George had declared that they had enough line out. The
sun was now to be seen above the eastern horizon, and was flooding
the earth with its glory. Birds were singing in the bushes on the
shore, the sparkling waters were rushing on with unabated speed, and
the beautiful skiff seemed to be a part of the scene itself, and
almost to belong to the river. George was watching the lines of the
boys, though they themselves were unmindful of them, as the boat was
carried forward by the stream.
Suddenly Jock felt a gentle tug at his line and turned sharply about.
The pull was not repeated, but as he glanced at George questioningly,
the boatman nodded his head and Jock began to reel in his line. He
soon discovered that something was pulling sturdily back, but he
reeled steadily, and as he glanced down into the water, he could see a
fish fast to his hook.
"Pike," said George, quietly. "Reel him in. Be careful! Don't give him
any slack. There! That's the way," he added, as with a quick movement
of his gaff he drew the struggling fish on board.
"He's a beauty!" exclaimed Jock, delightedly. "What'll he weigh,
George?"
"Oh, four or five pounds, perhaps. You'll see some bigger ones than
that if we have any luck to-day. 'Tisn't a very good day for fishing,
though."
He resumed his labors with the oars, but both boys were alert now, and
were waiting for the welcome tug which would indicate that the longed
for strike had been made.
Bob was the next to reel in his line, and to his delight he discovered
that he too had a pike, though not so large as that of his friend.
Several fish were caught by each of the boys as they went down the
stream, and for the time the thoughts of the rapids were forgotten in
the excitement of the present occupation.
"This fishing doesn't amount to much," said George, quietly, as he
removed Jock's latest catch. "When we get below the rapids yonder
we'll be more likely to find 'em."
At his words the boys glanced up, and the sight before them almost
drove the color from their faces. Far in advance they could see the
tossing waters of the Longue Seaut Rapids. A whirling mass of water
seemed to stretch away in the distance as far as they could see. The
waves tossed and rose and fell, and the air was filled with clouds of
spray. The rocks along the shore were at times almost hidden from
sight as the mad river dashed against them. A roaring sound seemed to
fill the air, and already the boat appeared to feel the quickened
movement of the river, for all about them the St. Lawrence was moving
forward, swift and silent, as if it, too, had drawn in its breath for
that fearful plunge into the tossing, heaving, boiling, boisterous
mass before it.
Not far in advance they could see a great island, which seemed to
present a point to the advancing river. At all events the waters
divided there, and along each side went rushing on to the calmer
regions below.
"Whew!" said Jock, drawing a long breath. "Then that's the Longue
Seaut, is it?"
"Yes," replied George, quietly, as if the awe-inspiring sight produced
no impression upon him.
"You don't mean to say we're going through that in this skiff?"
inquired Bob.
"Yes."
"Is it safe? Can you make it?"
"Yes."
"We go to the right of the island, don't we?" said Jock, in a low
voice.
"Yes."
"This side is what they call the Little Seaut, isn't it?" he inquired.
"Yes."
The boys glanced nervously again at the seething waters in the
distance. The fact that they were to go through the "Little" Seaut,
instead of the Big, did not seem to afford any great amount of
comfort; but neither spoke, and their boatman, they had already
discovered, was very different from Ethan, and not inclined to
conversation of any kind.
"You'd better reel in your lines, boys," said George, quietly.
"I thought you said this was where the fish were," said Jock,
nevertheless beginning to reel in as the boatman directed.
"No. Down below the rapids. The fish work up into the bays and lie
there for what they want to come down the stream, and then they dart
out and get it. I'm going to land here for a moment."
He sent the boat ashore, and the boys eagerly watched him as he took a
light pole and went out to one of the projecting rocks. There he
fished for a few minutes, and after he had secured a half-dozen
good-sized "chubs," he returned to the place on the shore where the
boys were waiting for him and said,--
[Illustration: "On and on moved the swift-flying skiff."--_Page 269._]
"Get aboard, now. We'll shoot the rapids, though I haven't as many of
the chubs as I wish I had. It's too bright and warm a day."
Both boys could testify to the latter fact, as they resumed their
seats on board, Their faces were streaming with perspiration, though
as a matter of fact the warm rays of the sun had little to do with
that. They could not remove their gaze from that terror-inspiring
scene, and as George drew back his sleeves and grasped his oars, they,
too, unconsciously grasped the sides of the boat as if they were
seeking for some protection.
No one spoke now, and soon the little skiff was caught in the current
and began to dart forward with ever-increasing speed. George's face
was set and hard, and he, too, occasionally glanced behind him as if
he was striving to get his bearings.
On and on moved the swift-flying skiff, and then, almost before the
boys were aware of it, they were caught in the foaming rapids and
swept forward with incredible speed. The boatman was not rowing now,
only striving, with an occasional use of one oar, to keep the bow of
the skiff pointed straight down the river.
A moment later and they were in the midst of the roar, and the swiftly
moving skiff increased its speed. Jock was aware of Bob's white
countenance, and somehow felt rather than saw that the trees and rocks
along the shore were rushing rapidly past them. He had no thought of
time. He was too excited even to feel afraid. The boat was darting
madly forward, and almost before he was aware of it they had gained
the foot of the island, and there he discovered that the two parts of
the rapids came together and the loud roaring became deeper and
stronger.
Out into the united channel the frail skiff was swept, and then the
current bore them with the speed of a race-horse straight across the
river, till it seemed as if nothing could save them from being dashed
upon the rocks that lined the opposite shore.
George had not spoken since they had entered the rapids, and, indeed,
the roar of the rushing waters would probably have drowned the sound
of his voice had he tried to speak aloud to his companions. He was,
however, constantly alert, and with an occasional quick strong pull
upon one of his oars, kept the boat headed aright.
Just before the skiff came to the shore, and it seemed as if nothing
could save them, there was a sharp turn in the current. Instantly
George drove one oar deep into the water, and putting forth all his
strength, brought the skiff aright, and then it dashed forward down
the stream.
There was a grating sound as the boat touched a rock that came close
up to the surface, but as the boys, with still paler faces, glanced
over the sides to look at the bottom, they were swept onward, and in a
moment the peril was passed.
Soon the waters were calmer, and though running swiftly, were not so
boisterous, and the tossing waves were all behind them. As Jock
glanced back it seemed to him that they had come down a hill of water;
but before him the river apparently had resumed its peaceful aspect,
and the danger had been passed.
"That was a close call," said Jock, with a sigh of relief. "When we
struck that rock I thought we were done for. Weren't you frightened,
George?"
"No."
"But what would have happened if it had made a hole in the boat?"
"We'd have sunk."
"We could have swum with the current, I think," said Bob.
"No, you couldn't," said George. "You'd have been sucked under in a
minute."
"Whew!" whistled Bob. "I'm glad we've been through the Longue Seaut,
but I don't believe I care to do it again."
"Where are the other boys?" inquired Jock, quickly. "They were ahead
of us. You don't suppose they've had any accident, do you, George?"
"No; they're down in that bay you can see ahead of us."
"Is that where we're going?"
"No, we'll stop here," replied George. "If we don't have any luck,
then we'll go on down where they are. That's the best place along the
river."
George turned the skiff, and with a few short, powerful strokes, sent
the boat into the quiet waters. Almost as if a line had been drawn,
across which no waters could pass, the quiet place in the river was
separated from the rushing current. It seemed strange and almost
unnatural, but the dividing line was plainly to be discerned, and,
besides, the skiff was as motionless as if it had been resting on a
sheltered pond.
To make them still more secure, however, George dropped the anchor
overboard, and then baiting the hooks with the large chubs, threw them
into the water close to the dividing line, and resuming his seat,
waited to test the "luck" which was to be had in still-fishing in this
sheltered spot.
CHAPTER XXII.
THE RIVALS.
For a time the boys were busy in the occupation which followed.
Evidently they had arrived at the right time, and when a half hour had
passed, a number of bass and pickerel had been added to the collection
already stored in the fish box. After that there was a lull in the
sport, and they were more occupied in watching the hurrying waters
only a few yards away, than in their own immediate task.
George, meanwhile, had taken one of the dead chubs and, placing it on
a hook, dropped the line into the water, and though he had no rod, he
"played" his bait so well that in a few minutes he felt a savage tug,
and quickly yanked his line on board, though he failed to land his
trophy.
"They're savage this morning," he remarked, as he looked at his hook,
on which the head of the chub was still fast, having been cut from the
body as if by a knife.
"Did a fish do that?" inquired Jock, eagerly, as he gazed curiously at
George's hook.
"That's what he did. I've known 'em to do worse things than that.
Hello," he suddenly added, "the other boy's got something."
Bob, who was too much engaged to heed his new appellation of "the
other boy," certainly did "have" something. His rod was drawn beneath
the surface, and when he strove to lift it, it seemed to be fast to
the bottom.
He was speedily undeceived, however, for his line began to cut swiftly
through the water, and he rose from his seat in his eagerness. The
others were as deeply interested as he, and it was evident that Bob's
strike was of no ordinary character. George grasped one oar and
brought the boat about, carefully avoiding the current and at the same
time favoring the movements of the excited young fisherman.
"He must have a monster!" said Jock, eagerly.
"It's a big one, and no mistake," replied George. "Now, be careful
with your slack. There, that's right," he added, as Bob once more
permitted the struggling fish to run with the line.
But Bob was wary now, and had had sufficient experience to enable him
to play his victim well. The struggle continued for several minutes,
and at last, with a quick, deft swing of his rod, he brought the
wearied fish alongside the boat, and George speedily had it on board
with a thrust of his ever-ready gaff-hook.
Both boys were excited as they viewed the prize, and Jock exclaimed,--
"It's a pike, isn't it, George?"
"Yes."
"How much will it weigh?"
"Oh, twelve or thirteen pound. Look there, will you!" he added, as he
drew from the mouth of the pike, which had been despatched with a blow
from the hickory club, a part of the body of a large chub. "He's the
fellow who cut my bait in two."
"What savage fellows they are!" said Jock, as he examined the bait
which George had thrown upon the bottom of the boat.
"They are that," replied George. "All these fish are regular tigers,
and the bass are about the worst of all. Still, they'll take good
care of their own young ones. I've seen the bass form a regular patrol
in front of some little bay or creek where the little fellows are, and
woe be to the fish that dares to come anywhere near them! We'll try it
some more," he added, as he placed a fresh bait upon Bob's hook and
threw it into the water.
But with the capture of the huge pike success seemed to have departed,
and at last George drew up his anchor, and after bidding the boys to
let out their lines, grasped his oars, and sent the boat out into the
swiftly running current once more.
Again they were borne down the stream with almost incredible
swiftness, and soon approached the bay where George had declared they
would find their friends. And there they discovered them, trolling
back and forth in the sheltered spot.
Their approach was greeted with a hail, and they could see Ben seated
in the stern of the boat, even then reeling in a fish. As his friends
came nearer he held aloft the prize he had taken, and shouted,--
"What luck, fellows?"
"Great!" responded Jock. "What have you had? How many have you got?"
"We've sixty or seventy pounds," replied Ben, as he resumed his seat.
"What does he mean by that?" inquired Jock, turning to George as he
spoke.
"Oh, everybody down here measures a catch by its weight. They don't
count their fish; they weigh 'em, or guess at the weight."
"How much have we got?"
"We haven't over fifty pound. Hold up that pike, and ask 'em whether
they've got anything to match that."
Jock held aloft Bob's prize, and called proudly, "Have you anything to
match that? Isn't that a beauty?"
"That's pretty good," replied Ben, "but we've one that can go you one
better;" and as he spoke he, too, held up a pike which certainly was
no smaller than the one in Jock's hands, and might be even larger.
"Dum it!" muttered George, as he began to row again.
"What's the trouble, George?" inquired Bob.
"I don't want to go back and have it said that Hank McBride had a
bigger catch than I did. I wish we could get a muscallonge."
"Isn't it early for them to run?" said Jock. "I thought they came
later."
"'Tis a bit early, but then we might strike one. I'd like to have you
get the first of the season, for I haven't heard of one being caught
yet. There always has to be a first, though, and if we could get it,
it would make Hank green with envy. He thinks he's the boss boatman on
the river."
"You don't wish so any more than we do," replied Jock, eagerly. "I'd
be willing to give a silver dollar for one."
"Hush!" said George, quickly.
"What's wrong?" inquired Jock, innocently.
"Don't let them hear anything about money. If we should happen to get
a muscallonge and they should hear you say anything about money, Hank
would declare we'd bought it. It's the way he always does."
The conversation suddenly ceased, for Jock had felt the welcome tug at
his line, and all his attention was required to land his fish. When it
was thrown into the boat it proved to be a pike of fair size; but
George was keenly disappointed, as it was evident now that he longed
for larger game, both to satisfy his own desires and to show the
envious Hank that he owned no monopoly of the fish of the St.
Lawrence.
The rivalry between the boatmen was a new and novel feature of the
sport, and Jock and Bob soon found themselves sympathizing with their
own boatman. They were almost as eager as he to add to their catch,
and every strike was hailed with a fresh delight.
The sun was now high in the heavens, and, sheltered as the boats were
from every breeze, the boys were soon sweltering in the heat. To add
to their discomfort the fish almost ceased to bite, and when another
hour had passed and not a further prize had been secured by either
party, George rowed his skiff in toward the other boat and hailed his
rival.
"Hank, isn't it about quitting-time?" "Yes," responded Hank, as
tersely as George had spoken.
"Where shall we have our dinner? Isn't Barnhart's about as good a
place as any?" "Barnhart's all right," responded the other boatman.
"You go over and start a fire, and we'll join you in a few minutes."
"Keep your lines out, boys," said George to his companions. "You
probably won't get anything, but you might as well be ready if a
muscallonge does come along and takes a fancy to your bait."
With lusty strokes he turned the skiff about, and once more rowed out
into the swift current. Then down the stream they darted, but the
novelty was mostly gone now, and besides, both boys were ready for the
dinner to which George had referred.
After the skiff had gone with the current for a half mile or more, its
course was changed and, passing through the stiller waters, was sent
ashore at a beautiful place on Barnhart's Island.
As the boys leaped out they perceived that the spot selected by their
boatman was in the midst of a grove of maple trees, a "sugar bush,"
George called it, and the cool shade was so inviting that both threw
themselves upon the grass, glad of the opportunity to stretch
themselves once more.
"If you boys want to help you might be getting some wood together,"
suggested George. "If you're hungry it will hurry up things a bit."
Both boys quickly responded to the invitation, and soon had a
considerable pile of broken branches and driftwood collected in the
spot indicated by their boatman.
"It's just like Hank McBride to leave me to do all the work and then
come in when everything's ready," growled George, as he placed a small
iron pot over the wood and started a fire.
"What do you do it for, then?" inquired Bob, lazily.
"Hey? Oh, I have to. Hank's been here longer'n I have, and what he
says most generally has to be done."
Neither of the boys continued the discussion, however, for just then
they discovered Hank approaching with their friends. In a moment his
boat was grounded, and before any one could leap ashore, Jock and Bob
ran hastily toward them.
"What did you get? Where's your catch?" inquired Jock, eagerly.
When the fish box was opened before them they could instantly see that
the catch was greater than their own; but they made no comments, and
returned with their friends to view their own fish.
"They aren't all there," declared George, who now joined them for a
moment. "I'm cleaning some for dinner, and, besides, we didn't save
the little fellows. They'd add to the weight, of course; but it didn't
seem fair to keep 'em just for that. My plan is to throw 'em back and
let 'em grow up."
Hank smiled, and, looking for a moment at the catch, said, "Pooty
fair! Pooty good! Ye did real well, George, for a beginner."
George smiled disdainfully, but the threatened rupture was averted by
the necessity of both boatmen joining in the preparations for dinner.
It was soon discovered that the intense heat had curdled the milk,
which had been brought in glass jars, and that no coffee could be
made, but all seemed to consider that a light matter when at last they
were summoned by the boatmen.
The dinner was not unlike that which Ethan had prepared at Goose Bay,
and the appetites of the boys were so keen that they declared it was a
repast fit for a king; and indeed it was. The successful sport of the
morning provided an added zest, if such an addition was necessary, and
as they ate their dinner, seated as they were in the grateful shade of
the majestic maples, it seemed to them all that never had they enjoyed
anything more. Before them was the great river, its waters still
rushing forward from the force of the fall at the Longue Seaut
Rapids. In the distance on the island they could see barns and
farmhouses, and over all was the peace of the perfect summer day.
"I suppose this is historic ground, too," suggested Jock, as he helped
himself to a fourth ear of corn.
"I s'pose so," replied Hank. "'Long in 1812 they had considerable many
fracases here. Leastwise that's what my grandfather used to say to
me."
"Where was the biggest fight?" said Jock, quickly, suspecting that Bob
was about to make inquiries of his own, and desiring to forestall him.
"'Twas back by Chrysler's Farm; that's on the Canadian side of the
river, across from Ogdensburgh. General Wilkinson had command o' our
forces, but he wasn't much good. Indeed, from what my grandfather used
to tell me I should think the American officers spent more time
fightin' among themselves than they did in fightin' the redcoats.
Neither side could lay claim to vict'ry in the battle o' Chrysler's
Farm, but our men acted so that they left everything open to the
British hereabouts, an' you never saw a Englishman yet who was slow
to use any chance that opened. An' they didn't hereabouts, I'm tellin'
you. They were all riled up over our trip to Toronto, and paid off old
scores. I believe the expedition, which was bound for Montreal, was
given up by Wilkinson after the fight back here. He wasn't much good,
though they whitewashed him in their investigations afterward. But if
we're goin' to do any more fishin' we'll have to be startin'. I say,
George," he added generously, "I don't s'pose you know the grounds as
well as I do. If ye want to, you can come along with us."
"No, I'm going somewhere else," responded George, quietly, as he rose
to assist Hank in clearing the table.
When at last our boys resumed their places in the skiff, George
whispered to them, "I'm after a muscallonge this time. We'll show Hank
yet."
His confidence increased the enthusiasm of Jock and Bob, and when,
after going with the current for a mile or more, George rowed into a
broad bay, they were more than ready for the attempt to secure the
great fish of the St. Lawrence.
CHAPTER XXIII.
A PRIZE.
No great measure of success attended the efforts of the young
fishermen in the place first selected by their boatman, and after an
hour had passed and only two small pike had been secured, George rowed
out into the current and went still farther down the river.
Whether it was the brightness of the rays of the sun, or the intense
heat of the day that worked against them they could not determine, but
the fish were wary, and only a few were added to the numbers already
taken.
George, however, was determined to continue the sport, if the
occupation might still be called by that name, and frequently
expressed his determination to secure a muscallonge, and thereby gain
an advantage over his rival. The enthusiasm of his companions visibly
cooled, and by the middle of the afternoon all hopes of securing one
of the mammoth prizes was gone. They enjoyed the day none the less,
and the frequent swift descents in the current whenever George rowed
out into it, the variety of the scenery by which they passed, and the
goodly sized catch they had already secured, were all sufficient to
make them reasonably content.
"George," inquired Jock, when the boat passed another island on which
a farmhouse could be seen, "what do the people here do in winter?"
"About the same as other folks, I suppose."
"No; but they must be cut off from shore when the river freezes."
"That's just the time when they're not cut off. They can get over to
the mainland then just as easy's not."
"Is the ice strong enough to bear them?"
George smiled as he replied, "They most always drive there. The ice
will hold anything you can pile on it."
As the boys gazed at the rushing waters, the words of the boatman
seemed almost incredible. That those angry currents should ever freeze
to such an extent that horses and loads could pass over them was
almost among the impossible events, but before they could speak,
George went on to say,--
"Of course there are times when the folks are shut off from the shore.
When there are thaws or freshets, or when the ice is forming, they
have to stay on the islands. But that isn't for a very long time, and
it isn't so hard as you might think. Everybody around here loves this
river, and it's no hardship to have to stay near by. There was a man
from New York up here last summer, and I used to take him fishing
almost every day. He was a fine man, too, and when he got ready to go
back home he made me a good offer to go back with him, and said he'd
give me a good place. But bless you! I couldn't think of leaving the
St. Lawrence. If I didn't see the heaving waters first thing in the
morning I'd be as lonesome as a hen with one chicken. I've lived
hereabouts all the twenty-six years of my life, and I'm too old now to
learn new tricks."
"What's that place ahead, George?" inquired Bob, pointing to a town on
the Canadian side of the river some two or three miles in advance of
them.
"Cornwall. It's quite a sizable town, too."
"Don't you think we'd better go ashore?" said Jock. "We must have a
good ten-mile ride, and it'll be night before long."
"Not just yet," pleaded the boatman. "We haven't got that
muscallonge."
"And aren't likely to get it, I'm afraid," replied Jock. "Where are
the teams to meet us, George?"
"Right down here. We've time enough yet," persisted George, as he
turned the skiff into another bay. "Try it here, boys. We may get a
muscallonge before you know it, and then Hank McBride will have to
keep still."
The boys made no protest, though the sun was already low in the
western sky. In a few minutes their desire to return was forgotten,
for the fish were striking again, and several pike and pickerel were
safely landed.
"I think, George, we'd better go back now," said Jock, as the boatman
turned to resume his course up the bay. "It's getting late."
"Just one turn more," persisted George. "If you knew how Hank will
talk after we get back, you'd be willing to keep on a little longer."
"All right," agreed Jock, good-naturedly. "We'll take one more turn,
but then we'll have to go ashore. I don't want to be out here any
longer."
George made no reply, and began to row with increased deliberation.
Slowly the skiff was sent up the bay, but not a strike rewarded his
efforts. Still more slowly he took a wider sweep as he reversed the
course, never once speaking or taking his eyes from the long lines
which trailed far behind in the water. Neither of the boys was
expecting anything now, and when two-thirds of the remaining distance
had been covered, Jock began to reel his line in, satisfied that the
day's sport was ended.
"One more?" suggested George, pleadingly.
Jock shook his head and continued his occupation.
"You might as well take yours in, too," said George, sadly, to Bob. "I
wish you weren't in such a hurry. I believe we might get a muscallonge
yet."
"We haven't been in a hurry," said Bob. "You've given us a great day,
George; we'll never forget it, or you. Hold on a minute. Back water a
bit; my hook has caught in some of the grass, I guess."
George obeyed, but as he rested on his oars, suddenly Bob's line began
to run out with a rush that almost yanked the rod from his hands.
"Grass, is it?" exclaimed George, excitedly. "Hi! Look at that, will
you?" he exclaimed a moment later.
About a hundred and fifty feet behind them a monstrous fish leaped
from the water, and in a graceful curve plunged into the bay again,
but all could see that Bob's line was fast to him.
Then began such a contest as neither of the boys had ever witnessed
before. With furious rushes the great fish darted first in one
direction and then in another, and the reel on Bob's rod "sang" as the
line was drawn from it. Bob was standing erect now, and, grasping the
rod tightly in one hand, with the other attended to the reel. At times
the strong rod would be drawn beneath the water, and Bob was compelled
to exert all his strength merely to hold on, while the light boat was
drawn swiftly over the bay, and George was doing his best to assist
the eager boy with his oars.
"Look out! Look out!" the boatman called, quickly. "He's coming
straight for us! Reel in! Reel in! Don't give him an inch of slack or
you'll lose him! Hadn't you better let me take the rod?"
"No," replied Bob, decidedly. "I'll get or lose him myself."
The line was now loose in the water, and as Bob turned the reel in
desperate haste, there was a great fear in his heart that the fish had
torn himself away; but when at last he had secured all the slack,
there was another savage pull and the line went darting through the
water once more.
Five minutes, ten minutes passed, and still the exciting contest
continued. Bob would draw the powerful fish farther in toward the
boat, but every time the muscallonge would dart away again, and
sometimes every yard of the line would be drawn from the whirling reel
before he would pause in his flight.
"Tucker him out! Tucker him out! It's the only way to get him," said
George. "Don't you think you'd better let me take the pole now?"
But Bob was still determined, and the fierce contest was not relaxed.
Hither and thither, now up and now down the bay, the fish darted in
his efforts to free himself, but Bob was still master. Jock was an
interested spectator, but was unable, seated as he was in the stern,
to render any assistance to his friend, even if Bob had desired any.
When a quarter of an hour had passed, it became evident that the fish
was becoming tired. The lunges still continued, but not so much of the
line was paid out now, and every time Bob reeled in he drew his victim
nearer the boat.
At last there came a time when he could reel steadily, and, to his
intense delight, he could feel the heavy fish following the line.
Nearer and nearer came the muscallonge, and Jock, who was leaning over
the edge and peering down into the depths of the clear water, suddenly
exclaimed,--
"Oh, Bob! he's as big as the boat! You'll never get him in here in the
world!"
Perhaps the great fish heard his words, or caught sight of his captors
at that moment. At all events, he suddenly turned and dashed away
again with another burst of speed that made the reel sing merrily. He
did not go far, however, and as the line slackened, George said in a
loud whisper, "That's his last turn. Now look out, and if you don't
give him any slack, you can bring him where I can reach him with my
gaff. Careful, now; careful!"
Apparently Bob needed no advice, for slowly and steadily, although his
hands were trembling in his excitement, and his eyes almost seemed to
stand out from his head as he peered eagerly down into the water to
obtain his first glimpse of his prize, he drew the fish toward the
boat.
Either discouraged or worn out by his struggles, the muscallonge
followed the lead now, and with every turn of the reel offered no
resistance. Both Bob and Jock were hardly breathing in their
excitement, and they could feel, rather than see, that George had
taken his gaff and was leaning over the edge ready for the last great
effort.
Suddenly George thrust the cruel hook into the water, the boat dipped
dangerously, the boys were almost thrown from their seats, as with one
lusty pull the monstrous fish was lifted into the air and then fell
upon the bottom of the skiff.
For a moment even the excitement of the boys was forgotten in the
struggle which followed. With great strokes of his powerful tail the
fish struck the sides of the boat until it seemed as if they must be
broken into pieces. From side to side he threw himself, and to the
eager lads it appeared as if he was everywhere at once.
But George was ready for the emergency, for, watching his opportunity,
he threw himself upon the struggling muscallonge, and with a few hard
blows of his hickory club, put an end to the contest, and then
stretched their victim upon the bottom of the boat, as he was much too
large to be placed in the fish box. The contest was ended, and Bob had
been victorious.
And what a contest it had been! The great, savage head, the
beautifully mottled sides, the immense size of their prize, could be
seen now to advantage, and for a moment no one spoke. The feelings of
the boys were too keen, however, for them long to remain silent, and
in a moment they broke into a cheer which must have awakened the
echoes along the shore.
"Well, I guess you aren't very sorry you followed my advice now,"
said George, who was the first to speak.
"Well, I rather guess we're not!" responded Bob, eagerly.
"It's quitting time now, though," said George, glancing again at the
sun, which was just above the western horizon. "The teams will be up
there at that farmhouse you can see yonder. We'll get some milk to
drink there, too, and that'll help to stay your stomachs till you can
get back to the hotel."
The boat was speedily sent ashore, and the delighted boys leaped
quickly out upon the bank.
"You can take the muscallonge, and I'll bring the fish box," said
George.
Securing a stout limb of a tree he thrust it through the gills of the
monstrous fish, and then, with one end resting on the shoulder of each
boy, and the muscallonge dragging almost to the ground between them,
they started for the house, where George soon after arrived with the
fish box, which of itself was no mean load.
He dropped the box on the grass near which the boys had placed the
muscallonge, and said, "I'll get some steelyards in the house, boys,
and we'll see how much the fellow weighs."
In a moment he returned, but before he proceeded to weigh the fish, he
opened its huge jaws and began to thrust into them some of the smaller
pickerel and pike they had caught. Not satisfied with his efforts, he
was about to add some good-sized stones, when Jock, who had been
watching the actions of the boatman as if he did not understand what
he was doing, suddenly exclaimed,--
"Here, George, what are you doing?"
"Getting this fish ready to be weighed," replied George, without
pausing in his occupation.
"Well, then, weigh the muscallonge. We don't want to weigh all of St.
Lawrence county. The muscallonge will do."
George stopped abruptly, and gazed for a moment at the boys as if he
had not correctly heard them. Their determined manner was not to be
changed, however, and as he rose from the ground, he said,--
"Well, I must say you beat all the men I ever saw. Why, that's the way
everybody does down here when they weigh a fish."
"It isn't the way we do. We want to know exactly what this fish
weighs," said Bob.
Evidently chagrined and disgusted, George nevertheless weighed the
great fish, and glancing at the steelyards, said, "Humph! He only
weighs thirty-eight pounds!"
"Thirty-eight pounds!" exclaimed Jock, in his delight.
But even the present elation was forgotten when Hank McBride and the
other two boys were seen approaching with their catch, and in a moment
Jock turned to greet them with a shout of triumph.
CHAPTER XXIV.
WHAT BECAME OF THE PRIZE.
"You act as if you had caught something you want us to see," said Ben,
as he ran before his companions. "Let's see your fish."
The muscallonge had not been placed with the other fish, and as Ben
glanced down at the row which had been spread in order on the grass,
he therefore did not see the prize of which his friends were so justly
proud.
"You did well, but we've beaten you!" he exclaimed, as Bert and Hank
McBride now came up to view the victims.
"That's pooty good," remarked the elder boatman. "You've done very
well for beginners. George is improving every day, and it won't be
long afore he'll do 'most as well as men of experience," he added
complacently.
George made no response except to wink soberly at Bob, and then
turned with the boys to examine the catch which Hank's party had made.
They certainly had been very successful, and as the fish were taken
from the box and placed in a row upon the grass, both Jock and Bob
were loud in their words of praise. Several large pike served to
increase the effect, and when at last all the fish had been seen, it
was perceived that in numbers and weight Hank's party had exceeded
that of the other.
"Come into the house, boys, and get some milk," called George. "You
must be hungry by this time."
Before entering, the boys all went to the barrel, which stood beneath
a corner of the eaves, and dipping from the rain-water stored there,
washed their faces in the tin basin. Refreshed by the act, they then
all followed the boatman, and seated themselves before the table, on
which the housewife had placed a large pitcher of milk and several
earthen cups.
The milk speedily disappeared, and the pitcher was again filled before
the boys rose from their seats.
"How much shall we pay you for the milk?" inquired Jock, as he turned
to go out into the yard again.
"I don' know," replied the woman, hesitatingly. "I don' know jest what
it is worth."
"It's been worth a good deal to us," said Jock, feeling in his pocket
for a coin as he spoke. "We want to pay you whatever you say."
"I don' know jest what it is worth," repeated the woman. "Do ye think
five cents would be too much?"
"Hardly," laughed Jock, as he handed the hostess a quarter.
"I don't think I've got any change," said the woman, reluctantly.
"Change? There isn't any change."
"Do ye mean to say ye're goin' to give me all this money for that
milk?"
"Why, yes. It was good milk, and we haven't been modest in using it."
"It's too much to charge!" she said decidedly. "I can't take so much."
Perceiving that she was in earnest, Jock did not press the matter, and
finally compromised by inducing her to accept fifteen cents. Then as
he hastened to rejoin his companions, who now were waiting for him in
the yard, and perceiving that the muscallonge had not yet been shown
them, he said, eagerly,--
"Come over here, fellows; I want to show you something. You come, too,
Hank," he added; and in a moment he led the way to the place where the
monstrous fish had been covered with grass.
As he removed the covering and the great head of the muscallonge was
seen, Ben exclaimed in astonishment, "What! What's that?"
"That," replied Jock, gently, "is our prize fish, or rather it's
Bob's, for he caught it out here in this bay."
"Is it a muscallonge?" inquired Bert.
"That's what George calls it, I believe. I'm not very familiar with
the names of the fish hereabouts, but that'll do as well as any other,
I fancy."
For a moment the boys all crowded about the place, eagerly examining
the prize, and making many comments in their enthusiasm. Hank,
however, had not spoken, and after his first glimpse of the great
fish, turned away his head and pretended to be gazing out over the
near-by St. Lawrence. George, too, affected an air of indifference,
which he was far from feeling, and which an occasional keen glance
at his rival boatman betrayed.
[Illustration: "Did you ever catch a bigger one?"--_Page 303._]
"I say, Hank," called Bob, "did you ever see a bigger fish than that
caught here?"
"Lots o' times," responded the boatman, coldly.
"Did you ever catch a bigger one?" persisted Bob, evidently enjoying
the jealous rage of the elder boatman.
"Ho! Lots of times. And when I catch 'em, I catch 'em, too!" he added
meaningly.
"That's what we do, too," said Bob. "When we catch 'em, we catch 'em."
"Ye never caught that ere fish," retorted Hank, disdainfully.
"We didn't! How did he get here, then?" demanded Jock, quickly.
"Oh, fish is cheap over in Cornwall," replied Hank, with a peculiar
smile. "When I see ye headed that way, I knew ye weren't goin' for
nothin'."
"Do you mean to say we _bought_ that fish?" demanded Jock, aghast.
"I'm not makin' no insinuations," said Hank. "But I knows what I
know."
The boatman's suggestion seemed to afford intense delight to Ben and
Bert, and though they joined at once in the banter, it was evident
they did not share in the suspicions of Hank McBride.
"Did you ever hear about the fox who wouldn't be hired to eat the sour
grapes?" said George, turning to the boys, and striving to ignore the
presence of his rival.
"I believe I have heard that story somewhere," replied Jock. "Did you
ever hear it, Hank?" he added, turning to the envious boatman.
"I knows what I know," retorted Hank, adopting a line of argument
which is not confined to the region of the St. Lawrence.
"You'd better be starting, boys," interrupted George. "You've got a
long drive before you, and you'll be too late to get any supper at the
hotel if you stay around here any longer, wasting your time and words
too."
The suggestion was at once acted upon. The fish were stored in the
carriage which was to convey the boys back to the hotel, and after
they had assisted the boatmen in lifting their skiffs from the water
and placing them upon the frame wagons which had been sent down to
carry the boats to the place from which they had started in the early
morning, they all clambered into their seats and were ready to depart.
"Hold on a minute," called George, as he ran quickly toward them.
"Who's going to drive you back to the Landing to-morrow morning?"
"I don't know. We'll find some one," replied Jock.
"If ye don't mind I'd like to do it myself. I've got a good team and a
pretty fair wagon, and I won't charge you any more than you'd pay any
one else. I'll come over for you about eight o'clock, if you say so."
"All right, George," said Jock. "We'll be glad to have you. We'll call
it settled, then, and you are to come for us to-morrow morning at
eight."
"That's the way to do it," said Ben. "Don't you let these fellows have
any chance to explain how they got the muscallonge when you aren't
near to put in a word."
George made no reply, and the boys at once started.
"There'll be a pitched battle between those men before they get home,"
said Bert.
"Oh, no, the' won't," said the driver; "it's just the way with them.
They're as jealous of one another as all possessed, but they're good
friends, too. But I guess Hank McBride won't put on quite so many airs
as he's been doin' of late. He's a notion he's the only fellow that
can take out a party hereabouts."
About an hour and a half later the boys drove up in front of their
hotel, and, leaving their driver to look after their fish, ran up to
their rooms, and speedily prepared for the dinner which was ready for
them.
When they at last came out of the dining room and appeared on the
piazza, they beheld a small crowd assembled about a spot on the lawn.
When they joined the group, they discovered that their fish were the
objects which had drawn the spectators. Many were the exclamations of
astonishment at the number and size of the victims, and when at last
the people departed, the boys were left to themselves.
What to do with their catch then became the question. They had talked
of packing the muscallonge in ice and forwarding it to their parents
in New York, but the intense heat and the thought of possible delays
had seemed to make that impracticable. They had finally decided to
give them all to the proprietor of the hotel, and had just turned to
enter the office to inform the clerk of their decision, when a man
approached and accosted Jock.
To the lad's surprise he recognized him as a friend of his father's,
and, after introducing him to his friends, the man expressed a desire
that the huge muscallonge should be given to him if the boys had no
other plan of disposing of it; and, wondering at his urgency, and
aware that the remainder of their catch would be ample for all the
immediate wants of the hotel, they readily consented.
It was some three weeks afterward when they learned that the man to
whom they had presented their prize had first had a photograph of
himself and his two boys taken with fishing-rods in their hands, and
the monstrous fish in the foreground, and had then shipped the fish to
the editor of the local paper of the village in which his home was. A
marked copy of this paper had been sent the boys, in which they read a
long account of the struggle this man and his boys had in catching the
muscallonge, and how, at last, success had crowned their efforts, and
in their generosity they had sent their prize, "which weighed some
sixty pounds," to the editor himself. Great are the ways of fishermen,
and marvellous the increase in weight which some fish attain after
they have been drawn from their native waters! All that, however, is
an outside matter, and as our boys did not learn of the various uses
to which their prize was assigned until weeks had passed, it has no
legitimate part in the records of this story.
Promptly at the appointed hour on the following morning George
appeared before the hotel, and the boys took their seats in his wagon
to be carried back to the Landing. It was evident that George was in
no wise downcast over the envious charges of his rival boatman on the
preceding day, and as they rode on he explained to them many of the
points of interest in the region.
As there was an abundance of time before the departure of their boat
for Ogdensburgh, they were all eager to examine the places he
described, and as he had dwelt particularly upon the attractions of a
neighboring cemetery,--"graveyard," George called it,--they consented
to stop and visit it.
It was a quaint little spot, and its humble headstones indicated that
the great cloud which hangs low over all mankind was not wanting even
in the healthful region of the great river. But what had been of
peculiar interest to George was the inscription on some of the
headstones, and as he pointed out one after another, his companions
were soon as interested as he.
"Hold on, fellows," said Bob, taking out a note-book and pencil as he
spoke; "I must have this one."
The boys waited while Bob made an exact copy of the epitaph, and this
is what he found:--
"Jimmie Dooley is my name, Ireland
is my nation, Brasher is my dwelling
place and heaven my expectation.
When I am dead and in my grave
and all my bones is rotten, this stone
will tell my name when I am
quite forgotten."
"Got it all, Bob?" inquired Ben, soberly.
"Yes."
"Verbatim?"
"Yes."
"Literatim?"
"Yes."
"Punctuatim?"
"Yes."
"Spellatim?"
"I think so" laughed Bob. "Why? What makes you so particular?"
"I can't stand it any longer. It's too pathetic for me."
"I suppose the folks here feel just the same as they do in the city,"
said George, curtly. "I didn't bring you here to have you poke fun."
"I'm not poking fun," said Ben, soberly; "but the exquisite pathos of
that poem is too much for my tender feelings. Poor Jimmie! I don't
wonder he's dead. Do you know the poet, the author of those touching,
plaintive lines?"
As the boys broke into a laugh, George turned abruptly away and took
his seat in the carriage, an example his companions speedily followed.
When they arrived at the Landing they discovered that there were yet
two hours before the little steamer would depart, and in response to
George's suggestion, for his good nature seemed to be restored now,
they accepted his invitation and went with him to view some "sturgeon
pounds."
These pounds were pens in the water, near the shore, in which the boys
discovered some fish which even put their great muscallonge to shame.
These fish were caught, they learned, from a slender pier or framework
built out into the rapids. There, men, equipped with long poles, each
of which had a hook on the end much like the gaff George had used on
the preceding day, took their stand, and as the mighty sturgeon slowly
forced their way up the stream and against the current, they were seen
by the waiting fishermen, and "hooked." They were then thrown alive
into the pens and kept, with others, until a sufficient number had
been obtained, when they were all shipped to Montreal.
Interested as the boys were in the sight, they did not long remain
there, and soon after their return to the Landing went on board the
steamer, and were ready to depart. Bidding George good-by, and
thanking him once more for all the assistance and pleasure he had
given them, they were eager, when the boat left the dock, to return to
the camp on Pine Tree Island, for which they had now come to cherish
almost a feeling of home.
CHAPTER XXV.
EARLY DISCOVERERS.
The progress of the little steamer was necessarily much slower now
than when the boys had come down the river, moving as she was against
the strong current. There was, however, too much of inspiration in the
experience to make the young campers feel impatient, and as there were
but few passengers besides themselves on board, they took their chairs
to a sheltered spot on the upper deck, and the sounds of their merry
laughter and shouts soon resounded over the river. They cheered the
passing boats, and gave their school cry whenever they approached a
camp.
After a time even these measures became tame and failed to satisfy the
boys, and Bob, quick to seize his opportunity, said, "I'll now resume
my lectures, with your kind permission."
"I don't think our permission will have much to do with it," said
Ben. "You'll go on just the same."
Bob scowled, but as he knew the boys really were interested, and
wanted to learn something more about the early discoverers, he
began:--
"When Cartier returned to France after his second voyage, the
hardships and losses he had to report were not, of course, very
encouraging to the Frenchmen, who wanted him to find a country where
the streets of the cities were all paved with gold. But Francis de La
Roque, the Lord of Roberval in Picardy, had himself appointed viceroy
and lieutenant-general of the new territory, Cartier still being
called captain-general and chief pilot of the king's ships.
"Five vessels were then fitted out, and in May, 1541, Cartier started
with two of them and was soon afterward joined by the others. Then all
five started across the ocean blue, and three months later landed at
Sainte Croix. He began to cruise about, and finally sent two of his
ships back to France, though he kept the other three at the mouth of
the Red River.
"Cartier then went up to Hochelaga, hoping to be able to come farther
up the river, but the winter was a terrible one, and his men were so
discouraged that in the spring, his provisions being exhausted, and
the Indians beginning to cut up, he sailed away for France. On the way
over he met Roberval, who ordered him to go back again; but Cartier
did not see it in that light, so he kept on, and finally got back to
France, where he lived and died in peace."
"Oh, more! more!" said Ben, mockingly.
Bob laughed as he replied, "There was no more, so far as Cartier was
concerned. It was three times and out with him."
"Then he never came as far up the St. Lawrence as we are now?" asked
Bert.
"No. Cartier never did. Of course others came, and I'll tell you about
them."
"It's a wonderful river," murmured Jock. "And just think of it,
fellows. We're sailing over the very same river those old chaps did.
Just the same, after three hundred years have gone."
"No, it isn't the same," replied Ben.
"Why not, I'd like to know?" demanded Jock.
"Oh, the water keeps running away all the time. They call it the same
river, but it's never the same for any two minutes. The banks are the
same, but the river itself is constantly changing."
"You're getting it down too fine for me," said Jock. "And that's
Canada, over there," he added, pointing to the distant shore as he
spoke. "I wonder where they got that name. Do you know, Bob?"
"There are two theories," replied Bob, quickly. "One is based on the
story that Stefano Gomez, a Spaniard, was the first white man to enter
the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and that he came in 1525. He died over here
somewhere, I believe, so the story can't be denied. There is an old
Spanish tradition that he came into the gulf and landed, and when he
didn't find any gold, or mines, or any of the things for which he was
looking, he exclaimed, 'Aca-nada,' which means, I'm told, 'Here is
nothing.' And Canada is said to be derived from that."
"What's the other theory? You said there were two, Bob," said Jock.
"Oh, the other is that Canada is another form of the Indian word,
Ka-na-ta, which means a village. I've given you both, and you can take
your choice."
"But how did the gulf and the river get their names, Professor?" asked
Ben.
"Cartier gave it to them in honor of the saint who was supposed to be
the patron of the day when he made his discovery--the 10th of August,
you know. I think the saint deserved to have his name given, too, for
it is said he was broiled on a gridiron in 253."
"Good time," remarked Ben, dryly. "Two forty is better, though."
"Bob," demanded Bert, "how do you know all this stuff. I don't see how
one small head can contain all you know."
"That isn't original, my friend," remarked Bob. "You have the idea but
not the language of our last text-book in English Lit. How do I know
so much? Oh, it comes natural to some people. I know a heap more than
I have told you, though. If you want me to, I'll give you some of it
now. We haven't got to Ogdensburgh yet."
"Oh, do! do! Lend the charm of your voice to these interesting details
you have picked out of some almanac," said Ben.
"I'll lend you my voice if you'll lend me your ears!" rejoined Bob.
"Never!" shouted Ben, clasping those members as he spoke.
"Well, turn the whole length of them toward me and it'll do just as
well. They're more becoming to you than they would be to me."
"Oh, go on with your yarn," interrupted Bert. "We'll listen to you
till we get to Ogdensburgh. After that, if you dare refer to one of
the early discoverers, overboard you go! Doesn't he, fellows?"
"Hear! Hear!" shouted Ben, sitting quickly erect.
"I shan't forget," said Bob, laughing. "You fellows seem to think I'm
giving you these facts for the fun of the thing."
"You are," said Ben.
"It may be rare sport," said Bob, "but I don't see it in just that
light. I'm trying to teach you something, so that when you go back to
the city you'll be able to make a half-decent appearance."
"Nonsense!" protested Ben. "You've been cramming up, and are just
spreading your knowledge before us, the way Ethan says his peacock
gets into the house and spreads his tail in front of the looking-glass
and struts around like all possessed. You can't fool us, Bob."
"I don't have to," said Bob, good-naturedly.
"Quit your fooling and go on with your story, Bob," said Jock. "We'll
be at Ogdensburgh pretty soon, and then you're under bonds not to
refer to another discoverer there. And I want to know about these
things."
"All right," said Bob. "Well, the French kept sending somebody over
here almost every year after Cartier stopped coming, but nothing of
any consequence was done before 1608. Then a Calvinist named DeMonts
obtained freedom for himself and his religious sympathizers in the New
World, only the Catholic religion was to be established among the
natives, and finally Champlain and Pontgrave were sent over here in
that year to begin a settlement and look after the trade in furs. They
were both sterling men and had had plenty of experience, and no better
ones could have been found.
"Champlain reached Tadousac on the 3d of June, and after a month was
at Quebec, where Cartier had spent the winter almost three-quarters of
a century before. He saw what a fine site there was there for a city,
and at once selected the spot as the place for a settlement.
"The next spring, in April, Samuel Champlain, along with two of the
Frenchmen, started up the great river. They got along fairly well, and
at last turned to the south and went down and discovered the lake
which now bears his name, and then went on into the other lake, which,
as you know, is Lake George."
"Yes, I've heard of that lake," murmured Ben.
"Five years afterward," continued Bob, ignoring the interruption,
"Champlain succeeded in having four Recollets appointed to begin a
mission work among the Indians. To get the favor of the red men,
Champlain himself, and a priest named Joseph Le Cavon, went with them
to help whip the Iroquois; but the Iroquois weren't in a mood to be
whipped that time, and drove off their enemies and wounded Champlain,
just as if he hadn't come on his merciful errand."
"Hold on, Bob," said Jock. "You didn't tell us whether Champlain found
Lake George all named when he got there."
"It was named," replied Bob, "though it wasn't named George. The
Indians called it Horicon, and the Frenchmen named it Lake St.
Sacrament. Sir William Johnson, afterward, for good and sufficient
reasons, changed it to Lake George. But to resume. When Champlain was
wounded he had to spend the winter with the Indians; but he made good
use of his time and learned a lot about them--their language, customs,
and all that sort of thing.
"It was in 1625 when Henri de Levi, Duke de Ventadour--he had
purchased the vice-royalty of New France, you see, before this time,
for they didn't mind such little things as selling a kingdom or two,
with a world and a few stars thrown in--sent over here Father
Lallemant and four other Jesuit priests and laymen. Father Lallemant
was a good man and very earnest, and the Recollets, of course,
received him and his companions very kindly.
"In the following year three other Jesuit priests were also sent over
here, along with some settlers and mechanics, and they soon made the
little settlement begin to look something like a town. In 1629 the
English happened to come along, and quietly took the place as their
own; but there was a treaty made, and they had to stand by it, so the
French owned the town again in 1632; and the very next year Champlain
was appointed once more as governor of New France. He'd been governor
before, you see, and this was only putting him back into his own
place. But he didn't live very long, for, if I recollect aright, he
died in December, 1635."
"What for?" inquired Ben, soberly. "Were the gubernatorial honors too
heavy for his shoulders? Perhaps he didn't like the political methods
of the Indians. I wish you'd explain it, Bob."
"From that time, for a good while, the Jesuit missionaries kept coming
over here, and the work they did was something marvellous. They went
up the river and kept on out along the lakes, and even down other
rivers. They dressed as the Indians did, and ate and lived with them,
just to learn their ways and convince the red men that they were their
friends. They were tortured sometimes, horribly, but they never
flinched. They just kept right on, and you can well believe it wasn't
very long before their priests had a grip on the Indians which wasn't
very small. Every tribe of the Iroquois of New York had its own
special missionary, and almost every nation out along the lakes and
down the Mississippi had one too; and they made themselves of so much
use, going with the men even into battle, that they're not forgotten
yet.
"Well, of course, where the missionaries went, there business went
too; and it wasn't long before fur-trading posts were established
wherever the Jesuits were. Then, to protect the fur traders, and to
keep the English from getting any of the business, soldiers had to be
sent along; and so, as Quebec was the head centre of the whole affair,
it wasn't long before there was a regular business all along the St.
Lawrence, long before any real settlements were made on its borders,
or at least along the lakes."
"I say, Bob," interrupted Ben, "did you ever read any of Oliver
Wendell Holmes's books?"
"Yes, I've read the 'Autocrat.'"
"Do you remember about that chap who could talk a lot on some
subjects, and didn't know anything about others?"
"You mean the one who'd read a volume or two in the cyclopædia, and
not much besides?"
"Pre-e-cisely! Now I've found you out. _You've_ been reading a volume
of the cyclopædia, and are giving us its contents."
"Which volume?" asked Bob.
"The one that has the C's in it. Cartier, Champlain, Canada, Cavon,
Catholic, Cortereal--don't you see, fellows?" he added, turning
triumphantly to his friends. "We've found him out! He's crammed up on
his C's. Now, to prove it, let's ask him some questions on other
subjects. What was the first settlement above Quebec? What soldiers
came in here? Who was--who was--a--a--"
"Hello! That's Ogdensburgh ahead there!" exclaimed Bob, suddenly; and
as he spoke he ran quickly to the bow of the steamer, ostensibly to
obtain a better view of the town which they were approaching.
CHAPTER XXVI.
THE SQUALL.
The little steamer soon afterward arrived at its dock, and the
transfer to the large boat was speedily made. Then, in the eagerness
to be first in the dining room and to satisfy the cravings of their
appetites, which were already keen, Bob's lectures and the early
discoverers were all forgotten.
Nor did Bob seem to grieve at the apparent disregard, though whether
it was his hunger, or his unwillingness to hear the suggestion Ben had
made as to the source of his information, which was the cause of it,
he did not feel called upon to explain.
At all events, when the boys returned to the deck they were at peace
among themselves and with all the world; and as Bob was careful not
even to hint at the men who had sailed up the river centuries before
this time, no occasion arose in which the explanation of Ben could be
taken up again.
Apparently, in spite of the fact that the large steamer was moving
against the current, there was no less speed displayed than on the
voyage down the stream, for greater efforts were put forth. Bert
solemnly called the attention of his companions to the fact, and with
no less solemnity urged them to profit by the lesson that greater
obstacles only called forth the greater powers of boats and men.
Doubtless his moral lesson was not duly appreciated, for the lads were
in no mood for sermons. The constantly changing scene about them, the
sweep of the great waters, and the saluting of passing vessels,
occupied the most of their time and held their undivided attention.
It was late in the afternoon when at last they perceived Alexandria
Bay in the distance, and knew that they had almost arrived at the end
of their voyage.
"It looks as if we might have a storm, fellows," said Jock, pointing
as he spoke to some heavy black clouds that could be seen in the
distance.
"If it'll hold off till we get back to camp we shan't care," replied
Bert, lightly.
They were all so eager to land now that they had no disposition to
stop and consider even the threatenings of the storm-clouds.
"Hello! There's Ethan!" exclaimed Jock, as he obtained a glimpse of
their boatman on the dock. "Perhaps he has his cat-boat with him. I'm
sure I hope he has, for I don't want to row back to camp, especially
if it's going to rain."
As soon as they landed, Ethan greeted them, and without waiting to
listen to the story of their experiences in the Longue Seaut, he said
quickly, "Git aboard my boat, every one o' ye. It's goin' to rain, an'
I want to land ye afore it begins. Git yer skiff an' I'll take it in
tow, an' we'll start right off."
Jock ran quickly to the place where his skiff had been left, and as he
rowed around the corner of the dock to the cat-boat, Bert said,
"Where's Ben? He'll have to get his canoe too."
But Ben at first could not be found, and the anger of Ethan waxed
strong. "That pesky boy is always the one to bother us. Where do ye
s'pose he is?"
"There! there he is!" exclaimed Bob, pointing as he spoke toward a
canoe which could be seen out on the river.
The occupant could not be plainly seen, but after watching his
movements for a moment they were all satisfied that it was indeed Ben,
who, probably in his desire to paddle his own canoe, had slipped away
unobserved, and was already well on his way back to camp.
Ethan uttered another exclamation of anger, but as he quickly bade the
boys take their places on board his boat, there was no time lost in
further investigations, and soon, with the skiff in tow, they were
headed down the river. There was, however, but little air stirring,
and soon the cat-boat was almost becalmed. The heavy clouds climbed
higher and higher in the sky, but the waters of the river were almost
as motionless as glass. The sail flapped idly against the mast, and
the boat slowly drifted with the current.
Ethan did not speak now, but his evident air of alarm speedily
communicated itself to his companions. They glanced nervously at one
another, and then at the great black mass which was almost directly
over their heads.
"Don't you think we'd better take the oars, Ethan?" suggested Jock.
Ethan shook his head, but made no other reply. A streak of light gray
in the dense blackness of the clouds could now be seen, and as the
boatman discovered it, he said, "Take in the sail, boys. It'll be--"
But Ethan did not complete the sentence, for suddenly the deluge was
upon them. In a moment the wind began to blow, and like a startled
horse the boat suddenly seemed to leap forward. A roaring sound filled
the air, and the trees along the distant shore bent and swayed and
tossed their branches wildly, as if they, too, shared in the alarm.
The river was quickly covered with white-caps, and the rail of the
cat-boat was almost beneath the water.
"Here! here!" shouted Ethan suddenly, endeavoring to make his voice
heard above the noise of the storm. "Two of ye hold the tiller while I
take in the sail."
Bob and Jock sprang to do his bidding, but their combined strength was
hardly sufficient to hold the boat to its course. Ethan worked his way
slowly toward the mast, and after a hard struggle succeeded in
lowering the sail, a part of which dragged in the water before he
could draw it on board.
At last, succeeding in a measure in his efforts, he returned to his
place in the stern and resumed his labors with the tiller. The fury of
the storm had now increased. All on board were soon drenched; but they
did not mind the wetting, for a great fear was in their hearts. The
roar of the wind was like that of a railway train under full speed.
Even the outlines of the shores could not now be seen. Under bare
poles the boat sped swiftly forward. Once or twice they caught a
glimpse of other luckless men caught as they were in the squall, but
they were speedily lost to sight, and the cat-boat darted ahead with
ever-increasing speed.
Suddenly Jock discovered that it was no longer rain which was falling
upon them, but hail; and even while he looked up in astonishment, the
hailstones seemed to increase in size. As they struck the Boys in the
face or upon the head they produced a sharp pain, and every one
speedily covered his face with his cap and drew his coat up more
tightly about his neck.
"Go into the cabin, every one o' ye!" shouted Ethan; but his voice was
drowned by the storm, and no one heard or heeded his cry of warning.
On and on plunged the boat, higher and higher rose the tossing waves,
stronger and stronger became the force of the pelting hailstones. In
spite of their fear the boys all looked up as they heard a sudden
sound of breaking branches and snapping trees. Just before them
through the blinding storm they could see a shore and tossing waters
as they fell in waves upon the rocks. A great tree had just fallen,
and the sound of the crash it made as it fell upon the smaller trees
about it increased the terror in the boat. They were not more than
twenty yards distant now, and it seemed as if no power on earth could
save them from being dashed upon the projecting rocks. A great mass of
earth had been torn up by the roots of the tree which had fallen, and
they could see the wall it presented.
Nearer and nearer to the shore sped the swift-flying cat-boat. The
boys relaxed their hold upon their caps and coats, and grasped the
sides of the boat as they waited for the crash which threatened. Ethan
was struggling desperately with the tiller, and doing his utmost to
keep his boat away from the rocks, but his efforts were like those of
a little child. No one spoke, but the terror each felt was known by
all.
Then came a moment of breathless suspense; a low cry escaped the lips
of Jock. The boatman rose and threw himself bodily against the tiller,
striving by one last desperate effort to keep his boat off the rocks.
There was a grating sound from the keel, and then in a moment they
swept past the dangerous point and were out in the river again. They
had been so close to the rocky shore that they almost could have
leaped upon it, but if any one had had it in mind to make the
foolhardy attempt, the opportunity was gone before he could use it.
The sense of relief which came at the escape in nowise prevented the
boys from knowing that the fury of the squall had not yet spent
itself. They could see piles of hailstones on board the boat, and some
of them seemed to be almost as large as small eggs. They were pelted
upon the head and about the body, and there was no escape or relief.
The wind still roared, the seething waters tossed and rose about them,
the boat lurched and pitched, and yet all the time was driven swiftly
forward under the terrific force of the gale. Other perils might lie
before them, and with the thought the boys all peered eagerly ahead,
though they could see but a short distance through the blinding storm.
Suddenly a lull came, and as the boys glanced up they could see a
broad streak of light in the western sky. The black clouds were
scurrying overhead, and the sound of the thunder seemed to be a little
farther away. Swiftly as the storm had approached, with almost as
great swiftness it departed. The flashes of the vivid lightning could
still be seen, but they were farther down the river. The outlines of
the distant shores became more and more distinct, and almost before
the boys were aware of what was occurring, the blaze of the sun broke
through, and the wind and the storm subsided.
"We're all right now," said Ethan; and with a sigh of relief the boys
turned to look at him.
"Them squalls," explained the boatman, "are mighty sudden. Ye never
know when to expect 'em, or jest what to do when they come. Now, ye
see why I told ye not to go far from camp with yer canoes."
The mention of the canoes instantly recalled their thoughts to the
missing Ben. He had recklessly ventured forth in his, and doubtless
had been caught in the same storm which had so suddenly swept down
upon them.
For a moment no one spoke, and then Jock said tremblingly, "You don't
suppose anything has happened to Ben, do you, Ethan?"
"No knowin'. Mebbe he ran in to some island when the squall broke."
It was evident, however, that the boatman was no less troubled than
they by the thoughts of the absent Ben; but he at once placed the
tiller in the hands of the boys and went forward to hoist his sail
once more.
The wind had subsided now, and the boisterous waves were rapidly
resuming their former state of calm. It was the first experience the
boys had had in the sudden squalls which are wont to swoop down upon
the St. Lawrence, and ofttimes bring sorrow and destruction in their
wake. Ordinarily they subside as rapidly as they rise, and the present
instance proved to be no exception to the rule. The river was soon
calm, the low sun was shining clear and strong, and only a gentle
breeze ruffled the waters that only a brief time before were tossing
like the waves of an angry sea.
Steadily the cat-boat kept on its way, and as it had not been driven
very far out of its course, not a long time had elapsed before the
party was landed at the dock in front of their camp.
But what a sight met their eyes there! Neither of the tents could be
seen, and directly across the path which led down to the shore, a huge
tree had fallen. Broken branches strewed the ground, and the signs of
the fierceness of the gale were apparent on every side.
Slight heed was given to any of these things, however, so alarmed were
the boys over the safety of their missing companion. Poor Ben! Was
ever a more luckless mortal born into this world? He was ever the one
to meet with mishaps, if mishaps befell; but his peril in the present
instance far exceeded all he had experienced before.
"Now, boys," said Ethan, "you'd better take the skiff and row back up
the river. You may find Ben somewhere, and he may need ye, too. While
you're gone I'll see where the tents have been blown to and try to set
things to rights again."
Without waiting to reply, the three boys quickly freed the skiff which
the cat-boat had been towing, and Jock and Bob, each taking a pair of
oars, began to row swiftly over the river. They had no definite idea
as to just where it was best to go, but they kept on their way back
toward Alexandria Bay, hoping that somewhere they would discover Ben
paddling to meet them in his canoe. Their strongest hope was that he
had landed somewhere before the storm broke, and now that it was gone,
would be on his way back to the camp.
They had been gone about a quarter of an hour, when Bert, who was
seated in the stern, exclaimed, "There's a canoe up ahead, fellows,
but there's no one in it."
His companions stopped rowing for a moment and glanced eagerly behind
them. Then with redoubled speed they began to move toward the drifting
canoe. Soon they had overhauled it, and a low cry escaped Jock's lips
when he recognized it at once as the one which had belonged to the
missing Ben.
CHAPTER XXVII.
THE SEARCH.
The feeling of gloom in the hearts of the boys was reflected in the
dusk which now had settled over all. The sun had disappeared, and the
blaze in the western sky seemed weird and unnatural. The silence that
rested over the river was so intense that it almost seemed as if they
could hear it, if such a thing were possible. For a moment the boys
looked blankly at one another, but no one seemed willing to give
utterance to the fear which evidently possessed them all.
Jock was the first to speak, and as he reached over and grasped the
canoe to make it fast to the skiff, he said in a low voice, "This is
the worst yet, fellows. I'm almost afraid to go on."
"We'll have to go, whether we're afraid or not," said Bob.
His decided tone could not conceal his anxiety, but his suggestion
was so manifestly practical that the oars were at once taken up, and,
with the little canoe in tow, they resumed their way up the river.
The waters were calm now, so calm that scarcely a ripple could be
seen. Lights began to appear in the distant cottages, and the darkness
steadily deepened. Still the boys rowed swiftly on, unmindful of the
long and wearisome day which had gone, and thinking only of their
missing friend. Bert was keeping a careful lookout, though just what
he or his companions expected to see was not evident.
"I think, fellows," said Bert, at last, "you'd better row farther in
toward the shore of the islands. The storm came from the west, and if
Ben landed anywhere, it would be likely to be on one of the islands.
We can go up a mile or two, and then if we don't see or hear anything
we can cut across to the Bay. He may have been picked up by some boat
and carried back there, you know."
The direction of the skiff was quickly changed, for the advice seemed
good, though no one replied to Bert's words, and soon they were
skirting the islands. Again and again they stopped and shouted
together, but only the echoes along the shore or the calls of the
night birds responded.
The slight hope they had cherished was almost gone now. The empty
canoe was a constant reminder of their loss, and the longing in their
hearts was fast becoming changed to despair. Not even the paddle had
been found, and the fear that the canoe had been capsized in the
squall, and its occupant thrown into the water, was becoming almost a
certainty.
"There's one thing, fellows," said Bob, at last, striving somehow to
keep up their courage, "and that is, that Ben, though he is the most
unlucky fellow in some ways that ever lived, in others is the most
lucky. Just think of the scrapes he's been in since we came down here,
and yet he got out of every one. If it had been any one of us, we'd
have gone straight to the bottom of the St. Lawrence, but Ben,
somehow, manages to come right side up with care, and I'll not give up
yet."
Bob endeavored to speak confidently, but his words failed to cheer his
companions. The lights of Alexandria Bay could now be seen in the
distance, and the end of their attempt to discover the missing Ben
had almost come. Failure was to be stamped on them all, they thought;
and though they still continued to row, the dejection of all three was
becoming more and more apparent.
"We might as well strike across for the Bay, now," said Jock, at last,
pausing as he spoke, and looking sadly above him in the twilight.
"Yes, I think we'd better go over there," replied Bob. "Of course Ben
may have gone back to camp long before this, but as we are so near, I
suppose we might as well go on and do what we can."
They were only about twenty yards from the shore of one of the little
islands now, and as they grasped their oars again to carry out Jock's
suggestion, they were startled by a shout that came from a projecting
point in advance of them.
They could perceive some one standing there and waving a handkerchief
aloft on a stick. The faint sound of his call was sufficient to
interest the boys at once, and without uttering a word they began to
row swiftly in that direction. Bert was peering eagerly at the figure
of the man standing on the rock, and as soon as the sound of the
hallo became a little more distinct, he said in a low, intense voice,
"I believe it's Ben, boys. Give him the school cheer, and let's see."
The boys stopped, and the school cheer rang out, and then they waited
a moment in breathless suspense for the response.
Faintly across the water came the answering cheer, and then, half
laughing and half crying, Jock said, "Did you ever see such a fellow
in your lives? It's just as Bob here says. Ben can get into more
scrapes, and get out of them too, than any chap that ever lived."
"Never mind that part of it now," said Bob, quickly. "Give way, Jock,
and let's go for him. Of all his scrapes this is the worst."
There was no mistaking the reaction now as the boys swept over the
river, making every stroke tell. As they approached the point, they
perceived Ben seated on one of the rocks, and leaning upon his paddle
as if he was the most unconcerned spectator of their movements.
Quickly the skiff was sent ashore, and as Bert leaped out, Ben, who
had not stirred from his seat on the rocks, said,--
"I must say, fellows, you have taken your time. I didn't know but you
were going to leave me here all night. I've travelled clear around
this island three times since I landed, and I haven't seen a boat or a
man. I thought I was Robinson Crusoe for certain, and done into modern
English."
"Oh, Ben," said Jock, in a trembling voice, "don't talk that way. You
don't know how frightened we were. We started out to search for you
just the minute we got back to camp, and when we found that canoe of
yours empty and floating down the river, we didn't know what had
happened--"
"Did you find my canoe?" interrupted Ben, eagerly.
"Yes, yes," said Jock, laughing in spite of himself.
"Where is it?"
"Right here. We took it in tow."
"That's good. The thing got away from me, and I didn't expect ever to
see it again. You see, the wind drove me straight ashore here, and I
was mighty glad to get ashore, too. When I grabbed my paddle and
jumped out, and then turned around to pick up my canoe, why, it was
like the Irishman's flea--when I put my hand on it, it wasn't there."
"What did you do, Ben?" inquired Bert.
"Do? I didn't do anything. The wind blew so I thought it was going to
tear up the very island itself. I hid myself behind the rocks, and
waited. When the storm had passed I began to look about to see how I
was to get away from my desert island. I travelled around it three
times, as I told you, but I couldn't find any way of getting off, and
I'd about made up my mind I'd have to spend the night here, when I
discovered three men in a boat, and hailed them."
"Did you know who we were?"
"No; and I didn't care. All I wanted was to be taken off."
"We'll take you now," said Jock. "Come along; it's getting dark."
"I'll take my canoe, _if_ you please," said Ben, glibly.
"Ben, you're not going to paddle back to camp in that cockle-shell
to-night?" exclaimed Jock, aghast at the proposal. "I should think
you'd had enough of it for one night. Come along and be civilized,
and take your place at the oars in the skiff, like a little man."
"Here I take my stand. I can do no other," responded Ben, striking an
attitude as he spoke. "If I go back to camp, it'll be in my light
canoe."
"Let him go on a raft if he wants to," said Bob, glumly. "We've done
our part, and it's his own risk now."
"Ben, you'll keep close to us, won't you?" pleaded Jock.
"Yes, if you'll keep close to me," replied Ben. "You'll have to do
your best to keep up, though, I can tell that."
Lighthearted now, the boys resumed their places in the skiff, Bert
taking Jock's place at the oars, and with Ben in his canoe, which had
not suffered any from the storm, started down the river.
Ben was as good as his words, and though the two pairs of oars enabled
his friends to make excellent time, they were compelled to exert
themselves to the utmost to keep the skiff within sight. As a
consequence, when they arrived at the camp, as they did soon
afterward, they were thoroughly tired, and ready for the supper which
Ethan and Tom had provided.
Ben's appearance was as welcome to the boatmen as it had been to the
boys, and while they were seated at the table he was compelled to
relate the story of his adventure again. As Jock perceived that the
tents had been restored, he turned to Ethan and said,--
"Did you have any trouble in setting the tents up again?"
"Just a little," responded Ethan. "One o' 'em I found up in the top o'
that pine tree over yonder, and t'other one was down on the shore, but
we managed to git 'em all right enough. Neow then, I'm a-goin' to take
that canoe back with me to-night. I jest won't leave it where that Ben
can get hold of it. The next time he'll not be so lucky."
Even Ben uttered no protest; but when Ethan started for the place
where the canoe was kept on the bank, it could nowhere be found. Ben
pretended to search with the others; and when all their efforts proved
unavailing, Ethan declared testily,--
"The pesky thing's got afloat again. Well, there's one comfort, and
that is that this boy can't bother with it. I shouldn't sleep a wink
to-night thinkin' o' him, if 'twas left here."
After the departure of the boatmen Ben demurely entered the woods, and
soon returned with the treasured canoe in his arms.
"That's too bad, Ben," said Jock. "You know what Ethan said."
"I'm not going to scare Ethan to-night," replied Ben, "for I've had
enough to satisfy me for one day. But you don't think for a moment
that I'm going to give up my work in this thing, do you? Well, I'm
not. It's just got to come to my turn, and that's all there is to it!"
None of the boys were surprised when they came forth from the tent on
the following morning to discover Ben paddling about the river in his
canoe. It was true he did not venture very far from shore, the lesson
of the previous day evidently not having been entirely lost, and as
the rest of the night had restored the spirits of his companions, they
were all inclined to look upon his persistence in a spirit of good
nature.
Ethan, too, displayed no anger when he arrived and discovered Ben in
his customary morning occupation, and, while the boys were seated at
the breakfast table, made many inquiries as to their experiences and
success in shooting the Longue Seaut Rapids. His enthusiasm was great
when he learned of the capture of the muscallonge, and again and again
he referred to his own prophecy concerning the fishing in that part of
the St. Lawrence River.
For several days the life in the camp on Pine Tree Island was
uneventful, though every day was filled with its own interesting
experiences. Ethan contrived to spend more of his time with the boys
than he had previously done, and though he did not refer to the
perilous experience in the storm, they all understood that that was
the motive which controlled him, and, if the truth were known, not one
of the boys objected. Though the vividness of that fearful ride in the
gale had in a measure departed from their minds, still the memory of
it was strong, and even the determined Bob seemed to have profited by
the lesson.
One day, in the week which followed, the Clarkes came with their yacht
and took the boys with them for a picnic on Chimney Island. The
remains of the old French fort were still standing, and as the view of
the St. Lawrence from the ruins was one which extended for miles up
and down the river, they all could readily understand why that spot
had been selected by the soldiers of that far-away time. Bob offered
to explain the early history to his friends, but as Ben said quickly,
when Bob began,--
"There it is again! It's just as I said. Bob has been reading up one
volume of the Cyclopædia. It's the one with the C's in it. Cartier,
Champlain, Canada, Catholic, Cavon, Cortereal, and now it's Chimney
Island. For one, I've had enough."
The laugh which followed when the meaning of Ben's words was explained
to the party caused even Bob to desist, and changing the subject, he
inquired,--
"Have any of you young ladies ever seen Hamlick?"
"Seen what?" said Miss Bessie. "What's Hamlick? Is it another fish you
caught in those wonderful Longue Seaut Rapids?"
"No," replied Bob. "It's Ethan's word for Shakespeare's play. The
'young folks' are going to give it to-morrow evening over at the
Corners for the benefit of the public walks. We're going, all four of
us; and I didn't know but you would like to go, too."
The proposition was hailed with delight; and when the party broke up
in the late afternoon it was agreed that Mr. Clarke was to stop for
the boys on the following evening, and that together they were all to
go to the Corners and witness the much talked about play of
"Hamlick."
CHAPTER XXVIII.
HAMLICK.
Early in the following evening the yacht stopped at Pine Tree Island,
and after our boys had been received on board, proceeded on its way to
the Corners, where the entire party landed, and at once started up the
village street toward the town hall, where "Hamlick" was to make his
long-expected appearance.
It was soon discovered that many others were evidently going to the
same place, and along the dusty country roads teams could be seen
approaching from almost every direction. "Smart" appearing turnouts,
along with others which must have done duty for several generations
for the busy folk of the region, were seen, and Bob demurely pointed
out what he declared to be the original of the "wonderful one hoss
shay."
When our party climbed the rambling stairway which led to the room in
the third floor of the town hall where Hamlick was to appear, it was
an unusual sight upon which they looked. Old people and young were
entering the room; mothers with little babes in their arms; the
ever-present small boy, whose disposition does not vary materially
whether he dwells in country or city; bashful young fellows, who
apparently were wondering what they should do with those hands of
theirs which, somehow, would protrude too far below the short sleeves
of their coats; all these and many more were there.
In the front of the room the platform was hidden from sight by some
blue denim curtains hung on wires, which were to be manipulated by
some one behind the scenes. Some kerosene lamps were giving a faint
light from brackets on the walls, and a huge wood stove stood in one
corner of the room where it had done duty for years at the gatherings
in the bitter winter days.
There was no usher to show our party the way, but as they perceived
that no places had been reserved, and that all were free to go where
they chose, they at once turned toward the few remaining seats which
were well up in the front of the room and quietly seated themselves.
These seats were benches, across the backs of which narrow strips of
board had been nailed, and forced the occupant to maintain an attitude
which was anything but comfortable. The whole scene was so strange and
unlike anything which any of them had ever seen before, that the
novelty banished even the sense of discomfort, and all gazed about
them with an air of interest as keen as doubtless that of the good
people of the Corners would have been had they been privileged to
enter some spacious hall in the great city from which the summer
visitors had come.
To add to the interest, Ethan was discovered seated in the end of one
of the pews or benches which our friends appropriated, but his
appearance was so markedly different from that to which the boys had
been accustomed that they had some difficulty in really persuading
themselves that it was their boatman before them.
Ethan was dressed in a suit of rusty black broadcloth, which evidently
had seen other days if it had not seen better, and his bearing was so
solemn that at first the boys fancied that he was conducting himself
as he would have done in church.
"Aren't they almost ready to begin, Ethan?" inquired Jock, after he
had presented the sturdy boatman to his friends.
"I s'pose so. They were to begin at seven-thirty sharp," replied
Ethan, solemnly.
"Tom must be excited," suggested Jock, for want of something else to
say.
"I s'pose so."
It was plain that Ethan considered the occasion too solemn for such
trifling questions, and accordingly Jock turned to his other friends,
who were not troubled by any such scruples, and was soon talking and
laughing with them.
The interest in the scene did not decrease as the moments of waiting
passed. Boys entered and lurched heavily into their seats and began to
snap the peanuts, with which their pockets had been well supplied, or
industriously began to busy themselves with pieces of spruce gum which
the present owners had wrested from the trees by their own efforts.
Solemn-faced elderly people entered, and frequently a young mother
came, bringing with her a baby which was sleeping in her arms or
nodding its head sagely, as with wide-open eyes it looked out upon
the assembly.
The interest in the audience was speedily transferred to the stage,
from which the curtains now began to be drawn back. Apparently
something was wrong in the apparatus, for they "hitched" when about
half of the platform appeared in sight, and after a whispered
conversation had taken place, in tones so shrill that they could be
heard by the entire assembly, a well-grown lad stepped from behind the
scenes and adjusted the strings by which the screens were worked.
His appearance was greeted with a shout of delight from the small boys
in the audience, as they called him familiarly by his name, and
bestowed other signs of their approval upon him. The greeting,
however, was not received in the spirit in which it had been given,
and the "manager," after vainly striving for a moment to adjust the
workings, speedily retired in confusion. A yank upon the curtains
quickly followed, and though a sound as of tearing cloth was heard,
the view of the platform was soon unobstructed, and the audience
became silent, waiting for the performance to begin.
After a brief interval Bernardo appeared, gazing carefully about him
for Francisco, who, too tender-hearted to disappoint his commanding
officer, speedily strode forth upon the platform, prepared to do or
die.
"Who's there?" began Bernardo, in a loud stage whisper.
"Nay, answer me; stand, and unfold yourself!" thundered Francisco in
reply.
"Long live the King!" responded the officer, as if he were trying to
make the people in Alexandria Bay aware of his patriotic feeling.
"Bernardo?" exclaimed Francisco, in apparent surprise, though he had
been standing within a few feet of the man all the time.
The conversation continued until Horatio and Marcellus joined them,
and at once began to speak. Horatio was evidently master of the
situation, but poor Marcellus had an attack of stage fright. When it
came his turn to speak he began impulsively,--
"And liegemen to--to--to--to--" but he could go no further. Again he
began, in lower and more impressive tones: "A--a--and liegemen
to--to--" but the desired word would not come.
"To the Dane," whispered some one behind the scenes in a penetrating
voice which reached to the utmost corners of the room.
"And liegemen to the Dane," responded Marcellus, boldly.
Apparently he had recovered now, and all went well until the time came
when the Ghost was to enter. Whether it was the terrifying dread of
the nocturnal visitor, or the evident alarm of the four who were
conversing so eagerly upon the stage that produced the trouble which
followed, is not known; but no sooner had he glided in with his
unearthly tread, and no less unearthly glances, which he cast about
the room, than Marcellus, in his most awe-inspiring whisper, began,
"Peace! Break thee off; look where it comes again;" and then one of
the babies in the room began to scream.
Bernardo boldly continued, "In the same figure, like the king that's
dead."
"Thou art a scholar," responded Marcellus. "Speak to it, Horatio."
But the wailing infant in the front seat was not to be suppressed, and
his screams of terror or rage were becoming more and more shrill, and
were dividing the attention and sympathy of the audience and even
diverting their gaze from the stage.
Apparently human nature could not endure the strain, and suddenly
resuming an upright attitude and speaking in tones marvellously like
those of an angry man, the Ghost turned to the audience, and said
sharply, "Excuse me, ladies and gentlemen, but we'll have to stop the
performance till the mother removes that yelling young 'un from this
hall."
Without a protest the young mother rose, and, despite the increased
lamentations of her offspring and his vigorous bodily contortions,
departed; and at last, when "the infant with no language but a cry,"
as Bob afterward described the scene, could no longer be heard, the
play was resumed.
No one had appeared to be surprised at the interruption, and Ethan had
never once glanced at the boys. Dignified and unmoved he sat watching
the stage as if such slight deviations from the words of the "Immortal
Shakespeare" were not able to divert his attention, and he had slight
sympathy for those who would even look about them to discover whose
baby it was that was now creating the disturbance.
[Illustration: "Without a protest the young mother rose."--_Page
356._]
Babies were expected to be present on such occasions, and if present
they were in duty bound to make themselves heard--that was a matter of
course; and which particular baby it was exercising its lungs at the
present moment was, in his opinion, too insignificant a matter to
interest any one.
The interruption seemed, however, to have wrought havoc once more with
Marcellus, for when the play was resumed he began to falter and
hesitate, and like all people who hesitate, was speedily lost.
After he had boldly bidden Horatio to question the terror-inspiring
visitor, and had declared "it was offended," he seemed to lose heart.
"'Tis gone, and will not--not--will not--not-- 'Tis gone and
will--will. 'Tis will and not gone. No," he added abruptly, apparently
as much to the surprise of the Ghost himself, who could be seen
peering from behind the curtain, as to that of his audience, "No,
'tisn't ''tis will,' it's ''tis gone.' 'Tis gone and--and--and--"
Poor Marcellus gazed about him in despair, as if he was looking for
help; but no help came, except from the side of the platform, where
the prompter tried in a loud whisper to aid the desperate player.
Horatio, to help his comrade, went back to the last line he had
spoken, and repeated, "Stay! speak, speak! I charge thee, speak!"
"That's what I'm trying to do, but can't," replied Marcellus, casting
Shakespeare and discretion aside at the same time.
The words were too much for our boys, who, up to this time, had been
striving desperately to remain quiet. Jock had stuffed his
handkerchief into his mouth, but the explosive force of the last
despairing speech of Marcellus had proved too much for him to bear,
and a prolonged squeal came from his lips which forced even the
handkerchief from its place.
"He-e-e-e-e-e!" he cried, and in a moment his companions were all
clinging to the back of the seat in front of them and shaking with
laughter. But few others in the audience seemed to be similarly
affected, and Ethan turned and gave them a look which greatly aided in
restoring their composure.
Marcellus was thoroughly angry now, however, and glared down upon the
offending Jock as if he were minded to add other words which
Shakespeare might perhaps have used, but which he certainly had not
incorporated in the tragedy.
In a moment he rushed from the stage, seized the book from the hands
of the prompter, and, returning to his place, read his part as the
play was resumed. Then for a time all went well, and the eager boys
found themselves looking forward to the time when "Hamlick" himself
should appear.
True to his part, in the second scene the hero appeared, and our boys
were soon all listening attentively. Tom's first words were uttered in
a voice that trembled, but he soon was master of himself and was
giving his mother that sage counsel which has done so much to make
both her and him remembered.
The king stalked about the stage with a crown that fairly glittered
with jewels upon his head, and as for the queen, her gorgeous train
was sadly in the way of Polonius and Laertes, and even "Hamlick"
himself once trod upon it and received a look from her which well
might have caused him to pause in his undutiful language.
Marcellus, too, returned; but this time he was equipped with a book,
as well as with a sword, and though he followed the lines with his
finger as he read, and seldom glanced at his companions, and once his
words, "my good lord," were evidently misunderstood by his audience,
still no further interruptions came until the Ghost once more joined
the group.
Then a fresh trouble arose. Just at the most impressive part, a
long-drawn-out sigh seemed to come from Ethan, who had remained
quietly in his seat at the end of the bench.
Marcellus had just been strongly warning Hamlet not to go with the
untimely visitor, and Horatio had added, "No, by no means," when the
sigh from Ethan's corner rose again, louder, longer, and more intense.
All in the audience could hear it, and as it came once more our four
boys glanced quickly at the boatman.
His head was thrown back against the wall, his eyes were closed, and
his mouth was wide open. It was evident that Ethan was sleeping.
"It will not speak; then I will follow it," Hamlet was just remarking
on the stage.
"O-o-o-h-h-h!" responded Ethan, in something more pronounced now than
a sigh. His voice trembled and quavered, and seemed to gather force as
on it went.
"Wake him up, Jock," whispered Ben.
"Stick a pin in him. He'll spoil the play," whispered Bert.
Jock turned to shake the boatman lightly and strive to restore him by
gentle means, but his efforts were not required; for one of the small
boys seated directly behind Ethan acted promptly, and at once produced
results as startling as they were unexpected.
CHAPTER XXIX.
AFTER THE TRAGEDY.
The mischievous lad had been one of those who had been regaling
themselves during the performance with peanuts, and the mark which
Ethan presented was more than his youthful spirit could resist.
Leaning forward, he quickly dropped into the wide-open mouth of the
slumbering boatman one of his choicest bits, and before Jock could
touch the man, the explosion came.
Ethan was instantly awake, and coughing, almost strangling, stared
wildly about him. For a moment even the somewhat pessimistic views to
which Hamlick was giving utterance on the stage were ignored by the
audience, and the noisy boatman was the observed of all observers.
His efforts were so violent that either strangulation or relief was
bound to result, and as the latter came, Ethan turned sharply and
looked behind him. The demure face of the lad who had been the means
of his somewhat sudden awakening did not even glance at him, and
after a brief pause Ethan solemnly resumed his seat, and Hamlick
proceeded with his misty surmisings.
Perhaps the play by this time had gained full headway, and nothing
could interfere with its progress. At all events, no further
interruptions occurred, save those of a minor character, and after a
time the end came. The audience then solemnly filed out from the room,
and soon few were left besides our party and those who had taken part
in the play.
In spite of the ludicrous events which had interfered somewhat with
the solemnity of the occasion, the boys were impressed with the amount
of study which Tom and some of his companions had bestowed upon the
parts assigned them. As Hamlick himself came forth from behind the
scenes he was warmly greeted by Jock, and complimented upon the
success he had attained.
"And do you really think we did it all right?" inquired Tom, eagerly.
"We have had a most enjoyable evening," replied Bob, soberly. "I can't
understand yet why it was that you selected such a play for a popular
audience."
"That was the schoolmaster's doings," said Tom. "I thought myself it
was almost too difficult a piece; but he told us to get something good
while we were at it, and something it would pay us to remember, so we
chose 'Hamlet.' We give something almost every year, you see. Last
year we gave the trial scene from 'Pickwick Papers,' but the folks
here didn't seem to see the fun in it. They took it all in sober
earnest, and never laughed from the beginning to the end. So this year
we thought we'd try something in the tragedy line."
"Where do you get all the books you read, Tom?" inquired Bob.
"Some of them are in our school library and some the minister lends to
us. We don't have very much besides history. I'm grateful to you," he
added, turning to Bert as he spoke, "for hearing me speak my part up
in the camp. It did me a sight of good."
"Don't mention it," said Bert, hurriedly.
Tom's reading had become a serious matter with our boys. His
attainments had been so unlooked for, and, as far as the solid work
was concerned, he had done so much more than they, that no one was
inclined to belittle him now, no matter how much the young boatman's
lack of familiarity with the manners and customs of "city folks" had
impressed them upon their arrival at the camp.
"Heow was it? Pooty fair, I judge," said Ethan, who now approached the
group, asking and answering his own question at the same time.
"The young people are to be congratulated upon the serious study they
have given Shakespeare's masterpiece," said Mr. Clarke, before any of
the boys could reply.
"Glad to hear ye say it," responded Ethan, who, in spite of his
apparent contempt for Tom's studies, was nevertheless interested far
more deeply than he cared to show. "I don' know much abeout sech
things myself," he continued. "I never read one o' Dickens's plays,
nor Shakespeare's neither, for that matter. I had to work fur a livin'
in my young days; but Tom here, he has lots o' time, and he jist keeps
his nose in a book pretty much all winter. What d'ye think o' it? Will
it do him any harm?" he inquired of Mr. Clarke, somewhat anxiously.
"Not a bit, not a bit," replied Mr. Clarke, cordially. "In fact, I
think I know of some young people who might profit by his example."
"I never did think there was sech a sight o' difference between city
folks and country folks. Neow ye've seen this same performance in the
place where you live, I take it?"
"Yes," replied Mr. Clarke.
"An' ye really think the young folks here hev done it abeout as well
as the folks down to New York, do ye?"
"There were differences, of course. You must expect that."
"Of course; of course," said Ethan, delightedly. "Mebbe ye'd like to
go over to Mis' Brown's. The young folks have gone there. They're to
have some ice cream, I b'lieve. 'Twon't cost ye much, fur it's only
eight cents a dish, two fur fifteen."
As it was not late, the invitation was eagerly accepted, an added zest
being given when it was learned that the profits from the sale of the
cream were to be added to those of the play, and that all were to be
expended for the improvement of the walks in the little hamlet. The
party accordingly made their way down the rough stairway and along the
street, Tom having previously left them, and soon arrived at "Mis'
Brown's," or the "Widow Brown's," as she was familiarly called by her
neighbors.
Her establishment was found to be a unique one. A small "store" was in
the front of the building, and on the few shelves were seen jars
containing some toothsome, though apparently venerable, sticks of
candy. Slate pencils, a few forlorn articles of "fancy work," spools
of thread and such like necessities were the other parts of her stock
in trade, but the sounds of revelry which came from an inner room left
no doubt in the minds of the visitors as to the place where the ice
cream was to be had, or as to the occupation which was then going on
at the time.
Ethan boldly led the way, and as the door was opened, two long tables
were seen, upon which were dishes of the famous article for which our
party had come, and upon which the "young folks" already there were
feasting. The unexpected entrance brought a solemn hush upon the room,
and one young fellow who was standing near the head of one of the
tables suddenly sank into his seat again.
"That's Tim Wynn," whispered Ethan. "He's been cuttin' up for the
young folks, I s'pose. He's awfully funny, an' they all like to have
him 'round."
"There doesn't seem to be any place for us," suggested Mr. Clarke.
"Perhaps we'd better not stop to-night."
"I'll fix ye out in a minit," said Ethan, hastily. "Here's the widow,
now. Mis' Brown, can't ye find a place for these folks? They want some
o' yer ice cream, an' every one counts neow. Mebbe they'll buy enough
to get another plank or two for the walks."
The hint was not to be lost, and speedily another table was prepared
by placing two planks across some "horses," and as soon as chairs had
been brought, the party all seated themselves and were speedily
served, Ethan himself taking one of the chairs upon Mr. Clarke's
invitation.
Miss Bessie whispered to Ben, who was seated beside her, that "it
wasn't ice cream at all, it was only frozen corn starch;" but whatever
the name may have been, the dishes were speedily cleared, Ethan's
disappearing the most rapidly of all, as with heaping spoonfuls he
swallowed the treat, apparently unmindful of its chilling temperature.
"I guess ye don't get nothin' better'n that deown to New York," he
remarked with satisfaction, as he glanced up at Mr. Clarke.
"We never have anything just like this," replied Mr. Clarke, kindly.
"Have some more, Ethan?"
"Thank ye, sir. I don' mind if I do, if it's all the same to you.
Here!" he suddenly added, as if he had been struck with a sudden
thought, "there's some lemingade, too. It's only three cents a cup,
and I'll stand treat for the crowd."
"Permit me," said Mr. Clarke, quickly; and "lemingade" was at once
added to the replenished dishes.
"Your young people are to be congratulated, Ethan," said Mr. Clarke,
when all at last arose from the table. "You have quite a good-sized
fund for your village improvements. Have you any idea how much they
have made?"
"I don't s'pose they can tell jest yet. Prob'ly fifteen or twenty
dollars."
"You can add this to the sum, with my compliments, then," said Mr.
Clarke, as he slipped a ten dollar bill into the astonished boatman's
hand.
Almost too surprised by the gift to express his thanks, Ethan
responded to their "good night," and the party at once departed for
their yacht.
It was a glorious summer evening they discovered when the boat moved
out from the dock and began to speed over the silent river. In the
moonlight the rushing waters glimmered like silver, and the low-lying
shores cast shadows which were reflected almost as in the light of
day. The silent stars twinkled in the clear heavens, and the air of
eternal peace seemed to rest over all.
The young people were enjoying themselves too keenly to be silent long
even amidst such surroundings, and as the experiences of the evening
were recounted, in every way so novel and different from anything they
had ever seen before, their laughter rang out over the great river,
and seemed to be caught up and sent flying by the very rocks and
shores which they passed.
At last Miss Bessie started a song: "And every little wave has his
night-cap on," and for a time all other things were forgotten; while
Mr. and Mrs. Clarke joined in the spirit of the frolic as if they,
too, were as young as their young companions.
Altogether the evening had been such an enjoyable one that it was
almost with a feeling of disappointment that the boys at last
perceived in the distance the white tents on Pine Tree Island. The
songs had ceased now, and Bob said:--
"Mr. Clarke, I meant to have asked you to tell us the rest of that
story about the pirate of the St. Lawrence."
"Who? Bill Johnston?" asked Mr. Clarke.
"Yes, I believe that was his name."
"Oh, well, that story will keep until next time."
"Yes, but the summer is almost gone now, and there won't be many 'next
times.' We'll be going home soon."
"Not for some weeks yet, I trust. September is the most glorious of
all the months on the river. When the leaves begin to turn, and the
nights are so cool that you need a fire on the hearth in your cottage,
and the air is so bracing that it is a delight just to breathe it, and
the ducks begin to come, and you can vary your fishing with gunning,
why, that's the best time of all the year. My nearest neighbors have
even stayed here all winter, once or twice."
"It must be a wild sight here then," suggested Jock. "When the ice is
so thick you can drive over it with a horse and sleigh, and the wind
sweeps down the river at the rate of sixty miles an hour, it must be
great fun to be here, and feel that you've got a good warm snug place,
and can still see it all."
"Better to see it than feel it, I fancy," laughed Mr. Clarke. "I enjoy
the river as much as any one, but I know where to draw the line.
Still, if I could bottle up some of the September air and take it back
to town with me, to use when occasion demanded, I should not object."
Miss Bessie and Ben had been taking no part in the general
conversation, apparently being much more interested in one of their
own.
"I want to ask you a question," she had said to Ben, who was seated
next to her.
"Say on," responded Ben. "I'm all ears."
"Not quite all," replied the girl, glancing at Ben's long form as she
spoke. "But what I want to know is whether you are really going to
enter the canoe races next week?"
"Why?"
"Because."
"Oh, well, I'll have to tell you, you have such good reasons for
asking. No one in the world, or at least in the camp, knows it; but I
am going in."
"Aren't you afraid?"
"Afraid of what?"
"Oh, of falling into the water, or being beaten, or I don't know
what."
"That remains to be seen," said Ben, sitting suddenly erect. "Now one
good turn is said to deserve another, so as you've had a turn at me,
I'll take mine now."
"What do you mean?"
"Are _you_ going into the races?"
"Yes," replied Miss Bessie, after a brief hesitation. "That is, if my
father is willing; but I don't want you to tell any one about it,
either."
"Madam, I shall be silent. Do you recall the words of the immortal
'Hamlick' to-night on that subject?"
"No. What were they?"
"'Let us go in together;
And still your fingers on your lips, I pray.'"
"Agreed," responded Miss Bessie. "I'll not tell about you, and you're
not to tell about me."
"Oh you'll not tell," retorted Ben. "I never saw a girl yet who would
do that."
The conversation was suddenly interrupted, for the yacht was now
approaching the dock. To the surprise of the boys, they discovered
that some one was in the camp, and hastily bidding their friends good
night, they all turned and ran swiftly toward the tents.
CHAPTER XXX.
BEN'S DISCOVERY.
It is doubtful whether Pine Tree Island, since the days when the red
men had dwelt upon its shores, had heard such a shout as went up from
our boys when they discovered that the visitor was Jock's father. When
the lad learned that his mother was at Alexandria Bay, and that she
and his father had come from New York that very day, nothing would
satisfy him but to return to the hotel.
Before they departed, Jock's father explained that he had come over to
the camp in the early evening with a boatman, but when he discovered
that no one was there, he had decided to remain until they returned.
As it was now after ten o'clock, he had begun to feel somewhat uneasy;
but the fact that all were gone, and that everything about the camp
seemed to be in good order, had led him to believe that they could be
in no danger, at all events, and so he had waited until the time when
his patience had been amply rewarded.
After the messages from the other homes had been delivered, and Mr.
Cope had satisfied himself that all were well, he said, "I think we'd
better go back to the hotel now, my boy. Your mother will be uneasy
about me, to say nothing of you."
"Do you think it will be safe for Jock to go?" inquired Bob, soberly.
"Safe? Why, yes. Why shouldn't it be safe?"
"Oh, I don't know. We've been living here in primitive style, you
know, and whether Jock will remember how to behave is a question."
"It's time he reviewed his lessons, then," was the reply. "Good night,
boys," he added, as he started toward the dock.
The campers followed Jock and his father to the dock, and as they were
about to put off, Bob called out, "I say, Jock, don't forget to use
your fork when you go into the dining room to-morrow."
"I'll try not to," promised Jock.
"And if I'm not mistaken they have napkins there, too."
"Good night, fellows. I'll see you in the morning," called Jock; and
the skiff soon disappeared in the darkness.
Few words were spoken by the remaining campers that night as they
prepared for bed. Perhaps the presence of Jock's father, and the
eagerness of their friend to see his mother, may have produced similar
longings in their own hearts; but if it was so, no one referred to
them, and soon the great pile of logs was sending its ruddy glow over
the shadows of the silent river, and the sounds which came from the
tent indicated that any possible feeling of homesickness had at
least been forgotten for the time.
When Bert awoke early in the following morning, he speedily discovered
that he was alone in the tent. As he dressed himself hastily, and ran
forth toward the bank of the river, he discovered the long form of Ben
paddling in his canoe not far away, but Bob was nowhere to be seen.
It was such an unusual occurrence for Bob to be awake so early in the
morning that the sturdy Bert was at a loss to account for his absence.
As a rule, Bob was the last to appear for breakfast, and not
infrequently a dash of cold water had been required to make him fully
aware of the hour; and now to find him gone was, to say the least,
surprising.
Ethan and Tom arrived, but still Bob did not appear. Ben came in from
his daily task, but he, too, had not seen the missing Bob, and
declared that he had left him sleeping in the tent when he himself had
departed. The absence certainly was strange, and the boys were just
beginning to feel uneasy as to the missing boy's whereabouts, when the
lad in question was seen approaching the camp. But he was coming from
among the trees, and his eager friends hailed him with the question,--
"Where have you been, Bob?"
"Out taking a peep at the rising sun."
"You've been taking more than that," exclaimed Ben, quickly, as he
perceived that Bob's garments were all dripping wet. "You've been in
the water."
"The early dew is heavy here," replied Bob, evasively, as he turned to
the tent to change his clothing.
It was evident that Bob did not intend to disclose the purpose of his
early rising, and Ben's suspicions were at once aroused. He concluded
that his friend was practising for the race in which he himself was to
enter. He did not refer to his surmise, however, and in a few minutes
Bob came forth and took his seat at the table with his friends.
Soon after breakfast, Jock, accompanied by his father and mother,
returned to the camp, and the greeting which Mr. Cope gave his old
schoolfellow, Ethan, was one which warmed the heart of that worthy
boatman.
"I thought mebbe ye'd forgotten yer old friends since ye've got so
rich," said Ethan, soberly.
"Forgotten them? Why, man, they're the best part of my life. I've a
painting of the old red schoolhouse hanging in my dining room, and I
never see it without thinking of the boys and girls who were there
years ago, and the good times we used to have."
"Got a pictur of it? Ye don't say so!" exclaimed Ethan, in surprise.
"Well, I never thought nobody'd want a pictur o' that place. It's most
gone to rack an' ruin now. I'm afeard we'll have to fix it up purty
quick or it'll fall down o' itself."
"That's too bad; I should think the district would keep it in repair."
"The deestrict hain't got no money. The only folks hereabouts what has
any money are mostly those who've gone off deown to New York. Seems as
if 'most any fool could make money deown there. The' say as how Homer
Perkins's boy has gone deown there, an' is a-gettin' a dollar an' a
half a day the whole year through, an' all he has to do is to drive a
hoss car."
Mr. Cope laughed as he replied, "I'm telling you the truth, Ethan,
when I say I never worked so hard in my life as I do now. I used to
pick up stones on the old farm, and haul and chop wood, and get up at
four o'clock in the morning and milk eight or ten cows before
breakfast, and then carry the milk to the factory, and that was before
the day's work was supposed to have begun; but all that's as nothing
compared with the way I have to work now."
Ethan was evidently incredulous, and said, "What time do ye get up in
the mornin' now?"
"About eight o'clock."
"And I s'pose ye don't get down to yer store till abeout nine?"
"I usually go down to the office about that time."
"An' when do ye shut up?"
"Anywhere from half-past four to six."
"An' ye call _that_ workin' harder 'n ye did on the old stone hill
farm, do ye?"
"Yes, a good deal harder. It's true I used to get tired and go to bed
some nights feeling as if every bone in my body ached, but I would go
to sleep right away and forget it all, and next morning I'd be all
ready for another day. Now I have to carry my load day and night, and
there is no escape. I have hundreds, yes, thousands, of men dependent
on me. When hard times come, and it sometimes seems to me that they
come pretty often, I carry a good many of these men through just for
the sake of their families, and when good times come they seem to
forget all about it, and some of them are always ready to make
trouble. There are times, Ethan, when it seems to me my load is
heavier than I can bear. I almost never have a day off, and sometimes
I long to return to the old farm, and am hungry for its peace and
quiet."
"I guess there ain't nuthin' to hinder ye from comin' back if ye want
to," grunted Ethan. "The old place is for sale, an 'twon't cost over
twenty-five or thirty dollars an acre. Ye can stand that much, can't
ye? Yer boy here says he guesses ye're worth more 'n five thousand
dollars."
Mr. Cope's cheeks flushed slightly, and he glanced reprovingly at
Jock; but evidently wishing to change the subject, he said, "I fancy,
Ethan, that most of the boys and girls who used to go to school with
us are gone now."
"Pretty much."
"What's ever become of Hiram Munsell? Hi Munsell we called him."
"Oh, he went out to the state o' Milwaukee. He's got rich too, they
say."
"Went where?"
"The state o' Milwaukee. He's a policeman an' gets a thousan' dollars
a year, or leastwise that's what the report is. You know as much as I
do about whether it's true or not. I hev my doubts, myself. Hi always
was one to stretch it pooty good, as you may recommember yerself."
Mr. Cope glanced again reprovingly at the boys, who for some strange
reason appeared to be highly delighted at the reference to the
"state" to which the wealthy Hi had gone, and said quickly,--
"Well, Ethan, I want to talk over old times with you some more, and I
want to go over to the old schoolhouse, too; but I'm to have only a
day or two here, and I fancy the boys are more interested in my
putting that to good use than they are in our reminiscences, so if
you're agreed, we'll try the sport for a time. Can you take us fishing
now?"
Ethan responded that he could, and when the two skiffs were made ready
it was discovered that Bob was not to go with them. Ben said nothing,
though his suspicions were at once aroused, and at first he, too, was
inclined to remain in camp; but Jock's evident disappointment was so
marked that he hastily recalled his words, and said that he would go,
making one proviso, that he should be permitted to take his canoe with
him.
Mrs. Cope was to remain in the camp, declaring that she wished to look
after some of the belongings of the boys, which she said were in a
"sad state," though just what she meant by the expression she did not
explain, and that she was not in the least afraid of being lonesome.
The party soon set forth in the skiffs, from one of which Ben's ever
present canoe was towed, and Ethan directed the way to a spot where
none of them had as yet been. Mr. Cope apparently was most
enthusiastic of all. Whatever may have been his inability to cast
aside his pressing problems when he was at home, here certainly they
were not to be found, and he entered into the sport with all the zest
of the boys themselves.
Their former successes in no way seemed to interfere with the
eagerness of the campers in the present experience, and when at last
Ethan and Tom rowed ashore to prepare dinner, they had all had a
degree of success which corresponded with their most ardent desires.
After dinner the sport was resumed, but about the middle of the
afternoon Ethan rowed his skiff close in to the other, and Mr. Cope
called out: "Boys, we've decided to land over here and go up to the
old schoolhouse, which isn't more than a mile and a half from the
shore. Jock wants to go; and if you would like to go too, we should be
glad to have you. What do you say?"
Ben looked at Bert a moment, and then said, "Thank you, Mr. Cope, Bert
would like to go and so should I, but I ought to go back to the camp."
"Why? What's wrong?" inquired Mr. Cope, quickly.
"There isn't anything wrong, only I've something I ought to do. I was
just thinking that I would take my canoe and go back, and leave you
all here anyway. I didn't want to break up your sport."
"He wants to write a letter, I guess," said Jock. "Well, Bert, you
come along, and let Ben go back if he wants to."
The proposal was agreed to, and Tom was to wait on the shore and guard
the skiff while his companions were gone to visit the scene of Mr.
Cope's and Ethan's earlier days. Ben did not wait, but hoisting his
little sail began to speed over the river in the direction of Pine
Tree Island.
What the urgent duty was which had induced him to depart from his
companions became apparent when he approached within a half mile of
the camp. He then lowered his sail and carefully scanned the river
before him.
Apparently satisfied with the inspection, he took his paddle and
began to send the light canoe swiftly over the water, but instead of
making his way to the dock he paddled around to the opposite side of
the island.
There he landed, and lifting his canoe, bore it up the shore and
carefully concealed it among the bushes. Satisfied that he had not
been seen, he cautiously made his way toward the shore of a sheltered
bay not far away. As soon as he had arrived at a place from which the
waters of the bay could be seen, he halted for a moment and peered
cautiously about him.
Evidently not satisfied with what he saw, he began to advance again,
stepping carefully from tree to tree, and at last arrived at a
sheltered spot from which he could see both the shore and bay.
Instantly he was deeply interested in something he there discovered,
for he peered farther out from behind the tree, and watched Bob, who
now could be seen near the shore.
"The rascal! He thought he'd fool us all," muttered Ben, as he watched
his friend, who plainly was unaware that his actions were observed.
"What's that he's doing?" he suddenly added. "If that doesn't beat
anything I ever saw before!"
So interested was Ben that he remained in the secluded spot for more
than an hour, watching the movements of Bob, who was in sight all the
time. Occasionally the watching Ben almost laughed aloud, and
frequently uttered exclamations expressive of his astonishment or
pleasure,--any one who might have heard him could hardly have told
which,--but at last he retraced his way through the woods to the spot
where he had left his canoe.
Speedily embarking, he paddled back around the island, and soon
afterward approached the dock; and the first person he discerned there
was Bob himself, seated on the edge and lazily swinging his feet out
over the water.
CHAPTER XXXI.
THE RACES.
Ben did not refer to his discovery, and after he had explained the
reasons why he had returned alone to the camp he joined Mrs. Cope, who
was seated in a camp-chair on the high bluff, and delightedly watching
the constantly shifting scene which the great river presented. The
pleasure Jock's mother felt in the marked improvement in her son's
appearance was certainly shared by his two friends, and Bob demurely
remarked that he even had hopes that Ben and Bert would also
"improve," a wish which Ben laughingly declared was destined to be
blighted.
As the shadows of evening began to appear, the return of the absent
members of the party at once drew the attention of all to them, and
while Ethan and Tom prepared supper, Mr. Cope described his visit to
the old schoolhouse, and the enjoyment he had experienced in
revisiting the scenes of his boyhood. His wife declared that she
believed he had regained some of his boyish spirits too, for it had
been long since she had seen him so animated and enthusiastic.
Just as Ethan announced that supper was ready, a skiff was seen
approaching the dock, and a messenger-boy advanced with several
telegrams, which Mr. Cope had left word at the hotel should be
forwarded to the camp.
As Mr. Cope tore open the yellow envelopes, Ethan curiously observed
his old-time friend, and when the telegrams had been read, said,--
"I hope ye haven't had any bad news, Jock?"
Mr. Cope laughed as he replied, "Rather bad for me, I fear. I shall
have to return to New York to-night. You see, Ethan, I can't have more
than a day off. I almost envy you your freedom."
"Did they send ye word in the telegrams?" inquired the boatman.
"Yes. They are about important business engagements."
"Bus'ness!" exclaimed Ethan. "I didn't s'pose any one ever telegraphed
jist about bus'ness. I thought nobody ever telegraphed unless somebody
was dead. Hi Perkins once telegraphed to his ma when he thought he
was goin' to die with the pewmony; but it costs four shillin' for ten
words, I'm told. Must be mighty important business what would make
anybody send ye five or six on 'em."
"It is important; so important that I shall have to go back to the Bay
and start for home to-night. I'm sorry, too. But then, if a business
man doesn't have very much outside pleasure in life, his wife and
children can have it, and he must take his in knowing that."
Soon after supper Mr. Cope bade good-by to the boatman and boys, and
with Mrs. Cope and Jock departed for Alexandria Bay. Jock was to
remain at the hotel for the night, but was to return to the camp in
the morning, though his mother was to stay at the hotel until the boys
should be ready to break camp and go home with her.
Apparently Jock's mother enjoyed the experience of the days which
followed as much as did the boys themselves. Every day she was rowed
over to Pine Tree Island, and sometimes the boys were persuaded to
return with her for a dinner at the hotel, or to be present of an
evening when something of special interest was occurring in the
parlors.
Her friends, the Clarkes, also did much to add to the pleasure, for
with their yacht they made various trips among the islands, or planned
for picnics which were a never failing source of delight to all.
At last came the great day of the canoe races, and as it had been
arranged that all the friends should go on Mr. Clarke's yacht to the
place selected, and take a position on the river from which the races
could be seen from beginning to end, the occasion had been looked
forward to with great anticipations.
When the happy party stopped at the dock for Mrs. Cope and the boys,
the greetings were unusually enthusiastic, for a more perfect day had
not been seen since the campers had come to Pine Tree Island.
A few masses of silver clouds could be seen in the sky, but the sun
was shining clear and strong. A gentle breeze ruffled the surface of
the river, and the air was delightfully cool and bracing. Life was
indeed worth living now, and as the light-hearted members of the party
assembled on board the yacht, their laughter and joyous expressions
seemed all a part of the day.
When Ben quietly picked up his canoe and placed that too on board, a
shout greeted him; but as all already knew that he was determined to
enter the contest, for he previously had entered his name, no one was
surprised; but when, a moment later, Bob came, bringing with him a
dress-suit case, evidently heavily laden, a fresh shout of surprise
was given him.
"Oh, I knew Ben would fall into the water," he declared, "so I have
brought a change of clothing for him. I'm very tender-hearted. It's my
nature, though, and I can't help it, so you needn't bestow any praise
on me."
"I shouldn't be surprised if you needed a change yourself," rejoined
Ben, "before you've finished your race."
"Whom are you talking about?" demanded Bob, in surprise. "I haven't
had any time to practise. I've been too busy."
"I know all about your busy-ness," retorted Ben, sharply.
Bob glanced up quickly, but Ben was looking out over the river now,
and it was impossible to catch his eye. The yacht was free from the
dock by this time, and was speeding swiftly down the river. For a
time, apparently, all other things were forgotten in the joy of the
morning. Other parties could be seen on the river, and it was evident
that they too had started for the same destination, and as the voyage
continued, the number of the boats steadily increased. Canoes, skiffs,
steam-yachts, launches, sailboats, all were there, some draped with
bright colors, all displaying flags, and every one carrying
eager-hearted spectators who were acting as if life never had known a
care or sorrow.
At last our party arrived at the place where the races were to be
held, and bright-colored buoys, indicative of the course, could be
seen on the water. Patrol boats kept the course free, and Mr. Clarke
soon selected a favorable place and his yacht was anchored.
Ben now prepared to take his canoe and start for the head of the
course, where all those who were to participate were to assemble. As
he lowered the canoe into the water, Bob approached him, and said
soberly,--
"I think I'll go with you, Ben. I've got your clothes here, and
you'll need some one to look after you. I'm the kind-hearted friend to
do that very thing."
"I was expecting you to say that," replied Ben. "I was wondering why
you didn't speak up before. Where's your craft, Bob?"
"My craft! Why, I haven't any here, and you know it;" but a peculiar
twinkle in Ben's eye caused him to approach, and a whispered
conversation at once followed.
No one of the others could hear what was said, but the result was
apparent when Ben consented to his friend's going with him, and in a
brief time both boys were in the canoe, and Ben was ready to push off.
"You'll not forget that we have some luncheon on board, boys," called
Miss Bessie. "You'll surely be back in time to have some of that."
"Don't be alarmed," laughed Ben. "I never knew Bob to be late for
anything of that kind. I trust you have enough; for he'll be hungry, I
can promise you."
A cheer followed the boys as Ben dipped his paddle in the water, and
the canoe darted forward under his powerful strokes. His long form
was not particularly graceful, but the speed of his canoe promised
well, and Jock turned to the others and said,--
"I shouldn't be surprised if Ben did get a place in the finals to-day.
He's improved wonderfully. The way he has kept at it is a lesson for
us all. I wish he might win. I wonder what Bob really went with him
for? Do you know I half suspect he's got a scheme of some kind of his
own."
No one replied, for the sound of a pistol was now heard, and the first
of the races was begun. It was a contest between cat-boats, and as the
beautiful little crafts swept into sight and dipped low before the
strong and favoring breeze, the shrill whistles of the steam-yachts,
the waving of handkerchiefs, and the shouts of the people welcomed
them.
As no one in our party was acquainted with any of the participants in
this race, their interest naturally was not as keen as it was to be in
some of the contests which were to follow, but they nevertheless were
enthusiastic observers of the man[oe]uvres of the skilfully handled
boats. On they came, keeping well in line, their white sails and
whiter sides glistening in the sunlight, and presenting a wondrously
beautiful spectacle as they swept down the river.
As Mr. Clarke now discovered that most of the yachts were not
anchored, but were free to follow the contestants outside the buoys,
he, too, took his anchor on board and steamed down the river so that
they could watch the boats all the way. The shores of the islands were
lined with interested spectators, and the waving of bunting, and the
cheers of the people, as the fleet boats approached, redoubled.
At last the stake was turned, and the boats started on the home
stretch. They were not bunched as they had been, but three had gained
over their rivals, and, well together, were tacking and striving each
to gain an advantage over the others. It could be seen now that one
was more skilfully handled than the other two, and soon it was
distinctly gaining upon both. On and on they came, and finally the
_Thistle_, bending gracefully before the breeze, swept first across
the line, the men on board swinging their caps and shouting in their
delight, while the screams of the whistles and the cheers of the
spectators sounded shrilly in response. It certainly was a very
inspiring sight, and the party on board Mr. Clarke's yacht, though
they were strangers to the winners, were cheering as lustily in their
delight as if it had been one of their own company who had secured the
first prize.
A race between canoes equipped with double bat-winged sails followed,
and the stirring scene was again enacted. The whistles blew and
banners were waved, and the winning boat was as lustily cheered as the
successful one in the first contest had been.
Then followed a contest between canoes with a single bat-wing sail,
and once more the interest of the spectators voiced itself in the same
expressive manner which had been used before.
The excitement on the yacht very markedly increased when it was
learned that the next race was to be between canoes with one paddler
in each.
In the row of beautiful little canoes which took their places in line,
Ben's long form could be easily distinguished. As the party hailed his
appearance with a cheer, Ben turned and discovered them, and while
striving to wave his cap in response, almost destroyed his balance,
and was very nearly thrown into the river.
There was no disposition among his friends to laugh now, and the girls
uttered a little cry of dismay at the threatened mishap; but as Ben
speedily regained his balance, they all became silent as they watched
him intently. His long arms were bare, and his bright red sweater was
to be easily distinguished in the line. In a moment the pistol
sounded, and the racers were off.
There were seven contestants, and their paddles struck the water
together. For a few minutes the line was almost unbroken; then it
could be seen that three or four were pulling ahead of their rivals,
and among the number was Ben. Faster and faster swept the frail little
barks, and the interest of the spectators was evidently much keener
than it had been in the other contests. The forms of the paddlers
seemed to move like clock-work. The paddles were dipped rapidly and
steadily, and the race between the leaders was very close. Slowly Ben
gained upon his nearest rival and passed him, and then, with longer,
swifter strokes, strove to gain upon the two who were still in advance
of him.
Inch by inch, foot by foot, the distance decreased. Soon only about
twenty yards remained between him and the end. Once more the
determined boy bent to his task. His body swayed back and forth, the
paddle was driven deeper into the water, and the light canoe seemed to
gain increased speed. People were cheering wildly all about him, and a
cloud of banners seemed to be waving on every side.
Again Ben responded, and was striving to use all his remaining power.
He was not directly behind his competitors, being several yards to
their left, and now he was not more than two feet in their rear. If
only the course were a little longer, he thought, he would surely win;
but shutting his teeth firmly together, he doggedly resolved to do his
best. His eyes were almost closed, and his breath was coming in gasps.
Suddenly there was a moment of intense silence, as the shouting
abruptly ceased, but Ben was oblivious of it all. In a moment,
however, the shouting redoubled, there was a shrill screech of the
whistles, and Ben knew that he was across the line and alone.
As he turned about he discovered that his competitors had met with a
mishap, and that one, in his zeal, had paddled directly into the
other, and both canoes had been capsized in the collision. Their
misfortune had left Ben the winner.
The yacht speedily approached, and as the girls waved their
handkerchiefs and his friends called out their approval, Mr. Clarke
assisted him to come on board.
"I can congratulate you on winning the race," said Mr. Clarke,
cordially.
"Oh, I haven't won it," replied Ben, his flushed face beaming with
pleasure. "That's only the preliminary. The finals are to come off
this afternoon."
Somewhat disappointed, the party was headed up the river again, and
soon approached the starting-place. They all laughed when they learned
that a tub race was now to take place, and the astonishment of all
except Ben was great when they discovered that one of the contestants
was none other than their missing friend, Bob.
CHAPTER XXXII.
CONCLUSION.
A tub race was a decided novelty to all the members of our party
except the young ladies, who had seen one in the preceding summer, but
there were special reasons now why they were as interested as their
friends in the contest which was to take place. There were tubs large
and small, some new and some evidently having seen hard service, and
the paddles were of various sizes and ages. There were at least
fifteen of the contestants, and Bob's sturdy form could be easily
distinguished, for he was the fourth from the end nearest our friends.
The report of the pistol rang out sharply, and in a moment the race
was begun. The scene which followed was one that beggared description.
The observant crowd of spectators shouted and cheered and laughed, and
it almost seemed as if pandemonium itself reigned supreme. Meanwhile
the contestants entered into the struggle with apparently all the
zeal that had been manifested by their predecessors. The paddles were
driven deep into the water and some of the men were making desperate
efforts to outstrip their fellows. But the control of the awkward
crafts was no simple matter. At times, for some unaccountable reason,
the tubs would begin to turn and whirl, and, despite the efforts of
the paddlers, would go in a direction apparently opposite to that
which was desired. One poor fellow had already been thrown into the
water, and as he was speedily drawn forth by his waiting friends,
shouts of laughter seemed to be his only reward.
Bob was moving steadily with the current, and although several tubs
were in advance of him, he did not appear to be troubled. He was not
exerting himself as were most of the others, his foremost desire being
to keep his tub from whirling and within the current.
Suddenly one of the tubs was seen to be headed directly toward Bob.
The occupant struggled desperately to prevent a collision, but his
efforts only served to increase his helplessness.
"Look out!" called Bob, sharply. "Keep off, or you'll hit me!"
The man endeavored to change his course, but his increased exertions
only deprived him of what little control he still had, and in a moment
the twisting, awkward craft came straight toward the alarmed Bob.
The lad was watchful, however, and as the tub came within reach he
gave it a sudden push with his paddle and the peril was averted. The
effect almost destroyed Bob's own balance, and for a moment it seemed
as if he must be capsized, but as he righted himself he glanced at his
rival, who was now in a sad state. He had raised his own paddle to
return the thrust the anxious Bob had given him, but his zeal had not
been wisely directed. The tub leaned dangerously to one side and as
the boatman strove to right it, he threw himself too far to the other
side, and after "wabbling" for an instant, it suddenly capsized and
threw its occupant into the water. As he came to the surface he
hastily swam to the upturned tub, and was soon rescued by the men who
were skirting the racers for that very purpose.
Bob, however, had no time to waste upon his unfortunate competitor,
and was carefully guiding his own treacherous craft. He could see
that some of the desperate men about him were going sidewise or
backward, and were striking out wildly with their paddles, striving to
change the method as well as the direction of the procedure. Others
were whirling and spinning about in a manner to make even an observer
dizzy, to say nothing of the struggling paddler himself. Bob was not
striving for speed, and was trusting much to the swiftness of the
current to bear him on toward the coveted goal, and as he drew near
the end, the wisdom of his course became apparent. Those who had been
in advance of him were losing the advantage they had gained by some
unfortunate stroke of their paddles, which sent their unwieldy tubs to
whirling madly, and speed and control were soon both lost.
On and on moved the few tubs which still were in the race, bobbing up
and down, and frequently stopping and whirling madly about as if some
sudden and irresistible impulse had seized them. The confusion
increased as the goal could be seen, and the first prize lay between
Bob and two rivals.
Slowly and carefully Bob increased his stroke, and now only ten feet
yet remained to be crossed. The three tubs were close together, and
bunched for the final effort. Suddenly Bob drove his paddle far down
into the water, and exerting all his strength, sent his tub forward
with his final effort; but directly in front of him one of his rivals
had drifted, and in a moment they struck together. The other
contestant, to save himself, had instantly grasped Bob's tub and
"wabbling," careening, threatening every moment to capsize, the two
crossed the line together, and their mutual rival was a full yard
behind them.
Instantly the whistles and shouts announced the end of the race, and
Bob's rival turned good-naturedly to him and said,--
"I've got the first prize and you the second, though you wouldn't have
had it if I hadn't towed you over the line."
"That's for the judges to decide," laughed Bob. "I think you fouled me
and held me back with your hands, or I'd been first."
The boats now swarmed in, and, amidst the laughter of the people, it
was decided that the first prize should be divided, for the two tubs
had crossed the line after the manner in which the Siamese twins had
moved through life, together.
"It's another case of 'united we stand, divided we fall,'" remarked
Bob, as the decision was announced.
But there was no opportunity for further conversation, for Mr.
Clarke's yacht now steamed close in, and Bob and his tub were received
on board.
"A wise man of Gotham who went to sea in a bowl," said Miss Bessie, as
Bob quietly took his seat. "I congratulate you."
"Thank you," replied Bob. "Did you say you had had your luncheon?"
"No, we've been waiting for the victor. We'll have it now."
As she departed to look after the various baskets, Jock said, "Bob,
you're the greatest fellow I ever saw. You never seem to be working
much, but yet you always come out all right. It's the same way with
your studies. You don't work as hard as I do, but you always beat me.
I don't understand it."
"Don't you believe that Bob doesn't work," interrupted Bert. "I know
him better than you do. It's the thing he doesn't do that helps Bob,
as much as what he does do. Now I watched him out there in the race.
Most of the other fellows were striking out with their paddles in
every direction, but Bob here just watched the current and let that do
most of the work. It's the same way with his studies. Most of the
fellows spend half their time in fussing around and getting ready, and
then breaking in on their work after they've once begun. But you never
saw Bob do that. He never makes a false move, or an unnecessary one,
and when he starts, he just keeps at the necessary things and lets the
others go. Bob does so well because he makes everything count."
"That's the secret of success, young man," said Mr. Clarke. "The
reason why so many men fail in life is because they waste their time
and strength in unnecessary things, and don't learn what not to do."
"I think our luncheon is ready now," said Miss Bessie, as she rejoined
the group. "I had a basket of fruit I was going to give you," she
added, speaking to Bob, "but I'm afraid it's spoiled."
"Never mind. To the victors belong the spoils," said Ben. "Give it to
him just the same."
A groan followed Ben's pun, but the sight of the welcome baskets
speedily banished all other thoughts, and for a time the scene on
board the yacht was one in which all who were there certainly
rejoiced. The perfect summer day, the sight of the many boats moving
about over the river, the bright colors to be seen on every side, the
animation and happiness of those on board the yacht, were sufficient
to inspire all, and certainly the party in which we are particularly
interested was not one that required much beyond the youth and health
which were theirs to make them have an enjoyable time.
Their delight was increased when in the "finals" for the canoe races
Ben was able to secure third prize. He himself was more than content
with the award, for he had been compelled to enter the lists against
some who had had the practice and experience of many summers, and he
had had but one. His long arms, and, above all, his persistence in the
face of all obstacles, had availed; and when our boys returned to camp
they were highly delighted with the achievements of the day, as we may
be well assured were the other members of the party.
On the way home Mr. Clarke had related the further story of the
exploits of the "pirate," Bill Johnston, but it is doubtful whether
any of the party retained a very clear recollection of the dark doings
of the aforesaid Bill, and even Bob himself had only a dim impression
that after various brilliant-hued deeds, in the so-called patriot war,
he had been captured and taken to Albany, but had soon procured a
release and returned to the Thousand Islands, where among his various
occupations he had been keeper of one of the lighthouses to the day of
his death.
Miss Bessie had not entered the canoe races, as her father had
objected, but she had expressed her willingness to race with Ben
whenever he felt disposed to enter into a contest with her. Whether it
was her challenge or not, I cannot say, but in the days which followed
there were many hours spent by our boys at "The Rocks," or in coursing
over the river in Mr. Clarke's fleet yacht.
And what days they were! Every morning brought its own fresh
experiences, and it was the regular thing for the boys to declare at
night when they returned to the camp and prepared for bed, that
_this_ was the best day yet.
But all things are said to have an end, and certainly the camp on Pine
Tree Island proved to be no exception to the rule. The September days
had come, and though the crowds about the river became decidedly
thinned, our boys still remained, and Jock's mother was still at the
hotel at Alexandria Bay. Only one week remained before the beginning
of the fall term in college, and it was at last decided that on the
morrow the camp should be broken.
It was with special pleasure the last evening in camp that Jock
broached a subject to Ethan and Tom in which he had been deeply
interested, and concerning which he had had much correspondence with
his father, and that was the promise of a position for Tom in Mr.
Cope's office in New York.
Ethan at first was inclined to demur, but at last gave his consent,
inasmuch as the position promised to be one which eventually might
yield even more than the marvellous "dollar and a half a day," to
which he had made such frequent references during the summer.
The last visit to the Clarkes had been made, the last sail taken in
Ethan's catboat, the last spin enjoyed in the canoes, and now the boys
were seated together for the last time before the roaring camp-fire,
which in honor of the occasion had been made even larger than usual.
Far out over the river the flickering lights cast their shadows. The
moaning in the tree tops was more pronounced, as was only fitting in a
September evening and before the departure of the boys. The sound of
the laughter in the camp was more subdued, and all seemed to feel the
sadness of parting, even from such inanimate objects as the rushing
river and the green-covered islands.
For a time the boys were silent, then Ben, who could not long refrain
from talking, said, "It's been a great summer, Jock. I don't know how
we'll ever repay you."
"You have done that already," replied Jock. "I'm glad you fellows have
had a good time. I know I've enjoyed it."
"There's been only one drawback," suggested Ben.
"What's that?"
"That volume of C's in the Cyclopædia. Cartier, Champlain, Cavon,
Cortereal, Chimney Island--"
"Oh, that's all right, too," replied Jock, laughing. "We've been on
_The Trail of the Early Discoverers_, haven't we? Well, we ought to
know something about them. We haven't had enough to spoil us."
"I trow not," interrupted Bob, solemnly.
"I say, fellows," said Jock, as a sudden thought seemed to strike him,
"wouldn't it be a great thing to keep on with this! We've been on this
trail this summer; now, why shouldn't we keep on and follow them into
other places next summer?"
"A colossal idea," said Bert, "if it can be worked out."
"I'm going to fix that," said Jock, decidedly. "Come on now, fellows,
it's time we were in bed. Let's fire off the cannon for the last
time."
In a moment the roar of the cannon awoke the echoes, and then silence
rested over the camp and the river.
* * * * *
BOOKS BY EVERETT T. TOMLINSON.
THE WAR OF 1812 SERIES
[Illustration]
Six volumes Cloth Illustrated by A. B.
Shute Price per volume reduced to $1.25
No American writer for boys has ever occupied a higher position
than Dr. Tomlinson, and the "War of 1812 Series" covers a field
attempted by no other juvenile literature in a manner that has
secured continued popularity.
The Search for Andrew Field
The Boy Soldiers of 1812
The Boy Officers of 1812
Tecumseh's Young Braves
Guarding the Border
The Boys with Old Hickory
ST. LAWRENCE SERIES
CRUISING IN THE ST. LAWRENCE
Being the third volume of the "St. Lawrence Series" Cloth
Illustrated Price $1.50
Our old friends, "Bob," "Ben," "Jock," and "Bert," having
completed their sophomore year at college, plan to spend the
summer vacation cruising on the noble St. Lawrence. Here they
not only visit places of historic interest, but also the Indian
tribes encamped on the banks of the river, and learn from them
their customs, habits, and quaint legends.
_PREVIOUS VOLUMES_
CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE
Or, On the Trail of the Early Discoverers
Cloth Illustrated $1.50
THE HOUSE-BOAT ON THE ST. LAWRENCE
Or, Following Frontenac
Cloth Illustrated $1.50
_BY THE SAME AUTHOR_
STORIES OF THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION
First and Second Series Cloth Illustrated $1.00 each
LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers-BOSTON
PHILLIPS EXETER SERIES
By A. T. DUDLEY
_Illustrated by Charles Copeland. Cloth. Price per vol., $1.25_
_FIRST VOLUME_
FOLLOWING THE BALL
[Illustration]
Here is an up-to-date story presenting American boarding-school
life and modern athletics. The scene will readily be recognized
as at Exeter. Of course football is an important feature, and in
tracing the development of the hero from a green player to an
expert it might serve as a guide. Other branches of athletics
are also finely dealt with. But it is far more than a football
book. It is a story of character formation told in a most
wholesome and manly way. In this development athletics play an
important part, to be sure, but are only one feature in carrying
the hero, "Dick Melvin," on to a worthy manhood.
"A seasonable school and football story, by a writer who knows
the game and knows boys as well. It is of the 'Tom Brown' type,
an uplifting as well as a lively story."--_Advance_, Chicago,
Ill.
_SECOND VOLUME_
MAKING THE NINE
[Illustration]
The cordial reception of the great football story, "Following
the Ball," which had the distinction of so fine a spirit in its
development of the hero's school life that not only the boys but
their elders were enthusiastic over it, has led to this second
book, in which baseball is sufficiently prominent to suggest the
title. It is a pleasure for a publisher to present such a book
as this, in every way worthy to continue the success of the
previous volume. The special points of excellence are that the
story is lively and worth telling, and the life presented is
that of a real school, interesting, diversified, and full of
striking incidents, while the characters are true and consistent
types of American boyhood and youth. The athletics are
technically correct, abounding in helpful suggestions, soundly
and wisely given, and the moral tone is high and set by action
rather than preaching.
LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers, Boston
TOM WINSTONE, "WIDE AWAKE"
By MARTHA JAMES
Author of "My Friend Jim" and "Jack Tenfield's Star"
Large 12mo. Cloth. Illustrated by W. Herbert Dunton. Price $1.00
[Illustration]
"Another book equally worthy of a place in our Sunday-school
libraries is TOM WINSTONE, 'WIDE AWAKE,' by Martha James. It is
a thorough-going boy's book of the right sort,--full of life,
bubbling over with high spirits and noble ambition; a most
intelligent interpretation of boy life and character. The young
hero of this narrative, equally efficient in athletics at school
and in the harder school of manly sacrifice, is a character well
worth knowing."--_Pilgrim Teacher, Boston._
"The young hero of the story, equally efficient in athletic
sports and in noble deeds, is well worth the acquaintance of
every healthy boy reader."--_Boston Transcript._
"Any healthy boy will delight in this book."--_Living Church,
Milwaukee, Wis._
"Another excellent story for boys is TOM WINSTONE, 'WIDE AWAKE,'
by Martha James. Here is a recital of adventure, with much
account of boyish sport, in a pure tone and with Christian
teaching."--_Fall River News._
"This is a real 'boy's story,' full of incidents and interesting
characters drawn to the life, while the tone is wholesome and
genuine."--_Portland Press._
"The author has done a good work for the lads of the generation,
and her effort will doubtless meet with the popularity it
deserves."--_Indianapolis Sentinel._
_For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of
price by the publishers._
LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers, Boston
Young Heroes of Wire and Rail
By ALVAH MILTON KERR
Illustrated by H. C. EDWARDS, J. C. LEYENDECKER, and others
_12mo Cloth Price $1.25_
[Illustration]
This is a book of wonderfully vivid stories of railroad life,
portraying the heroism of trainmen, telegraph operators, and
despatchers, each story a complete drama in itself, with
thrilling climax, and yet too truthful to be classed as
sensational. It is by Alvah Milton Kerr, formerly a
train-despatcher of long experience, and now a justly noted
writer of railroad stories, who has brought together from many
sources the most striking acts of heroism performed during the
last quarter of a century of railroad activity, and has cast
them in stories of singularly intense interest.
Most of these stories first appeared in "McClure's Magazine,"
"The Youth's Companion," "Philadelphia Saturday Evening Post"
and "Success;" which fact is a very strong guarantee of merit.
No one who begins reading these stories in this finely printed,
illustrated, and bound book will be likely to allow anything to
interfere with their completion.
"An ideal book for a young boy is 'Young Heroes of Wire and
Rail,' and, indeed, the older folks who begin to read will
continue to the end."--_Episcopal Recorder, Philadelphia._
"The tone of the work is healthful and inspiring."--_Boston
Herald._
"They teach more bravery, unselfishness and forethought in a
page than can be imparted in an hour of 'ethical' instruction
in school."--_New York Times._
"The tone of the stories is fine, showing unexpected bravery
and courage in many of the characters."--_Delineator, New
York._
"A book that not only yields entertainment and healthy
excitement, but reveals some of the possibilities always
confronting railroad workers and train
despatchers."--_Christian Register, Boston._
"They are calculated to inspire boys to become manly, and
incidentally they contain considerable valuable
information."--_Newark News._
_For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by
the publishers._
LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers, Boston
***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE***
******* This file should be named 42623-8.txt or 42623-8.zip *******
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/4/2/6/2/42623
Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.
Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.
*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that
- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg-tm works.
- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
of receipt of the work.
- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809
North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email
contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
For additional contact information:
Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
[email protected]
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org
This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
